Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.sapdocs.

info

http://www.slideshare.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book

Related

More
jamorama ac oustic guitar

jamorama le ad guitar

jamorama ac oustic guitar

beginners g uitar course

learn guitar course

beginner golf instruction

david nevogt

/362

beginner golf

Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.sapdocs.info
by Y. Z. MERCAN on Jan 04, 2012

149
views

Visit http://sapdocs.info/sap/basis/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book-for-beginners/ to download this exclusive SAP Basis Training material..

1 comment

Notes on Slide 6
1–1 of 1 comment

Ashok Krishtam at Wipro good
6 days ago

Subscribe to comments

1 Favorite Ashok Krishtam at Wipro
Tags sap basis
6 days ago

Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.sapdocs.info — Document Transcript

1 sur 56

12/01/2012 00:29

Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.sapdocs.info

http://www.slideshare.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book

1. 1 15-jul-11SAP BASIS 2. 2SAP BASISConsider the following example [EMAIL or RAILWAY]For Email - It requires a PC and an Application installed in it. Yahoo/ Google1. Client requests2. The request is processed by an interface3. The request reaches server4. The server process the request5. Response back to the user either {Ticket/ Email}This environment is called as a Client/ Server Architecture. 3. 3R/2 Client-Server1. Client provides an interface to communicate with the server.Eg: IE, GUI2. Client uses DB Client software to communicate with server3. Each request is processed by communicating with server onlyI.e. there is no intermediate layer in R/24. Servers are heavily loaded/ traffic, long queues there by reducing the performance of the servers.5. There is no queuing mechanism and only server queues are maintained.6. Server needs to process the request (Understanding the user language). Interpretation takes time.These are the disadvantages of R/2 Systems.Client Server Environment:Client requests and server responds. The major disadvantage of Client Server architecture is1. DB Client is installed on the client2. Processing takes place at client side3. No intermediate buffers for the frequently accessed content4. There is no queue mechanism to handle the requests there by servers are heavily loaded.5. The server side processing consumes resources to process (Interpret the user requests)The need of middle layer/ tier rose to come out of the steps. The result is the Application layer/ ServerApplication server is deployed and it provides the following functionality1. DB Client is installed to free up the clients (i.e. there will be only one DB Client for Applicationserver earlier each client needs DB Client software)2. There is a queue mechanism to handle the request there by reducing the load on the client andserver.3. User requests are served based on the FIFO using dispatcher.4. Work process task handlers are used to interpret and process the request. 4. 45. Intermediate buffers are available for the frequently accessed content to reduce the load on theDatabase server.6. The server side processing is only takes place for new requests there by server resources areoptimally used.Need for the Middle Layer: R/3 ArchitectureThe advantages of deploying Application Layer: It is the Intermediate layer in between the Client and the Server. It is installed with a databaseclient to communicate with the database server i.e. all the clients are freed with DB Clients.Application server/ layer handle the request and process them based on FIFO (First in and First out). Ithas its own queue mechanism to process the user request. It also contains the task interpreters tointerpret the user request and route it to the server. 5. 5It is intelligent to store the frequently accessed data thereby reducing the load on the server.R/3 Architecture:SAP uses the industry specific 3-Layer Architecture and named it as R/3 Architecture.It consists of three 3 Layers1. Presentation Server/ Layer/ Tier2. Application Server3. Database Layer1. Presentation Server:It is a client for all the SAP Solutions. It is also referred as SAPGUI. There are three 3 types of SAP GUI 1. SAP GUI for windows (On Windows OS) 2. SAP GUI for JAVA (On all OS where JAVA is supported) 3. SAPGUI for HTML (for web based)SAP provides various versions of GUI (4.6c, 620, 640, 700, 710 and 720)2. Application Server: It is used to handle the user request and process them to the database. It has dispatcherto process and monitor the user request, work process to process and interpret the requests, Bufferareas to store the frequently accessed data. It absorbs the load both from Client and the server.3. Database server/ layer/ tier: It is the area where the complete data resides. It has its own queue, process, buffers, andrequest handling mechanism. Most of the databases are on Oracle. SAP is pushing MAXDB (withoutany license key), Microsoft SQL Server & IBM DB2 with discounted prizes.SAP is focusing SMB (Small Mid-sized Business) and promoting SAP for nearly 1 million/ Rs. 10 Lakhs/per customer. 6. 6Supporting Platforms: SAP can be installed on Microsoft windows 2000, win2k3 (2008 is under evaluation). Itcan be installed on 32bit or 64bit operating systems. 64 bit means a single process can serve the userwith 4GB RAM/ Memory whereas in 32 bit it is 1.9GB Memory. 264, 232 / 8 bytes.HP UNIX and ORACLE HP UNIX 11.23 ORACLE 9.2.0.6 / 10.2.0.4AIX and ORACLE IBM Specific operating system with version 5.3 technical (TL) level 7 (TL7)AIX and DB/2 Proprietary of IBM gives more mileage. Both provided by IBMISERIES/ AS400 with DB/2 This is also IBM specific which provides more consistency, reliability, mileage than any other operating system and database.Sun OS (SOLARIS with ORACLE)LINUX (SUSE, RHL (RED HAT LINUX) and ORACLE LINUX)Note: Linux with MaxDB is supported by SAP and provides more leverage (Finance)Microsoft windows and SQL Server This is the best combination for interactive usage 7. 7Installation of Presentation Server (SAPGUI)Use presentation server DVD and go to the respective OS win32 and run setupall.exe and follow theonscreen instructions. Saplogon icon is installed on the desktop. Double click and enter the entries of the application serverLaunch saplogon icon and click on New ItemEnter the Description Application Server SID System No 16-jul-09BASIS1. It provides runtime to SAP Applications2. Basis is a layer where all the applications reside3. Basis provides the infrastructure to manage, monitor, and administer the SAP ApplicationsEg:Basis provides User ManagementBusiness process MonitoringRole based SecurityPerformance Gauge etc.Three 3 Tier/ Layer/ Server Architecture 1. Presentation Server 2. Application Server 3. Database Server1. Presentation Server It is an SAP GUI. It is of 3 types SAPGUI for windows, HTML and JAVA. It is used toestablish connection with SAP Application Server based on the name of the application server,Instance Number, SID etc. 8. 8Installation of Presentation Server (SAPGUI)Use presentation server DVD and go to the respective OS win32 and run setupall.exe and follow theonscreen instructions.Saplogon icon is installed on the desktop.Double click and enter the entries of the application serverLaunch saplogon icon and click on New ItemEnter the Description Application Server SID System NoClick on logonAdvantages of Presentation Server:1. Single GUI to access all the SAP Applications (ERP, CRM, SCM, XI, BI and SRM)2. We can login with our logon language i.e. specify the language during logon. Same GUI is allowedto login with different languages3. GUI is user friendly to create favorites, startup transactions 9. 9- To create Favorites Login - From Tools – Administration SU01 - From Menu Favorites > Add- To setup startup transactions From menu Extras - Set startup transaction4. GUI is downward compatible to support all the SAP Applications which are below the gui version.Example: GUI 7.0 cannot support the component that are built on 7.10 but 7.0 can handle 7.00,640, 620, 46D, 45A etc.5. User parameters are defined for the frequently keyed in content. Eg: A user belonging to the salesorganization, division, plant, sales area should get all the values by default while creating sales order(VA01) etc.,To provide default values for a user while creating a Sales

2 sur 56

12/01/2012 00:29

Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.sapdocs.info

http://www.slideshare.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book

order.Steps:I. Execute VA01 (Sales order creation)Select the value for sales organisation by pressing F4Click on sales organisation field and press F1 and click on technical settingsNote the parameter ID 10. 10Repeat the same for Distribution Channel and Division.2. Execute SU01 - Edit the user - From Parameters Tab - Provide PID and Value VKO 0001Save the data. Now whenever the user executes the transaction VA01 it will be filled with the defaultvalues with 0001 and 01 for Sales organization and Distribution channel respectively there byreducing the user tasks.6. User can be specified with 1. Role based menu or with 2. SAP Easy access Menu to reduce the loadon the request processing (Roll Area)7. SAP GUI is intelligent to determine the least loaded server when more than one instance isconfigured. It gets the information from the Message server.8. It provides access across the low speed connections and displays the screens without graphics/logo which consume more network traffic. (Low Speed/ High Speed)9. It provides command window to navigate to the respective functionality and minimizes dialoguesteps.10. GUI entries are controlled by using saplogon.ini/ sapmsg.ini/ saproute.iniThese files reside in windows directory i.e. we can configure one GUI and copy the files to the othersystems easily. Goto Windows directory Saplogon.ini - Copying provides all the parameters 11. 1111. SAP Provides ergonomically designed to configure GUI font size, colors and visual design etc.12. SAP Provides various shortcuts window /n to open window from existing window and /o to open anew window /ex to exit the screen.13. GUI provides default menus (System; Help).14. The character set can be changed to suite various languages and printers.2. Application ServerIt is a physical server which is used to handle and process the user request. In SAP naming conventionwe define them as an Instance and it is possible to install more than one instance on a single serverprovided they are differentiated by the instance number.Instance number is a 2 digit number that varies between [00 to 97] 98 and 99 are reserved for routingpurposes.Instances is of various types1. Database Instance . 2. Central Instance. 3. Dialogue Instance.1. Database Instance This is the Instance where database is installed.2. Central Instance This is the Instance where Application Server/ Tier/ Layer are installed. There will be onlyone instance in the entire system.3. Dialogue Instance These are the instances which are used to handle the load on the central instances. Wecan install as many instances as possible assuming that each instance can serve up to 200 - 500 usersdepending upon the type of the users. 12. 12KernelSet of Executables (OS, DB, Unicode, 32/64 bit dependent)usrsapSIDsysexeStart - Run - sqlplus "/as sysdba"Select username from dba_users; (database users)Select BNAME from SAPSR3.USR02; (Sap Users) SAP K E DB R OSKernel Provides communication between SAP, DB and the OS.Usrsap<SID>sysexeucNT1386Installation LogsSapinst.log - Specifies the installation success / failureSapinst_dev.log - also provides similar log in case of installation is aborted.tsk file specifies the table/ index etc that needs to be created on the DB.Each task is commanded by .cmd file and during the process they writes into .log fileEg: Sasapappl0.tsk.bck Sapappl0.tsk Sapappl0.cmd Sapappl0.log Sapappl0.str - Structure of the DBControl.xmlKeydb.xml -Helps to restart installation from the point where it is failed. 13. 13WHAT HAPPENS DURING INSTALLATION?1. Extracts the software.2. Sapinst tool is used to install the software if required we need to download it fromservice.sap.com/swdc3. Checks for user <SID>ADM (SAP System Administrator) Who owns SAP System and has all the privileges on SAP (Start/ Stop/ Environment)Domain Admin; AD Admin - Can create the useridNote: The user who initiates the installation should have the privileges as Local administrator to installthe software, create users, create groups, assign groups, create services etc., (This problems occurs ina Domain)If the user does not exist it creates now.On Windows OS <SID>ADM is also responsible for database but on UNIX ORA<SID> is the ownerto work on the database. ORA<SID> provide the runtime environment for Database. Windows App Server Database<SID>ADM <SID>ADM UNIXApp Server Database<SID>ADM ORA<SID> 14. 14Note: SAPSERVICE<SID> is a service used to start and stop the services (Password never expires) <SID>ADM expires for every 30 days Eg: SAPOSCOL, SAPSID-Instance Number5. It creates local groups and global groups and assigns them to users Global groups - Domain Level Local groups LocallySAP_LocalAdminSAP_SOL_GlobalAdmin from Computer Management -> LocalSAP_SOL_LocalAdmin Users and Computers we can view this6. It creates Services SAP<SID>_00, SAP<SID>_01, SAPOSCOL, SAPCCMSR are created and Run with user.SAP<SID> is used to start the SAP System; if the service is not started SAP will not start.SAPOSCOL is started first to check whether the resources are available (Operating system collector) Itis used to collect the OS Utilization information and pass into SAP system.SAPCCMSR is an agent to collect JARM (Java Application response time Management) and pass it toABAP CCMS (Computing Center Monitoring System)It is only used in JAVA and ABAP stack.UsersGroupsServicesCreating directoriesExecutables - OS Dependent - DB Dependent 15. 15Note:- Master password is set accordingly to the company policy- Extract Kernel Executables (OS, DB)Create MMC for Windows to start/ stop sap system From cmd prompt Startsap name=SID nr=00 SAPDIAHOST=willsys28Sets the user as SAPSR3 for ABAP SAPSR3DB for Java EngineWhere the systems are installed with these schema owners i.e., these users owns the respectivedatabases.Query:Select count(*) from dba_tables where owner = SAPSR3; 29769 ABAP related tables.Select count(*), owner from dba_tables group by owner.7. Creates the Database and runs the scripts8. Creates the tablespaces and datafiles on DDLORA.TPL Tablespaces are just like almirah in a house.9. Now command files are created pointing to .str and data on the exports10. The task files are created to create the tables and load the entries The task files are displayed as process on the installation screen"2 complete 3 running 4 waiting"11. Upon running all the tasks the SAP Database is created and DBStatistics runs.12. DB Users are set with default password and SAP Application open RFC Connection. --- Installation Successful -16. 16SAP Installation Steps1. Download the Installation Guide (www.service.sap.com/instguides)2. Check the compatibility of OS and DB (www.service.sap.com/platforms)3. Download the software from (www.service.sap.com/swdc)4. Search for the known problems from (www.service.sap.com/notes)5. Install the OS related patches/ fix packs etc6. Install JRE 1.4.2_127. Set the Java environment JAVA_HOME path8. Set the virtual memory to 20 GB on windows9. Set the hostname not more than 13 characters10. Make an entry of the hostname in Hosts file11. Ensure the installation ports 21212 and 21213 are kept open12. Ensure the ports 3200, 3300, 3600, 4700 are kept open (DVEBMGS uses these ports)13. Dump the software into system without any spaces in the directories14. Verify the software using LABLE.ASC15. Get the Static IP address (192, 172, 10 networks)16. Ensure the internet connection is available with a valid S-USERID17. Execute sapinst.exe18. Select

3 sur 56

12/01/2012 00:29

Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.sapdocs.info

http://www.slideshare.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book

2004s19. Central instance and Typical Installation20. JAVA Components and JCE Policy21. Provide SID and Inst Directory22. Provide Master Password23. Provide DB SID and DB Host24. Exports path25. Kernel Path26. Oracle Client27. SLD (Local SLD) Provide Object server name: Host name28. Parameter Summary29. Solman Key30. Installation Proceeds.Installation Directories D:usrsapUSR directory is created with a shared folder SAP with shared SAPMNT & SAPLOC Eg: <hostname>sapmnt ~ d:usrsapSAPMNT: Both in Win and UNIXSAPLOC: Only in Windows not in UNIX 17. 17These are shared between systems and accessed locally and globallyCCMSPRFCLOGPUTSID HOSTSTransCCMS - Used for alert logs that is populated by the service SAPCCMSR(Java Stack Only)PRFCLOG - These are also populated from JAVA Engine (Generic Request Message Generator GRMG)PUT - is used during upgradeSID Hosts - the complete SAP Application Server.Trans - is used to host the DevelopmentsSAPMnt: Is a shared SAP Mount which is used to host the directories related to SAP.(It may be required to create SAPMnt in earlier versions but in the current versions based onNetweaver it is created automatically)SAPLoc in WindowsThis SAPmnt is shared because it needs to share the transports, support packages, profiles,executables etc between systems in the landscape.[Dev] ----------> [Qlty] ----------> [Prod] SAPmntTASKS Installing SAP Component on SOLMAN On Windows/ SQL Server On Windows/ Oracle Windows/ DB2 Linux/ Oracle HPUnix/ Oracle AIXSolution Manager connects all the three systems (ERP i.e., ECC6.0, Netweaver & CRM2007) 18. 18I. Installation InputsSAPInstSIDInstance Number (Default 00, 01)Mater PasswordJCE PolicyPath for the CDs.II. Installation Logs SignificanceSapinst_dir (Win, Linux, UNIX)Sapinst, sapinst_dev, .cmd, log, .tsk, .tpl, .toc, .str.III. Installation Steps Users,Groups,Services,Directories,SharedMnt,Kernel (Extraction), CreateDB,LoadDB,Updated Stats,RFCsDEFAULT USERS<SID>ADM -- SAP start (OS Level Access Related to SAP)ORA<SID> -- For UNIXSAP SERVICE <SID>Sys Master Databasesystem 19. 19J2ee_ADMIN Java WebSAP* SAP R/3DDICSAPSR3SAPSR3DBUnicode - Multilanguage Support This requires additional 40% of resources.Earlier case Individual passwords need to be set but now days only one Master password for all theuserids.Multiple Components on a Single DB repositoryA host is either a client or a server. A host has its own address on the network, and is its ownmachine.A server has its own address and sometimes multiple addresses. It provides access to services andinformation.A client accesses the servers. It requires its own address.Interface / ScreenExports/ System CopiesKernel [Dependent]Install Mstr [Dependent]Java Comp [Independent]JRE [Dependent]Exports [Independent of OS, DB]Installation Directories D:usrsapUSR directory is created with a shared folder SAP with shared SAPMNT & SAPLOC Eg: willsyssapmnt ~ d:usrsapSAPMNT: Both in Win and UNIXSAPLOC: Only in Windows not in UNIXThese are shared between systems and accessed locally and globallyCCMSPRFCLOG 20. 20PUTSID HOSTSTransCCMS - Used for alert logs that is populated by the service SAPCCMSR(Java Stack Only)PRFCLOG - These are also populated from JAVA Engine (Generic Request Message Generator GRMG)PUT - is used during upgradeSID Hosts - the complete SAP Application Server.Trans - is used to host the DevelopmentsCheck the groups SAPLOCAL_ADMIN SAPGLOBAL_ADMIN ORA_SID_DBA ORA_DBA ORA_SID_OPERATORCheck the services and ensure that they are running 1. SAPOSCOL - Used to collect the OS Resources 2. SAP<SID>_00 - Which is mandatory to start SAP3. Listener - Oracle Listener service should be started on the specified Port (1521-1529) 4. Oracle Service<SID> which is required for the Database On UNIX ps - ef | grep ora* On Windows services.mscCheck the USR Directory (SAP Instance files..... App) predefined shared SAP Directory withSharedMnt, (SAPMnt), and SAPLoc on windows Run - Cmd "WillsysUsr"9. Trans Directory - Used for transporting the ObjectsNote: SID Specifies the Application Server and is possible to have multiple <SIDS> differed by theinstance numberQueries:SQL> Select status from V$Instance; Checks the DB Status 21. 21SQL> Startup followed by enter keySQL> shutdown immediateNote: Only one SAPOSCOL per system Max of 97 Systems on a single box 98-99 for routingSAPOSCOL_00 - ABAP InstanceSAPOSCOL_01 - JAVA InstanceNote: Each SID uses different PortsNote: In the console tree of SOLMAN if all the three entries (SERVICES, USERS and GROUPS) areavailable then only we can confirm there are 3 Instances in one single system.10. <SID> Directory usrsap<SID>.......... Config..... Usagetypes.properties - used to specify the usage types that are installed on thesystem. usrsap<SID>config on a particular <SID>ERP <SID1> ERP<SID2>EP EPBI BIJAVA JAVAABAP ABAPNote: Now-a-days it’s possible to install different engines as add-ons.11. DVEBMGS <Instance Number> DVEBMGS00 - is a ABAP Engine JC00 - Standalone JAVA Engine SCS01 SAP Central Instance DVEBMGS00 contains J2ee/ SDM/ JSPM directories then it is Integrated Engine (ABAP + JAVA)Note: Portal is only an application that is not based on ABAP Engine 22. 22Eg: Consider Hero Honda LandscapeBI - ERP (ECC5.0) - CRM - SRM - PI Suppliers Dealers Enterprise Portal12. SYS DirectoryContains executables and profile parameters to start and stop the systemEXE Directory hosts all the executables from netweaver exe dir contains UC/ NUC and 32/64, i386/ ia64In 4.7 we can see only exe directory13. Work Directory This stores the startup and error logs 17-jul-09Instance: Logical entity which is installed on a physical entity - which is an Application server.Instance provides runtime services.Instance NameInstance No: 00 - 99 (98, 99 for routing purposes) 23. 23Structure of INSTANCEInstance contains Dispatcher, Queue Mechanism, and Work process, Task Handler with ABAP,SCREEN, and SQL Interpreters. It also contains buffer areas, DB Client and Roll area.Dispatcher It is used to handle the user requests that are coming from SAP GUI using DIAG(Dynamic Information Action Gateway) protocol on port 3200 + Instance Number.(3201, 3202 etc) Dispatcher manages all the work process and maintains a queue. Once the request issent to dispatcher the dispatcher keeps the request in queue. Based on the availability of workprocess it will assign the process to the user request based on FIFO (First In First Out)User Buffer - Once we logoff everything is rolled off.Public Buffer - Until the instance is restartedWork Process Work process handles the user request using Task Handler. Task Handler contains 3Interpreters ABAP, SCREEN and SQL. 24. 24ABAP interpreter used to interpret the ABAP code in the user request SCREEN interpreter use to interpret the screen SQL interpreter interprets the SQL statements that are sent by the user.Select statement - from the buffer area.Modify/ Insert - Hits the databaseOpen SQL This is SAP Proprietary language to ensure that the SAP

4 sur 56

12/01/2012 00:29

Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.sapdocs.info

http://www.slideshare.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book

Components are Databaseindependent. Each instance is installed with DB Client software to communicate with Database inNative Language.The SAP Kernel which is O/S and DB Specific helps in the interpretation.The user request is processed and it handovers (handshake) the task to Database process.DBWP (Database work process) process and responds back to the R/3 work process. R/3 work processchecks for frequently accessed content and keeps the copy in R/3 Buffer areas. (Frequently accesseddata). The response rolls out into the user context before it is sent to the user.User Context It is a user specific roll area which is used to keep user authorizations, parameters, screens andearlier accessed content.Process Flow (LOGON)1. User requests2. Dispatcher handles the request3. Keeps in queue and assign WP based on FIFO4. The work process gets the username, password, client, logon language and the task handlerinterprets and hand over the task to the database process.5. The DB process checks the credentials of the user and provides the necessary authorizations to theprocess.6. The entire information is copied into the user context which is referred asROLL OUT. (The information is copied into Roll Area which is subsequently available for all therequests made by the user) 25. 25Note: The user context remains until the user is logged out. The user context is displayed in thetransaction SU56. If the user accesses other than the transactions in SU56 it is missing authorizationsand displayed from the Tcode SU53 (Missing Authorizations)Process Flow (TRANSACTION)1. User executes a transaction Eg: ME22N Purchase Order (or) VA01 - Sales order2. The request is handled by dispatcher and hand over to the work process.3. Work process requires information that is not available in the work process. The work processcopies the user related information into the task handler i.e. copy user context into the Task Handler.It is also referred as ROLL IN4. Further processing continuesTypes of Work Processes Even though the processes are unique at OS level SAP differentiated between the workprocesses based on the nature of work. The process are determined by the instance name DVEBMGS<Instance_No> For Dialogue instances the work process will be denoted as D01, D02....D - DialogueV - UpdateE - EnqueueB - Back groundM - MessageG - GatewayS - SpoolDVEBMGS is only available in the Central instance.D01 to DN-1 for Dialogue instances.Central Instance DVEBMGS - 2112111 It hosts all the process and their will be only one central instance in the entire system.1. DIALOGUE D It is only the process which communicates interactively with the users. Thereshould be atleast 2 Dialogue work process per instance. Dialogue work process initiates Update,Background and Spool.2. UPDATE V It is used to update the transactions in the database. It is initiated by Dialogueprocess. There should be atleast 1 Update in the entire system. It is also recommended to have anupdate process for every 5 Dialogue. 26. 263. ENQUEUE E It is used to provide locks for the records that are going to be updated. It ensuresconsistency for updates. There will be only 1 Enqueue configured in the system during theinstallation. It is possible to have more than one enqueue provided they are installed or configured onthe central instance.4. BACKGROUND B The tasks which are expensive or time consuming are scheduled to run in thebackground mode non-interactively. There should be atleast 2 background work process in thesystem5. MESSAGE M There should be only 1 message server in the entire R/3 system. It is used to manageall the dispatchers. It is used to load balance the requests to identify the least loaded dispatcher. It is also used to provide locks to the request that are coming from Dialogue instances.6. GATEWAY G It is used to provide a means of communication with SAP and NON-SAP systems. Therewill be only 1 gateway for each instance.7. SPOOL S It is used to print the documents to a printer or output to a fax machine etc. Thereshould be atleast 1 Spool process in the entire system. It is also possible to configure more spoolprocess depending on the print/ spool volume. 18-jul09DVEBMGS00Dialogue - Interactive - 2 per instance - Initiate update, spool and btc (background)Update Non-Interactive - 1 per system - Initiated by dialogueEnqueue - Provides consistency for updates - 1 per system and can be increased Depending upon the update requests but needs to increase only on the Central instance for optimal performance. 27. 27Background - Non-Interactive - 2 per system - Initiated by dialogue, Time consuming And long running jobs are scheduled to run in the background mode.Message - Used during load balancing. It also procures lock from enqueue server To serve the requests that is coming from dialogue instances. Only 1 Per system.Gateway It provides an interface to communicate between SAP and NON-SAP Systems. 1 Gateway per instance.Spool - It is only the process that outputs the documents to printers, fax etc. It is initialized by Dialogue and BTC. Atleast 1 spool per system.INSTALLATION1. Download the installation guide from the Market placewww.service.sap.com/instguides2. Check the compatibility of OS and DBwww.service.sap.com/platforms Windows 2003 - MS SQL Server 2000 Adv. Server Or 2008 - Oracle - MaxDB Linux - Oracle 10.2.0.2 - DB/2 8 MaxDB3. Download the software from www.service.sap.com/swdc4. Search for the known problems in www.service.sap.com/notes5. Install the OS with relevant support packs/ Fix packs etc.6. Install JRE 1.4.2_12 (Java Run time environment) to run the sap inst screens 28. 287. Set the JAVA environment variable JAVA_HOME or path Check java -version8. Set the virtual memory to 20GB on windows 20GB swap memory on HP Unix machines.If RAM is more than 20GB then 20GB * 3 = 60GB9. Set the host name which should not be more than 13 characters10. Make an entry in the host file etc/hosts.11. Ensure that the installation ports 21212, 21213 are not blocked (Need to inform Network Admin or Proxy Admin not to block the ports)12. Ensure that 3200, 3300, 3600, 4700, 4800 series ports are not blocked. (DVEBMGS utilises these ports)13. Dump the software into the system. The folders should not contain spaces, Special characters etc (Eg NWDump or Newfolder - all one word), underscores are allowed14. Verify the software using LABEL.ASC15. Get the private static IP address from the Network team (192., 172., 10. networks)16. Ensure that internet connection is available with a valid S-Userid.ERP 2005 - ECC6ERP 2004 - ECC5PRACTICAL SESSIONSwww.service.sap.com/instguideswww.service.sap.com/platformswww.sercvice.sap.com/swdc - My companies Application component - ERP 6.0 Select the DatabaseFrom Downloads Tab - Select the components Exports, Kernels, JAVASR1 - SR2 - SR3 -EHP1 - EHP2 29. 29Click on download to basketMarket place > Help and Support > Search for NotesJRE is must as the SAP Screens are developed on JAVA PlatformVirtual Memory: [Extended memory towards HDD]Need to set the virtual memory RAM size * 3 + 500MB/ 1GB [32 Bit]Select the drive where SAP is going to be installed.Set the host name Cmd > drivers > etchosts IP Address HostnameT1 Shopper Port scan - To check whether these ports are open or blocked.IDES (International Demo Education System) will have more clients 11-12 Predefined clients and inthe Non-IDES system only 3 Clients (000, 001, 066)In IDES additional clients - 800, 811, 812 clients are available.There will be only 2 exports for Non - IDES systemAnd 6 Exports for IDES system.LABEL.ASC -

5 sur 56

12/01/2012 00:29

exports path and JCE policyRequired software 1.Select the respective inst (sapinst. Kernel DVD 3.POST INSTALLATION ACTIVITIESSAP is a transaction based. USER Management. PRD. TEST etc) -Click on continue to display the hardware key input. Hostname and theHardware key. . landscape and their routes. This Maintenance certificateis introduced from JAN/ 2009 onwards.exe.sapdocs. installation file paths.0 are (SALES. Toggling between the changes arerecorded and it is advised to obtain permission from the respective authority to make necessarychanges in the Production System PRD Except DEV and SANDBOX remaining all the systems like QAS.Perform Post Installation ActionSelect either one of the option.because the content transmission over the web is not secure.exeFrom Netweaver1.2. It should be executed in STMS and also the RFC connections. .Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. DBsupport packs and R/3 Kernels.. MI. 32. kernel. Execute [Slicense] Tcode Click on > New Licenses Click on > Install license key and it prompts for the path of the license key.Hardware key is unique (use command saplicense -key ) . Inst Master DVD 2. 30 . lockthe user. DB copy or DB Migration: It is used when a system is setup as a copy of production or pre-production system. It is used to setup the systems.Approving the inclusion of Systems Login to the DC Execute STMS From Menu Overview > Systems The system is waiting to be included Select the system and click on approve from Menu SAP System. and SCMetc. SRM. 1. SRM etc 20-jul-09INSTALLATION1. It also depends upon the memory. It is an executable. SLICENSE . CRM. SRM. It initializes the TransportManagement system. System Type.On windows sapinst.Specify the JAVA component path. System Settings SE03Depending upon the type of system we need to set the system to modifiable and not modifiable.backup domain controller. 28 days).It is a transaction that is used to apply the license to get the runtime support forthe system even though it is valid for 30 days (4 Weeks i.Specify the SID and the installation drive. ExportsExports depend upon the business component which is going to be installed like ERP. 35.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book contains the content and the DVD number from which we can find whether it is an Export1 Or Export 2 etc. fine tuning theperformance.The license key is specific to Customer.Installation depends upon the export content (IDES version may consume 8-12 Hrs) Productionversion ma take 4-6 Hrs.service. SICK/ SM28 . SE03 .Defining a logical SystemCreating Virtual Systems 36.JCE Policy JAVA Cryptography which is used to provide the secured encryption & decryption over theweb . NETWEAVER(EP. SE06 . EP. Database copy or Database Migration1.SALE . one is the permanent key valid upto [31129999]The other one is Maintenance Certificate which is valid upto 3 Months.3.SAP Initial Consistency Check Checks for the Incompatibility between R/3 Patch Levels. If there is any inconsistency it will recommends us to fix beforeproceeding further. database administration irrespective of the SAP component and also managing printers. Installation number. DB and the R/3 kernels.System Settings 34. set to expiry will hault the system transports. Standard Installation 2.txtformat. XI. purpose(DEV.ABAP is a part of the Netweaver. and PURCHASE.Note: Only exports will change for each application like CRM. password are automatically taken).exe). Alternatively select the system and click on display license script and save it to PC in the . PRD. FINANCE. 33 Goto SE03/ SE06 system change options to set to modifiable or not modifiable.1.Specify the Hardware key and email-id to generate and send license key to the mail-idspecified. Kernel Levels..Components lies in ECC6.SE06 transaction is used to set the CTS (Change Transport System). 35TMS: Transport Management System. Domain Controller: There will be only one Domain Controller in the system landscape. BI. 3. It is up to the customer tochoose the Netweaver components and It is mandatory to choose ABAP components. 34 Db click on Set system change Option4. QAS willbe procured after 3 to 4 months from kickoff date and the PRD is procured before 2 months of Go-Live) Virtual Machines/ Systems can be replaced by real systems and the configuration now pointsto the real system. SCM. provide thedownloaded file path and click on OK to apply the license. CRM & Solution Manager). It is recommended to applylicense because they are not considered for support. 32Login to the system with SAP*..e. SCM.Including the system in the Domain Specify the Domain Controller Target host System Number User: TMSADM (Default User)TMSADM is a communication user created during TMS configuration (Do not delete the user. The port numbers. -Specify the system ID(SID). JAVA Components 4. this is the first system in the LandscapeLogin to the system/ Client 000 with the user other than SAP*/ DDICExecute T-Code STMSEg: {from se06 > perform post installation action} > STMS. It locks SPAM so that no upgrades are allowed without a validMaintenance certificate.select (0) Typical Installation (to install the system with predefined settings i. change password..Select the components that needs to be installed (ERP.Continue the installation. Central Instance2.Market place www. -Goto . OS. DDIC and Master password (specified during installation) 1. The changes are only transported to the not modifiable systems. System Number.slideshare. If it is a custom installation more inputs are required.info http://www. ABAP is theplatform for all the SAP Components. Execute transaction SM28/ SICK (Installation consistency check). DB. MI) and click on next.ABAP provides the runtime environment for all the above components i. Based on the displayed message we may need to upgrade OS patch levels. 33.com/licensekey -Click on obtain permanent license key -Select the Installation number based on the component (ERP. Goto STMS (Domain Controller) 6 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . .JDI).. processes securing the sensitive data. Menu based consumes more dialogue steps than transaction based that iswhy SAP BASIS consultants are more familiar with transactions. SCM. 36 It is a standard practice in the industry to create virtual systems as the real systems could notbe available during the initial configuration (DEV server is procured during implementation. Standard Installation : It is used when a fresh system is installed. In most ofthe environments [DEV] is treated as DC because.The input lists screen is displayed to review before starting the installation.exe and on Linux/ UNIX use ./sapinst.2. OS levels and Databasepatch levels. SLICENSE SAP Issues two licenses.Note: All the SAP components will be installed on the Netweaver Platform. BI.Specify the description Transport Domain Name: Domain_<SID> Save the configurationNOTE: If the Domain already exists then we can execute a TCode [DICO] to delete the existing TMSconfiguration.Administration. around 35 modules) 31. their roles. Dialogue InstanceFrom the dump bring up sapinst. PRE-PRD are set to not-modifiable i.SM28/ SICK 2. QAS. 21-jul-091. It checks the compatibilitybetween OS. support packages andapplicatoins etc)A message SAP system "waiting to be included in the transport domain" is displayed in the externalsystem. 31To display all these over the web then EP (Enterprise portal) is required. A message will populate to configure TMS in the client 000.e. This is one ofthe most important security setting which is liable for auditing. PI.4. no object can be modified in these systems. XI.sap. Database Instance3. Management of the file system. Central system Instance (Which contain both Central + Database instance)Goto Installation Master DVD 30. Specify the Master password .A pop up window prompts to configure Domain Controller. Domain controller. CRM.e.e.

SE063.Define Backup schedule click on date and select backup . SPAM Apply the patches that are relevant for SAP application component7. Upon task completion reset the value in RZ11 (Nosystem restart is 7 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .. Click on > Import package > specify the path usrsaptransepsin5. 39Create new Obj name : ZTEST Desc : IMAGE Browse for the PictureFrom settings menu > Click on MIME type Add . The system is an unicoded system to support theall available languages but we need to import the additional languages as per the requirements. In order to run the activities that consumemore time then the above we need to run in the background mode or increase the parameter valuefrom RZ11 (Dynamic parameter) i. 23-jul-09Roles granted for me in the SAND BOX for CapgeminiPOST INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES1.1. 38. configuring buffers etc From 000 > Goto RZ10 > Utilities > Import profiles of Active servers >SAVE6. RZ10Used to import the profiles from OS level to DB. The profiles are available inusrsap<sid>sysprofile.e.SU56Task Handler . The memory should be calculated after reserving memory for OS and the Database.For documentation > Market Place > SAP Solutions > SAP ERP >EnglishNote: Need to create a folder in D:SAPHELP. SICK2. all the developments which are performed in Development system will be automatically availableto other systems in the landscape.info http://www.change the parameter toLogin/no_automatic_user_sapstar to 0 instead 1After creating a client need to perform client copy [SAP_CUST]Always need to copy 000 client because it will have all the customized data.type (offline/ online) and save9.all the clientsSALE .For the first time we cannot login [SAP* / pass]So being from another client perform RZ10 . 001.There are cases where more than 100 are configured but it is not recommended.DPMONWorkprocess .e. Dialogue process is the only process that interacts with/communicates interactively with the user. 22-jul-09Practicals CONFIGURING STMSPerform DICO to delete the STMS configured earlier if necessary and the RFC connection from theexternal system. 066We can create upto 1000 Clients 000 to 999For the newly created client say in this case 900 a user will be created SAP* with pass as thepassword.from Work DirectoryBuffers . 43 SAP Provides screen context help i. Download language from Market place6. SE034. if the script is notavailable in main language it will display in secondary language. The group of systems which shares the transport directory incommon are said to be in one group but due to sensitivity of PRD it is moved into a separate group. 24-jul-09STRUCTURE OF APPLICATION SERVERDispatcher .1. SMLT create language4. Import7.proceed and test the logoSETTING UP TEXTExecute .Define standard background (House keeping jobs) 44.GOTO .Initially we have to import profiles from OS Level to SAP level. Shared Data2.Each process requires 75MB to 150MB of memory on any average. 41 Perform language transports if any.HTML docu installed on File server4. 421.SE61 40.It occupies less space.Defining the Landscape 37.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book > Menu Overview > Systems > SAP System > Create Virtual SystemFor Eg:System : JOQDescription : Quality SystemTRANSPORT GROUPIt is a naming convention group_<SID> we can configure all the systems to a single transport groupi. If a reportinguser requires 3GB of memory then there will be a memory bottleneck. English > Primary German > Secondary Goto I18N (Globalization / Internationalization of Languages) Click on > Current NLS settings Get the parameter zcsa/installed_languages = DEIf we specify any new language it needs to be updated in the above parameter using RZ10 Clink on ADD from NLS settings to include additional languages that are going to beimported using SMLT. These profile requires management for fine tuning.. Execute I18N2.SM50/ SM66User Context . 44Note: Create users in SU01 and assign SAP_ALL to the functional and technical team as the security isnot implemented. 40Document class : General textFrom document tab NAME .e. (sapdocdc.sapdocs. during the month end the parameter can be changed to 1800 -10000 from RZ11 for specific period of time. SR13 Install SAP Library 43.Create an new user as SAPUSER copied from SAP*/ DDIC logging in as SAP* user from the newlycreated client.Steps: 42.POST INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES Continuation . SMLT 41.1 SALE5. HTML Help File . when a user struck at one screen he can use Menu Help >Application help. 37 Execute STMS > Click on transport routes From over view menu > click on change > from Menu Configuration > Standard Configuration > Three systems in groupEg: Specify DEV: JOD QAS: JOQ PRD: JOP SAVE Provide Three System Configuration under the Description. SM36 . Set the parameter zcsa/installed_languages = AEDZ6.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.Download the languages inusrsaptransepsin Directory Goto SMLT > and create a language > specify supplementary language i. DB13 . but depends upon how heavy the processing goes..slideshare..for assigning the logical system. There should be atleast 2 Dialogue process per instance... SR13 > New EntriesVARIENT PLATFORM AREA PATHSAPHELP WINNT IWBHelp Copy and Paste from Market place. It is in compressed format.* The work process are configured by the parameter rdisp/wp_no_dia = XX 45.SM30 Click on maintain Click on new entries START_IMAGE : ZTESTPrompts for the Change request . The requests areprocessed by using a dialogue process. 45For an Ideal Instance the sum of the Dialogue processes should more or less equal to non-dialogueprocess (unless a reporting server. Plain Html Help . STMS 4.ST02 Dispatcher receives the request and processes them according to the queue. opened by html help viewer.ini) paste the path. Add language that needs to be imported in I18N3. From menu SYSTEM > Import Profiles of Active ServersSCC4 .jpg format Save. Dynamic Help2..e.Html documentation installed on Web Server3.Roles are client Specific Logical system <SID> client Cross clients .066 is for early watch. 38From 000/ SAP*RZ10 .ZLOGIN_SCREEN_INFO createType the text WelcomeSAVE.The maximum number of work process an instance can support is W0 to W99 (100 Work processes).. Plain HTML .8. which needs only dialogue)The dialogue response time should be around 600 to 1000 Milliseconds (1 Second)Each dialogue process is restricted by using a parameter rdisp/max_wprun_time = 600 s(10 Minutes) after which the process will be timed out. Click on new entries and provide <SID>Clnt900Default clients : 000. If the systemsupports more than 100 processes then it is better to configure one more instance on the same serverdiffered by the instance number.Login to the new client with our userid and password and lock the DDIC and SAP* ----TASKS -----SETTING UP A LOGOExecute SMW0Select (0) Binary data for WebRFC Click on Find buttonClick on execute 39. Eg: 4GB RAM: 1 GB reserve for OS and DB 3 GB 3000/ 150 = 20 ProcessesMin and Max upto 40 Processes.

SRM. 48For print requests Dialogue handles the request and update in Temse.Type of Process : (DVEBS) Message and Gateway are not displayed. Completed: The job is completed or 8 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .04.. ECC.Action : Select.Report : The name of the program/ report the WP is executing.D:USRSAPSOLSYSEXEUCNTI386Note: In Linux SAPDB/ MAXDB will be the cheapestSAPDB/ MAXDB is a DB that comes along with the SAPUSMM . Hardware Key (Installed by SAP .Stopped : The process is stopped due to an error.. expensive then they can be scheduled to run in the BTC mode. 49-status : Waiting. CPIC)Shutdown : The process is killed/ shutdown but restart mode set to NOWaiting forPRIV Mode: The process goes into Heap mode.Client : The client number logged in. reports that consumes more time in the background mode.till 9999(YYYY)Maintenance License . Weekly sales report or expensive to run in the peak hours so they arescheduled to run in the background mode during off peak hours. MILicense is user basedOnce the license key is received then goto SLICENSE Tcode -> INSTALL And click Install new licenses buttonFrom cmd promptSoladm> saplicense .3% Service Tax 2.Class B has medium priority over class C jobsClass C jobs runs with Normal PriorityJOB STATUS1.PIDPROCESS MANAGEMENT SM50/ SM66 Work process list is displayed in SM50/ SM66. Transportation (LUW for a local tour) BIND 1 & 2 & 34.Dialogue communicates with the gateway while establishing connection with other SAP systems.SOLMAN. 47One License .Running : The process is executing the task (SM50 running with our Userid should not be considered)On Hold : The user request is on hold by process for waiting certain Resources on the other systems (RFC. pmon.Dialogue communicates with the message server to obtain locks for a record that is coming fromDialogue instance. which makes the system inconsistency)CONSIDER A TRAVEL AGENCY In a travel agency buying the ticket is LUW (Outward/inwards).System Measurement for the usersSUSER . arch)SM04 : is used to display the logged in users along with the sessions. 000 20.5000 Bajaj . Cancelled: The job is cancelled6.SLEEP MODE: The work process goes into sleep mode waiting for resources (RFCproblem). time consuming.Its an executable)Note: All the executables resides in . Tables TBC* are used to store the BTC Jobs 4. not restart(NO). The Dialogue work process handles the request and updates the tables 3.Killing the process From Command Prompt > DPMON (Process the list at OS Level) >K > Provide . 04.getIt checks for 1. They aredisplayed as [DISP+WORK] on windows in the Task Manager.e.Dialogue is monitored by using SM50. DW . Its not a TCode.Semaphore : The block that hold at OS Level (DISK)CPU : The amount of time WP spends utilising CPU resources..000 17% Maintenance /Year 2.i. Update. BWP runs the job in the Active mode till completion/ Cancelled.10 users and Each SAP transaction consists of multiple (LUW -Logical unit of work) Each LUW contains task which should be completed/ rollback as a group. If the reports arelong running. BIND 1 & 2 Tickets to and fro + Accommodation)3. Hostname 3. 2.14.Serial Number > Provide . 00022% Maintenance cost across the globe except INDIA5 1 222% 24% 26%Eg: Telco .User name : Name of the user. 6. 000 + Customs -----.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book required)WORK PROCESS MULTIPLEXING(Consider Restaurant Activities).--14. RunningWaiting : The process is waiting "Available" to serve the user request. It will be completed only after the taskcompletion/ timeout. We can terminatethe session or the user completely using End session or logoff user.Table : Name of the table. BWP are defined by using rdisp/wp_no_btc=2 (Min 2 per system) We can increase as many as possible depending upon the resources. A program SAPMSSYS starts in the dialogue mode at frequency that is defined in theparameter rdispbtctime=60SecSAPMSSYS .Example: Daily report. dbwr. BWP looks into the table and identify the jobs which are in the Ready State.8000 USD 10 + 1Users Developer 48000 * 50 = 12.Restart YES/ NO : if the process is terminated and it will restart automatically (Yes).270 ARAMCO -50000 47.e.3 MonthsEach user license cost 4000 USDIn India tag is 2000 USD for min number of users Eg: 10 + 1 is minimum .2.Process PID : The identifier at OS level. Active: BWP processing the task5.Runtime : The amount of time the process spends on the user request. Scheduled: The job is defined but time to execute is not specified. It is used to kill the process at OS Level.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. 48. Stopper. BI. It displays the processes belongs to all the instances. B. EP. The spool processPrints from Temse (Temporary Sequential file it can be at file/ DB Table)Dialogue communicates with enqueue while updating a transaction and obtains lock so that no usercan update there by assuring data consistency.info http://www. C (High.dispatcher work process in UNIX 0 to 11 [12] And 1 is for dispatcher 13 Total 49.BTCTRNS1 from SE38We can also use BTCTRNS2 to resume the background jobs (Execute the program) 5. smon. action on the database. PI. Double click onthe WP to display (Extended. a job is scheduled to run at a specific time or periodically. 68.exe is a dispatcher monitor which can be executed when the user could not login to thesystem (Experience Hour glass). Released: The time to execute is specified3. Roll and the Heap Memory)On Oracle executePS -ef |grep ora* (lgwr. 46LICENSINGStandard License . Ready: The Time to run the job is reached4. SM66.** Note: We can pause jobs by setting the value to 0 zero **BWP jobs are defined in SM36 51.From User > Logoff User > Local or End the sessionBACKGROUND PROCESS SM36It is used to run the expensive programs. Medium. 51Specify Jobname: Daily report JobClass: C A. LUW (Outward/ inward) Booking accommodation (LUW for number of days)2. User submits the request via dispatcher to a WP.1.Example : 100000 seconds 27Hrs RZ11 (rdisp/btctime)Refer .Password never expires (Service Userid) 25-jul-09Dialogue handles the requests and process only reports with out any assistance.Checks for every 60 sec into the TBTC* table.000 ------------------------.Each user transaction may be served by one or more processes with out restricting to the usersimilarly each work process serve multiple users with out restricting the user.During an update dialogue updates temporary table and update-process updates them later. 00.Error : No of times the process is restarted. Each process has the following. (No dialogue processremains ideal) Each process can serve 5 .sapdocs. Appointment (Dates are not available Eg: Darshinam) BIND 1 2 3 4Each of the LUW is performed by a single different work process and is restricted to 600 Seconds andtask has to complete within 600 milliseconds 46.000 4% VAT 48. 50The major advantage of this is it displays the memory consumed by work process.Serial Number : Starts with 0 (DEV_W0) in work directory.Click on SELECT PROCESS 50. ckpt. insert i. EachLUW is a commit or rollback (no intermediate stage . 26-jul-09SM66 GLOBAL WORK PROCESS OVERVIEWIt displays the processes based on status. From SM66 .Process Flow 1.04.* To delay the BTC processing increase the time as much as possible. SID 2. and DPMONDPMON.40000 USD Developers are charged differently . Low Priority)Class A requires a dedicated BTC of class A which are defined in operation modes.slideshare. 000 10.

userid expiry. 56Click on "Default Scheduling"And schedule the BTC jobs with default time. Table space max extent reached (ORA-1631. Specify the name of the target host. Page Errors)10.Reasons and Resolutions ACTION. Do not kill the active job unless it is permitted by the owner4. ABAP Program2. Background job out put is a report to a spool (Printer). Archive struck (ORA-255.sapdocs. Select the status .Reasons for cancellation of Job1.. The jobs with status RELEASED indicate the jobs are released with scheduled time and waiting fortheir turn/ time.. passwordchange. BRCONNECT Use DB13 to schedule the jobs.might come late No sufficient CABSLong time in ready status indicates 1.e.Execute F81. MAESTRO Scheduler / IBMThese Third party schedulers are not specific to SAP but we can customise these to SAPThese job schedulers are intelligent to work based on the status of Predecessors. Run long running reports for an End User2. RSBTCDEL . Specify the start conditionImmediate/ Periodic/ Jobstart. The existing jobs are running for a long time i. date & time. Check the bottle neck on the target system (ERP-BI-EP-SRM-SCM-SRM) 3. Dunning report for Finance team7.3. Schedule the jobs appropriately during off peak hours.6. As a part of the post installation we need to schedule house keeping jobs in SM36 Execute SM36 Click on "Standard Background Jobs" 56.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book finishedExecution server . Report to SAP in case of dead locks. 1. ORA-1632)8.1. FINISHED 55. Monthly and Annual Reports8.RZ04 > Define 1. the communication is performed electronically. SAP Job Scheduler 5. Variants are not properly defined. These commands are OS commands that will be executed at command level. TIDEL Scheduler 4.Used to delete the background jobs Reporting structure "BTC" "DEL"2.4.000 Jobs/day 59. Dependent jobs/ events failure12. assembling & packing. Jobs are waiting for the locks to update the records. orcorrupted. Picturetubes.Event: When an event triggered in SAP it also triggers the job as well.4. PXA (Buffer). External Program1. External Commands: The job can be executed by external commands which are defined in SM49/SM69. BRARCHIEVE. RSCOLL00 Collects performance info in transaction ST03.Business CaseSony an electronics company communicates with suppliers for the TV Cabinets/ Circuit boards.Job Started: When dependent job started this gets triggered. Operation Modes (Peak and Off Peak) 3.Eg: consider RSPO1041 from SA38 Goto SA38 and define variant for 7 & 15 days Prog: RSPO1041 Variant: willsys SAVEClick on start condition .Eg: BRBACKUP.Eg.Db click . 27-jul-09BACKGROUND JOB MONITORING SM37 53. Used to display the jobs based on job.2. Wait until the locks are released/ jobs are completed. May be due to heavy load on the system 4. Modes.The tool defines when to trigger.Variant . how to handle various statuses and alert users accordingly. From Menu Job > Move to different server. Also due to passing the jobs by extending scheduler time/ making BTC to 0 by running theprogram BTCTRNS1.Active indicates the following 1.OPERATION MODES RZ04 SM63It is the process of switching DIA to BTC and vice versa during the peak hours as we need moredialogue process and during off peak we need more BWP to run the BTC jobs. Problem in the program and inputs (Indefinite loops like 1/0)11.Is a predefined program that will be run in the background with user inputs asvariants. Vendors instead of communicating in hand documents they are advised to communicate insoft documents. KODAK Runs 14. The configured BTC processes are not sufficient to handle the requests in Ready status. Instance 2.IMMEDIATE or DATE. 54The job is running an expensive activity like client copy. fax or email or even updating a database(Eg.Name of the instance that provides BWP to run the job Exec Target Willsys_<SID>_00 Click on stepJOB STEPS We need to specify the following for the JOB Execution1. User and password Issues (Authentication/ Authorization) user lock. Some jobs are bound to run for hours and based on history leave them to run.Action: 1. External Programs: NAME: Name of the program Parameter: Target Host:Name : Specify the name of the program and the parameters.slideshare. We can move the jobs from one instance to another instance. 52.2. 523. RSSNAPDEL .Jobs that fetch information from BW systems.Is a predefined value that is populated during the runtime. 28-jul-09There are Third Party BTC Job Schedulers 1.Delete the old ABAP Dumps3. Runs payroll for the employees3. annual reports.info http://www. 3.3. The jobs in DB13 uses OS Commands. 2. 2.000 Jobs/ day HP Runs 20.Spool ReorganizationEg: from SA38 Click on ExecuteAnd Specify the Days .Delete the old spool logs and files4. Jobs are waiting to be processed by the target system (RFC. RED WOOD Scheduler 3. Dead locks issue (Lock mechanism congested)5. Specify the processes for modesGoto SM63 to define timing for the modesRZ04 > click on Create [Instance Operation Mode] Peak_mode Peak_mode operations Default SAVEOff peakOff peak ModeCreate new Instance willsys28 Start profile Save. Update mechanism failed6. username. file sharing issues. (Consider the above screen) Active jobs can be moved.. 583. Communication with NON SAP Systems to fetch the data6. file not found as well. 59BTC . RSPO1043 . Increase BTC work processes based on the available resources by using the parameter rdisp/wp_no_btc = 2 2. pay roll run. We can repeat the scheduling of the job if required5. It displays the job logs By highlighting a job and click on Job Log 58. Runs standard jobs for House Keeping 9 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . 57From GOTO Menu > Variants > SAVE as VariantSM37 . Table space over flow (ORA-1653. Jobs are expensive and running to fetch the content. Weekly. 55The jobs are completed successfully but check the log for further information/ completion..Delete old update requests/ logs5. ACTIVE BTC in active status (long time recorded) 54. File system problems: BTC reads from the file system to update the database. Target systems are not available to process the jobs.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. 2. RSPO1041 . The memory is not sufficient and errors (No Roll Area. status ----. CONTROL-M Scheduler 2. expensive programming or sql statements/fetching huge amount of data. R/3 BIW Replication5.and click on Job Logs Execute SM37Highlight the jobClick on Job logSap takes at most care to avoid dead locks.e. Client copy for the technical consultants4. job name.i. External Command3. File not opened. ABAP Program . lack of roles etc.Standard Background House keeping Jobs1. BRRESTORE. The jobs with status READY indicates the jobs are ready to pickup by the scheduler Eg: Consider a CAB . dunning reports may take hourstogether or even days to complete successfully. ORA-1654)7. date and status2.1. ORA-272)9.2.5. Client Copy)6. 53rdisp/wp_no_btc = 2rdisp/btctime = 10Operation modes . 57. file came with different characters. RSMO13002 . CANCELLEDJob status cancelled/ finished but failed in the log.to make use of the resources optimallySM37 is used for BTC monitoringExecute SM37 Specify username.BTC Jobs performs the following:1..MONITORING BACKGROUND JOBS. CPIC) 3. SAP also sends soft documents as well. Event (SM62)/ Operation.

Updates the database based on transaction ID. Message.Update Releases the lock.Repeat UpdateUsed to repeat the ERR updates. Update inherits the locks and releases them upon updating permanent tables.4. we can get a list of all existing Tcodes and which programs are called by thosetransactions. Gateway and Spool DVEBMGS)It is also possible to install and configure all the above servers on different instances or hosts.Update mechanism can be deactivated by setting the parameterrdisp/vb_stop_active=0 to deactivate the update mechanism in case of DB errors.To store data that needs to be updatedVBMOD . Message server maintains the details of favorite server and routes the request to thatdispatcher 4. Update inherits the locks. (Its a background job)V1 and V2 updates needs to be defined in the system.slideshare. Add an entry in etc/ services As sampsDEV (Message Server Name) 3200/tcpEntry should be made on all GUI systems. Obtains lock from Enqueue so the data consistency is achieved and the records are only for display.If the records stays for longer time in INIT status that indicates the updates are busy or there are nosufficient update processes or update mechanism is deactivate from SM14.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book 60.Note: The load is calculated based on in ST07 5. User submits the request for an update (Let us say a Purchase Order) Eg: Bearers won’t go to the Pantry Similarly All dialogue won’t go to the. Programmatical Error5. Dialogue process updates the temporary tables called as VB* asynchronouslyVBHDR .7. 64 Each SAP transaction is considered as Single LUW (Logical unit of work) which in turncontains multiple LUWs needs to be committed to commit the SAP Transaction. 3. Table Space overflow (ORA-1653. It provides locks from alock table before a record gets updated and ensure that the record is available for display during 10 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .SM13 . Updates the request in Temp tables (VBHDR.9. There will be only one message server through out the System.UPDATE MONITORING SM13 The record that needs to be updated by update process is displayed in SM13 with status INIT. Archive Struck (ORA-255. Update. ORA-272) 29-jul09BATCH/ BTC/ BACKGROUND 64.To store update header informationVBDATA . 66Logon Groups SMLGSMLG > Create Provide GROUP: For Eg: MARKETING INSTANCE: dewall36_R3I_00Now from SAP Logon ScreenClick on Groups > and Provide SID and Message Server. The update are terminated or cancelled due to the following reasons1.ini gets evaluated and checks the port in etcservices to communicate with themessage server.From SE11 . If any one of theLUW is failed the entire transaction is rolled back.sapdocs. Define a logon group from TCode SMLG 2.ini > open [MESSAGE SERVER] DEV = <hostname> 67. To run Database jobs using external commands DB13 (SM49 provides commands)NOTE: In table TSTC.1.5.info http://www.We can see either V1 or V2 in the standard SAP Program SAPMV45A by executing SE38MESSAGE SERVER/ PROCESS 1.ini if not exists from (x:windows) Sapmsg.1. There are three 3 Types of updatesV1 . 67Mechanism 1.UPDATE Statuses. 2. Update gets initialized and reads from Temp Tables and updates the permanent tablessynchronously. Assign the instance. User communicates using GUI. ORA-1654)4. 609. 63Dialogue Updates . When the Dialogue updates the temp tables the record is displayed in SM13 which will beprocessed by update.Rdisp/vbreorg =1 to delete the incomplete update request during a system restart. User submits the request.BTC logs are deleted by scheduling RSBTCDEL which deletes the log files from TBTC* based on thetime interval in the Variant SA38.3. Programming problems in LUW3.Report in SA38 RSM13002To delete the old update requests. Dispatcher handles the request .The modules through which the data is updatedVBERR Update Error Table 62. Update deactivated in SM142. Max Extents reached (ORA-1631. Update releases the lock from the record. Gets the transaction ID from NRIV (Number Range Interval Table)6. Table space overflow2. Dispatcher handles the request and provides a dialogue process to it. Max Extents reached3. Dead Lock (Needs to inform SAP for Program correction)Updates which could not be updated will be thrown into ERR Status. Archive struck4.ERR The record runs in to an Error (Update Error)RUN The update is executing the record into DBAUTO The error records are reprocessed after a system restart/ update activation Automatically. VBERROR)5. 61Ready for longer timeActive for the longer time. VBDATA.8. create a file sapmsg. VBMOD.Reserved by SAP (Currently no use)Updates are defined by the parameter Rdisp/wp_no_vb=1 Rdisp/wp_no_vb2=2 from RZ11Technically for every 5 dialogue work process there should be one update of type V1/ V2Update Flow:1.UPDATE PROCESSIt is used to update the database from Temporary tables. 2. Update gets initiated to update the VB* content permanently into the database.DialogueMessage server obtains the lock for dialogue process if the request is coming from the Dialogueinstances.Provide the table name TSTC and execute providing the T-Code to find the ProgramNo bother of "Schedule/ Released" Will not in our scopeWe need to take care about the Status 61. ORA-1632)5. Update Deactivation (SM14) Running updates during deactivationDEACTIVATE -----------> THROWS TO ERROR -------------> GOES TO AUTOAt this point of time we need to select the update (put a check mark of the update from SM13) andclick on [Repeat Update]Refer modules from SM13 65.It can be activated from SM14.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.2.rdisp/vbdelete=30 to delete the update records older than 30 days irrespective of the status.INIT The record is waiting to update by an update process. Dialogue handles the request.ENQUEUE: It is used to provide data consistency while updating the system. 3. Updateupdates the record based on transaction-ID using VBMOD Table (Every update is module based inSAP)6. BTC.Deletes the executed update requests. Update handles the record and change the status to "RUN"If the update stays long time in status RUN1.CONFIGURING SMLG 1. 62And gets a transaction ID from Number Range Buffer (Transaction SNRO and Table NRIV NumberRange Interval Table)SNRONRIVEg: 63. Enqueue. Dialogue process interprets the request and communicates with enqueue process to provide a lockto update the record consistently.We can find the Active servers from SM51 and on db click on the Host name to view all the Processes.. Open GUI > Select groups and create entry by choosing group. 4. sapmsg.The following are the statuses displayed in SM13 Transaction. 65The updates can be repeated with status ERRRdisp/vbmail = 1 to send email to the users if an update is failed.Handles low priority updatesV3 .. DB2..SMMS: MESSAGE SERVER MONITORINGENQUEUE PROCESS / SERVER SM12 MonitoringNote: Server Naming convention is used because each of the process serving the user requests(Dialogue.Handles High Priority UpdatesV2 .3.Queue . Reorganize the update tables. It is used to manage all the dispatchers and identify the least loaded dispatcher and forwardthe user request to the dispatcher provided logon load balancing is configured in transaction SMLG 66.4.V1 handles critical updates and V2 handles the non-critical updates which are defined by theprogrammers. Longer Update2. That is the reason why dialogue updates TempTable.

As it is stored in tables.SE11 > table name : /* (/ is a customer name space) 74. Locks are monitored in transaction SM12. 74TADIR is the repositoryTSTC . If the updating has stopped.Spool Process REQUESTFRONT END > Spool process comes at our DesktopDefault setting is DBRZ11 : rspo_location : rdisp/ btctime3. (Every day 50-100 Docs) if the sizeincreases the search at file level consumes more time as (No indexes at file system) 72. Dead locks (Usually never occurs.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. 68There will be 1 One Enqueue process installed during installation.(TST01. We need to ensure that dialogue process should not held forlonger time. but shows theperformance by using Indexes when the user grows (Temse can handle 90000 Requests)2. Manufacturing and MaterialModule.MSSG .Is the T-Codes with the program name. We may need to allow some locks for more than one hour or days (Eg.5ms for Central instance and 100Msin case of the request that is coming form Dialogue instance. Lock table is overflow and the locks are held in SM122. These print request are processed by the respective Dialogue/ BTC and stores the content in TEMSE.Spool Process OUT PUTDIALOGUE [TST01. The Spool process reads from TST01 and TST03 i. No of copies are procured from TST01 and Printable data from TST03 73. 723.2.TEMSE size is 99000Refer:SU22 .MSSG .LOCK .Note: STMS > System > Transport Toolno_import_all = 0 (No Mass Transportation)SPOOL MECHANISMDialogue .Database tables TST01 and TST03)Note:DIALOGUE .It is also possible to have dedicated instances which will provide only spool processesPROGRAM[ RSPO1041] to maintain TEMSE.Then we can consider the following1.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book anupdate. If updating has not been interpreted.It is configured by the parameterrdisp/ wp_no_enq = 1 30-jul-09DEAD LOCKSAP TRANS -----.PRINT 71.Enqueue server maintains the lock table on the shared memory of the Central Instance (or on theinstance where it is installed)It is recommended to increase the Enqueue processes only on the Central Instance. thenthe lock table can quickly become over filled with the locks held by update requests. Enque time is too high 70.DB [DB]1. so highlight this issue to SAP) In some instances we may need to release the locks but we need to follow certain process.slideshare. LOANS etc)2.TEMSE AT OS OR DB (WHICH ONE IS RECOMMENDED?)OS [G]1.sapdocs. then we must enlargethe lock table. Backup is a regular activity on database so the Temse is secured. In principle the lock which are older than one hourshould be reported to the escalation manager. Payroll updateprocessing) consumes lot of time. fortnight. TST02] .3. If the update gets deactivated then thelocks are not released. If it is performedremotely then it is said to be RAM (Remote access Method)Spool processes are configured by rdisp/wp_no_spo (Rdisp indicates instance specific)There should be at least 1 one Spool process in the entire system. i.e. That is Temse is not secured atfile system.TS* TablesSpool process reads from TEMSE and convert spool requests to the output requests (Printer specificrequests).SPADLPD . Check whether the update server is still performing the updates. 70As a part of the response time enqueue time should be 1ms . 73Spool Process formats or converts spool requests to output requests i. Ifboth are installed on the same machine then it will be more comfortable for message server tocommunicate with Enqueue process to obtain locks for Dialogue process that are coming from otherinstances.Temse is a part of Normal Database (TST01 and TST03) no separate memory is required.TS* TablesDialogue --------------------. If the Enqueue time increases i.(s_spo_act) . TST03)--SPOOL -. 69DIA . 31-jul-09SPOOL PROCESSINGUser request .Whether Changeable or not.Line Print DemonDrivers are specific to O/S 11 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .Refer: From SE12TPFYPROPTYFlag for changesObj_name = parameter Rdisp/timeType T denotes DynamicX . User request to print a purchase order (or) user schedule to print dunning reports (LEGAL Notices.SPOOL -----.1.e.(Tables TBT*) BTC---. Consumes more time than Temse at OS when there are less no of records. Ifthe format is performed locally then it is said to be LAN (Local Access Method). TST03) --. 68.DIALOGUE . RFC 69.DIATCODE .Note: Enque table overflow is recorded in SM21 and ST22Eg: Execute SU01 from Shawn user/ 800 and edit shramana user Execute SU01 from Shawn user/800 and edit shramana userFollowing message is displayedAnd now execute SM12 which displays the Exclusive Mode lock2..MULTIPLE LUWSMM Dept Sales DeptX + Y (LUW1) A + B (LUW1)Z + M (LUW2) X + Y (LUW2) Dead LockQ + R (LUW3) R + Q (LUW3)Enqueue process the locks and unlock the record during an update.e.ENQ . Temse remains in the DB/OS unless they aredeleted explicitly by SAP standard reports. 01-Aug-09SAP SystemNote: We should not touch the Repository data of name space A to X.2.(Only Terminate or End that session)All the transaction activities are recorded in CDHDRNote: Initially 20Kb Mem is given from ztta_roll_first. File system backup will be weekly. there could be RFC issue or Enque wait time is increasing thenconsider increasing Enqueue work processes. but however BTC is allowed. but there is a collision between PP. This is only recommended when the requests are small in nature. It is also possible to increaseEnqueue processes to more than one depending upon the updates but most of the customerenvironments there will be only 1 One enqueue process.SM12 (Lock Management)Enqueue table size is defined by the parameterEnqueue/table_size=4MB (Earlier 1 MB to 4 MB) in Netweaver systems this can be increased to100MBLOCK MONITORING/ ENQUEUE MONITORING SM12Shared ModeExclusive Mode.SPOOL ADMINISTRATION TCODE . If the lock table is filled (Enque/ Table_size) anoverflow occurs in the lock table.PRINTUser request DIA-. from Globaldirectory requests can be converted to output request at faster rate than database. It is recommended because the print request are printed faster than database. Printer specific format.We can configure as many as we can depending upon the available resources.e.DIA .Market place > keys & Reqs > Development Name space.Technically the Message and the Enqueue should reside on the same instance (It is not mandatory).Credits. Check the period of lock (if it is older than 1 hour inform to the escalation manager)3.monthly whereas database is hourly (Redo Logs) and daily DB Backup. the name of the author (USER).BTC request .(TST01.info http://www.To identify the tcode/ Authorization objectsSP01SU24 The Temse can be stored in database or OS level. Get the written B&W approval from the user and terminate the session of that user using SM04. Do not release the lock in SM12 (Even though there is an option)Lock deletion is recorded in SM21.MultiplexingBTC .Temse is a temporary sequential objects that are stored at OS (File system) or Database level whichis defined by the parameterrspo/store_location=G or DB(G Means Global Directory usrsapSIDsysglobal)(DB Means . 71PROCESS/ FLOW:1. Users complaint that he could not update a record and message pop up stating that the record islocked by user XYZ.4. File system is not backup frequently as Database.Single ProcessThe Advantages of TEMSE. Update is deactivate (SM14) due to any of the issues in DB.BTC . We can resolvethe problem by restarting the updates.1.TBTC* . Name of thePrinter.

.We can also use SPAD for reorganization of spool (but the logic is same)For thisExecute .This is not existing but pointed to a Real spool/ another logical spool server. Click on output device3. It is used to define output devices/ Spool servers and access methodsDefining a Spool Server: The instance with atleast one spool process is referred as spool server. 78--------------------.7. Execute SPAD2...e.Display then Change3.e.SETTING DEFAULT PRINTERFrom SU01 we can specify default printer to the user but do not check the box "delete the requestafter output immediately" which improves the spool 12 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .. Completed : The output request printed successfully. the printer should be configured on destination HOST. Print server.. Telex etc)Authorization Group : Specifies the access control methodsModel: 2200Location : 5th floor A wing.e.... Click on create6. RSPO0043). the work process transfersthe spool request to the spool system locally.Specify U for UNIX operating system where formatting is performed on the remote machine (Printserver) using Berkeley protocol.. cartridge issues. Printing : The host spool is printing the output request.2.. printer not available) paper out. Itimproves performance.TEMSE -.Spool Requests Output Requests(Stores in Temse)Note:Put a check mark [ ] Do not query host spooler for output requests..Note: Front end cannot be scheduled in the background. It is also referred as Realspool server..000 requests and log is generatedin SM21 (System Log) .. Sensitive docs. HSM.Similarly we should have enough output devices to avoid the print queues. Spool request cannot be generated .Specify I for Achieving device (Optical Devices. time consuming than any other methods..SP01 is used to monitor the spool requests based on statuses. Execute SPAD2. 81 spool .. 76.PRINT QUEUESNote: Should have enough spool work process to format the requests to printer specific requests. 77 Device type specifies that the output device is recognized by SAP. If there is nodevice type available then select SAPWIN.Transaction Codes [Lock/ Unlock] 82.. If this parameter is not used spoolcongestion occurs.. Waiting : Waiting for processing by spool4.. Click on display4. Click on change5.sapdocs. If required write to SAP and try to get the device type. If the SAP spool system does not receive any status information from the host spool. (either Local.1.From SP01 --. this status displayed for approximately one minute.. Tray info is also similar.Select the request -. In Process : The spool WP is formatting the output for printing5. In general the spool requests which are older than 14 days will be deleted ifstandard jobs are scheduled in SM36 they also checks the consistency of TEMSE periodically.rdisp/wp_no_spo_fro_max = 2i.Output Attributes: Depends upon the company requirements.info http://www. If we need the exact status then uncheck the box.1.SPOOL TEMSE ADMINISTRATIONIt is used to monitor the memory allocated for TEMSENote: If we need to forward a spool request select the request in SP01 and forward it to another userwhere user can print from alternative printer.The TEMSE is full i. This is used for loadbalancing the spools. users can monitor the requests using SP02. print servernot available) these printer specific issues will be resolved by Network Team/ Print Team.02-Aug-09ACCESS METHODS It specifies the process of formatting the spool request to printer specific outputrequest.Disadvantages: No user can print in the background because the desktop initiation is not possible inthe background during off peak hours. SAPsends programs in terms of Patches. 80. Front End.1.Specify S for windows operating system. Error : It indicates a server error such as network error.Message : Only used by Pay Roll.. if too many requests with this Status indicates need for increasing spool WP. 79REMOTE ACCESS METHODS The formatting by spool work process is performed on remote system.Restrict the no of work process that can go into front end mode using the parameter.Select L for UNIX based system (Local Print Method)Select C for Windows (which uses direct operating system call)Select F for FRONT END printingSpool work process goes to the user desktop and format the request based on the printer that isconnected to desktop. The requests have not printed and remain in the spool system until they are deleted or until they reach their expiration date and are deleted during a reorganization. .While changing the parameter we can set the priority between 1 .slideshare. RSPO0041. 76DEFINING OUTPUT DEVICE/ PRINTER1. 75. Printer.e.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. (RSPO1041. In systems where the spool system does not receive any information about the host 81. Click on the Spool Server .We need to reorganize the spool requests using the SAP standard reports. Device type: HP Model & Manufacturer 77. if required we can change the printer and reprint thedocument. TEMSE will be full when it reaches 99.Author. Fax.SPAD > Utilities > For device types > ImportIf the character set is required. This is more expensive. 82----------SP12 . User complain that they could not print documents to a specific printer.-----The Major advantage of TEMSE is the documents can be displayed even before it is printed. Status . label printing.10 (1 as High)3.--------------------Note:Dialogue --.Advantages: Check printing. two work processes can be used for front end printing.2.RSPO0041-----------Refer SM01 . The system then sets the status to Complete (Competed or Error)6.Spool process uses Access Methods to format the request. the system changes to complete as soon as the output request is sent to the host spool.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book and not to SAP1..Device Class: (Standard. Status + : Spool request is being generated (Stored in Spool system)3.SP01 : Spool request > Forward > (Client to client) Recipient : DDICUse SBWP (SAP business work place) to display the request in inbox. It can be a print server.CONFIGURING THE OUT PUT DEVICE. Specify the Output device name Specify the description : Local Printer7. Click on create Server Name: LOGICAL SP1 Server Class : Mass Printing Logical Server: Mapping : willsys28_00 Alt server: .LOCAL ACCESS METHODThe spool work process and the host spool resides in the same machine i.Minus : Indicates not yet sent to the host system (No output requests exist) The spool process is busy/ congested...Check the availability of the printer.) 78. If this option is checked. It will transfer the formatting to remote system usingSAP specific protocol SAPLPDFor LOCAL & REMOTE > Needs the printer modelsFor FRONT END > SAPWINWhen Remote access method is specified we need the followingHOST Printer:Destination HOST:i. Jukebox (stores each copy (output doc))Hierarchal storage machine 79.SPAD > Full ADMIN > ADMIN > Delete old spool requests Or from SA38 execute the program . These are used to delete the old spool requests based onselection criteria. 80SPOOL MONITORING SP01.. 75Note: We can set up a dedicated instance for spool process. . Number of copiesWhen printer is defined Spool server (LS/ RS) is assignedIn order to print we need the spool process from the assigned instance to convert the spool requestin to the output request. SP02 The spool requests are monitored in SP01. (Existing)Logical Spool Server.RSPO1043.Use Menu "Spool Request and print directly" or select print withchanged parameters. Printer issues like (Page setting issues..

spool. He is maintaining customerdetails. SM37Operation modes (RZ04. Profiles will resides in (usr/sap/<SID>/sys/profiles)There are three types of Profiles1.GATEWAY WORK PROCESS SMGWSMGW is used to monitor the gateway process. 894. Message server communicates will all the dispatchers and identifies the least loaded server andmark it as a favorite server in SMLG.Factors to define LLB.Copy > Save and Activate the profile.Application Monitor: User DistributionSMLG . 04-Aug-09LOGON LOAD BALANCING SMLGST07 . BTC.Example: A customer/ company is running business for the past 30 Years. supplier details.Identify the components along with users. Startup3.2.Startup Profile Startup profile consists of startup parameters likeStarting DatabaseStarting Message ServerDispatcher + Work. They can be managed/edited using a notepad. 851.SMLG > Define the groups and assign the instances. 3301. GUI basedusing mouse 87. IDOC aretransferring they use gateway) INSTANCE MANAGEMENTInstance is managed by using profiles.4.POBI ---INVExample: Reliance.RZ10 There are three types of Administration. User select group and click on logon. It looks for sapmsg.Starting Sequence 85. saprfc. It will effect only after restarting the Server.ini is used to display the available entries3. employees and salaries.Sapmsg. Instance Profile As part of post installation we import the profiles of Active servers from RZ10. Fail over (Logical) (As we are configuring logical system) Load balancing provides the following logon groups which are defined in SMLG. User uses SAP GUI -groups option to login2.LoadSAP . vendor details. if we modify the instanceprofile WP DIA=2000 and there is no error message and versions are not maintained under OS level)DEV_DVEBMGS00_willsysdel. account receivablesand P&L (Profit and Loss). finished.Default Profile It is used to provide global parameters for all the instances. Gateway is used to communicate between SAP andNON-SAP systems. They would like to work on the traditional systems.Non SAPHero Honda XML DealersRFC: REMOTE FUNCTION CALL SM59RFC is used to communicate between SAP systems and SAP to Non-SAP systems using 13 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . EDI. ready. SM63)RSCOLL . Extended Maintenance Used by administrator using parameter namesSpecify the input by including new parameters or modify the existing one.Profiles are changed on SAP recommendation or based on experience.10 Users (Refer ST07)Handles request InteractivelyMultiplexingRdisp/max_wp_runtime = 600SM50/ SM66wp_no_diaDPMONIt initiates update. How many profiles are available on a system with 10 Dialogue instances. When the user select group. User restrictions). 89.e. 84. Total = 11 (including Central Instance) 11 X 2 per instance (Start + Instance) 22 22 + 1 (Default Instance) = 23PROFILE MANAGEMENTDocumentation for profiles are available in RZ10Profiles resides in the table . There will be only one default profile in the entire system which provides global values. SM69).Gateway listens on port 3300+instance number (3300.ini. suppliers. POs.Extract . Basic Maintenance: It is used to maintain the profile parameters without any technical names. sapdoccd. using SAP. 03-Aug-09 83. saproute. Startup profile is read by the system to start the engine by starting (DISP+WORK) on dialogueinstance. Load balancing to avoid long queues3. Instance specific profile . The dispatcher process the request normally. Message server host. Saplogon.Mechanism1. Message server and enqueueBTCExpensive. time consumingNo time limitOff peak timeScheduled to run periodically using variantsStatuses(Scheduled. If this is unchecked it prints faster but sequenceis not maintained.3302 where 01. System will hang and may not restart.ini ---IP Address --. 83Dialogue2 Min / Instance75 .2.Do not modify these parameter under any circumstances on OS level. cancelled)Job stepProgram (SA38).Gateway provides an interface so that the external system can communicate with SAP system on thespecified port. saplogon. OSCommands (SM49. account payables.Transfer .TPFYPROPTYRZ11 is also used to change some parameters dynamically without restarting the system but they willbe reset once the system is restarted. There will be only 1 gateway/ instance. message server anddispatcher in Central Instance. 02 are the instances).slideshare.sapdocs. Do not change any of theprofiles on trail and error method. If required we can also install a standalonegateway on a JAVA engine. buffer parameters. Hero Honda [B2B Company to Dealers] not B2C [Distributers to customers] theycommunicate with dealers. The request is routed to the favorite server.This is used to set the instance specific parameters.Eg. The data entered in the legacy system i. 84When RFCs are defined between the systems they use SAP gateway when (ALE. This information is required by the customer in SAP System. So there isneed to transfer the legacy system data to SAP system. If the users are logging to different instances the buffersare scattered therefore they are not effectively used. Administration data No need to maintain using this option.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.ini. Shipping are to betransferred periodically(Hourly) bi-hourly(for every 4 hrs) or dailySO --. Buffers are optimally utilized. 873.ini (For library).So for this* Note: DDLOG is the synchronization tableUser A A+B =50User B A+B =75 Buffer Synchronization1.The printer can be locked during maintenance in SPADTo process the requests sequentially based on serial numbersSelect the option -.Print sequentially consumes time to print in the order. Released. 86.gathers performance into ST03BTC communicates with enqueue for locking and spool for print.150 MB5 . active.The profile changes are updated at OS level and the existing profile is marked as . Default2. timeout parameters etc. wp_no_btc=0.The profiles resides at OS level in the directory (usrsap<SID>sysprofile).2. But the consistency is not checked (say for eg.ETL . Billing. Startup profile is read by the system to start the engine by starting database. Systems)TBTC* tablesStandard background jobsPause(rdisp/btctime. Invoices. But dealers and suppliers use non-SAP system so it isrequired to establish communication between SAP and NON SAP systems and perform the datatransfer periodically. securityparameters (Password.BAK and a newprofile is created in the profile directory.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book performance.Logon groups sapmsg.ini to identify the message server andetc/services for message server port.6. After go live both systems SAP and legacytravel parallely. 861.RZ10 changes are permanentThe field type T Specifies the dynamic parameters.So these profiles are imported into database management for consistency check and versionmanagement.Hostname of the message server Central instance (but not always)DATA TRANSFER TECHNIQUESDuring the implementation of the legacy system needs to be preserved or used in the current system.3. long running.ini5. External Programs (on Tar.info http://www. enqueue host)Instance Profile This is specific to instance configuration such as work process. btctrans1)Atleast 2 for the entire systemSM36. It only specifies the path of theparameters.Example: Customer implemented SAP but the employees who are old cannot make use of SAPsystem. 88Logon Load Balancing SMLG It is used to route the requests to the least loaded instance of that group.[ ] print sequentially in SPAD from OP devices attributes tab.ini 88.

SM59 .model : willsys > Create(The logged in system is treated as Sending system)We need to define recipient/ receiving systems 92.states that the document is posted02 .DPMON . RFC failures. Define Logical System (<SID>CLNT009)3. It is used to document all thetransactional IDs and ensure that they are received by the recipient system. Synchronous RFC3.states that there is error in the port07 states there is a syntax error. Queue RFC1. The process has to complete the jobor Heap Memory should exhaust.So we need to identify which client is the business client. Preciously SAP is client based (A mandatoryfield while login)Each client is defined with a logical system name that is defined in SALE. Technical settings (Host name and Instance No)5. RFC/ CPIC. A programRSARFCSE is scheduled in the background to run for every 60 seconds.States that the application document not posted fully. Test Connection. If it is not killed the process might be occupiedby dedicated resource and uses heap memory with status PRIV. 95 . sleep. Target system/ Receiving system may bebusy i. Identify the user.QRFC (outbound) queueSMQ2 .SMQ2 Provides interface to monitor Inbound queues.When the user could not login to the system (Experience Hour glass) Process the list @ OS Level DPMON K Provide SR. Queued RFC . Transaction SM58 is used for Transactional RFC.SYSTEM MONITORING Gateway is a port that listens on 3300.Maintain Operation ModesSM63 . hold. Programs)PROCESS MONITORING SM50 (INSTANCE)/ SM66 (GLOBAL) 94.info http://www. This is reliable but time consuming and expensive (Client Copy)the job should get finished. Synchronous RFC .From 000/ SapuserExecute SCUA / .Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.SM591.Example : Central user administration.There should be unique SID in the Landscape.0 InstallationExports [1 of 4 ]Kernel. DEVCLNT900To identify the systems easily by name1.sapdocs.Update program Administration (Deactivate)SM36 .. Save the connection. Free. client.Process OverviewSM51 .RSMO13002Delete old update request logs . system dumps. client by 3 digit number. Each system is identified by SID. pending updates.Delete Old spool logs and files ..Being in parent create an user assigning profile SAP_ALL .Output controller . Logon Security (Client.QRFC (Inbound) queueSM04 .e.. Instance is down)But on SAP front we need to monitor the process utilization. 07-Aug-09Market Place > SAP Support Portal > Suserid>>Downloads > Installation Upgrades > My Company Components SAP Solution Manager 7.Delete Old ABAP Dumps . Asynchronous RFC (Like a post card).SMQ1 .slideshare. It ensures transaction consistency of LUW and reliability of data transmission.To define the Back ground JobSM37 . btc failures.Stop the other systems . database logs. BNAME. UID.Defining RFC Connection . Count(*) as Total from DEV. If more number goes into PRIV we may need to restart the instance. Ended. UGLAG from USR02128 . Monitor the processes with status(reasons) running. 06-Aug-09Status (Killed.Display/ Maintain Operation Mode SetSP01 .. 91 05-Aug-09DEFINING SYSTEMS . PWD.SpoolStandard Jobs RSBTCDEL .Select MANDT.Example: To configure central user administration SCUA Tcode is used. Asynchronous RFC2. (like aregister post). The request goes toreceiving system if it is not handled a Transaction ID is generated by the source system. RFCs are defined in [SM59]. systemlogs.Note : Rdisp/gui_auto_logout = 900 sec---Example ---User pwd forgotten and all the users are locked if SAP* is deleted. there isno acknowledgement from the receiving .RSPO1041 . Transactional RFC4. Transactions. Select the connection type 33. Reports.RFC DestinationSM50 . 901. i.RSSNAPDL .Update requestsSM14 .Select Lock EntriesSM13 .SM59 . dead locks.It is not like ARFC.Self Locked64 Administrator Lock never becomes 0-------------------ReferSM12 . Task Manager or Kill -9 Command on UNIX.ALE . Goto > SALE > Basic Settings > Logical System2.SAP to SAP only.Execute SM58 (Transactional RFC)Users are distributed to the child client using TRFC(SM58) and if the client system is notAvailable the record hangs in SM58 and ensure that is updated in the child client. 91. stopped.This is consistence and reliable.JOB monitorSM21 . It will be created with Passwordpass. We may need to kill the processes withstatus PRIV using DPMON.User List.A user is created in the parent client and transferred to the child client when they are available?4.Global Work Process overviewWE05 . Transactional RFC TRFC . If BTC is running for longer times check whether it is permissible as per the process document. 92DEVCLNT001DEVCLNT000DELCLNT001 save to configure CUAGoto back end systemsTry to execute SU01 and create an user .technically 1000 client can be created in one system. all the resources are used up. The transmission is not reliable. Description about the connection4. It will be in theUnderstandable format of both sending and receiving systems. Logon Language)6.WE05 is the Tcode to monitor the IDOCSSCUL to check the logsWE05 > Status 93. Remote logonPerform three times to add 3 systems.Deletes the batch job logs 95. PRIV. Failed spool requests. It gets an acknowledgement from the target system. (Sap System linking andenabling). So.It is an advanced version of ARFC and SRFC. Assign logical system to the client.RSPO1043 Spool Reorganization.Refer : select MANDT..SALESAP systems consists of more than one client . memory and CPU technically. Java Components > Add to download Basket Paste in<SID>sysexeUC |Install 14 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . Do not change the status of users in the USR02 Table.It is an advanced version of TRF and ensures that the transaction is committedbased on FIFO/ Queue. Number Provide PID.are the outbound IDOCS50 and above are the inbound IDOCS52 .NON SAP. Logical system numbershould be <SID>CLNT<CLNT_Number>Eg.To delete : Execute report : RSDELCUA or SCUA select the client and delete. It will beautomatically down (Killed) by system in 600 Seconds.Berkley UNIX PRINTER CPIC SRFC3. It wont allows us to create because thereceiving systems will become a Child system.Tcode IDOC to check the consistencyWE21 to identify the ports for IDOC processing. SAP .53 .define systems and SAVE .Provide the name of the logical system2. Action.RSCOLL00 .IDOCS (Intermediate Documents) are used to transfer the data. 930 to 49 .System LogST22 . so that process comes out.Note: SAP uses CPIC protocol SAP specific (Common Programming Interface for Communication) tocommunicate between system. Dialogue process should not consume more than 1-2 seconds for normal tasks. There are 4 types of RFCs 90. The sending system may or may not receive it.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book TCP/IPprotocol.It is used to monitor the health of systems in terms of storage.IDOC ListSMQ1 .to monitor the outbound queues of a sending system refer SCOTT for FAX.e.Electronic Data Interchange It is used to communicate between SAP to NON-SAP systems.Central User Administration SCUAGoto > BD64 or SALE > To define the sending systems and receiving systemsOrUse the SAP standard moral for that application.SCUM is performed only in the Parent SystemEg: Consider a Scenario . work load on thesystem (Users.Active SAP ServersSM66 .ABAP Dumps/ Runtime ErrorRZ04 . time. 94 Monitor the instance specific processes in SM50 and Global Specific Process overview based onstatus in SM66.2.USR02 group by MANDT.EDI .Collects performance info in Transaction ST03 . If the receiving system is not available the process goes into RFC/ CPIC/ Sleepmode and waits until it is wakened by the target system.

----IMPORT ABAP : c:prog filessapinst_instdirerpsystemoracentralasErr. 3. The program need to be corrected by the developer. The processing time should not be more than 200 15 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .7. 1. the above error occurs.Perform Post Installation DICO STMSFrom Menu Overview > SystemsExtras > Delete TMS configuration or execute DICO1. 1. 3 . If the roll wait time increasesconsider there is a bottle next on the RFC communication. Select Icon > Other Configuration [][] Include System in Domain Pops up DC Host/ Target Host : JOMLERTDEV DC Sys No/ System No: 00 SAVEUpon saving the request from quality system is sent to DC to include in the domain. All ABAP dumps are documented3.4.3. Sec. JOQ.Configuration > Standard configuration > Three systems in group. User desktop is slow 2.08-Aug09TRANSPORT GROUPSNote: usrsaptrans can be on JOD.JOQ --.Double Click on the system JOD from Communication TabFrom Transport Group Tab change mode Provide Name : Group_JODPerform the same for JOQ.2. Archive Stuck. OUT OF MEMORY. Segment Management.slideshare. From DC From Menu Overview > Systems JOD JOQ JOPSelect the system JOP from SAP System Menu > Click on approve. If it is more than this consider the following. The user context is heavy to Roll in (User might having more authorizations. network might be congested. Execute STMS > Will prompt to create a transport Domain. The user request is expensive (FI and basis will logon to the central instance. Session Termination due to network failures. Memory related issues with error message PXA. Wait Time: The amount of time the user request sits in the queue.Say YESNote: In principle there will be only one client in the production system. Login to Quality system Execute STMS >As DC is already created from the above step. Identify the userswho are consuming more memory and also identify the transactions and identify why it is consumingmore time. Front End Time/ GUI Time : Time taken by the user to reach the dispatcher is called as Front endtime. 09-Aug-09PERFORMANCE TUNING ST02 102. Time out errors Identify the error message from the log and search in the market place.As a part of monitoring we need to identify the messages with color red. Roll Out Time: The time taken by the work process to copy the information from its local memoryto Roll Area/ Roll File/ User context/ Roll buffer and it should not be more than 50 M.UNIT TESTJOP ---. Roll in Time: The work process copies the Roll in User context into WP task handler. PAGE. 103 2.Eg: BSI (British Standard Institute) requests the consultants to monitor the system on hourly basis.8. Illegal time: (Day light savings) .RFC --. The GUI time should not exceed more than 200 M. parameters) 103.5.8. we need to report with high priority.e. When we delete SM12 the locks are logged. 98TRANSPORT GROUP If each system has their own transport group i. Login to the DC6. JOP or on separate disk. Analyse the reason for failure (Check if the system is scheduled for downtime) If we areauthorized start the instance and if it could not be started then look into work directory for logs.NoteTSTC . If it exceeds this consider the following. archive stuck. 1001.Holds the transaction and the Program nameTSTCT . The time takenby the work process to copy the context (Roll In) is referred as Roll in time. Identify the instances which are down i. consider the following. Infinite Loops. (1:5) 2.---. Update Deactivation : SM147.e.Transport directories are configured.Target system. 97Perform SICK SE06 > Standard Installation . 96P&G requests their production systems to be monitored periodically for every 8 Hrs. Generally it should not be morethan 50 M.4. SM51 to list the servers and monitor the instanceswhich are up and running. Login to DC (Domain Controller) Development System/ 000 client with user like DDIC2.Roll wait time SleepNote: Roll wait time is not considered as a part of response time.Transport Groups with individual transport directories. This TCODE is also used to logoff the user session if required. If any instance is down. 99SM04/ AL08 : Used to identify the number of users logged on to the instance. The work process are not sufficient to handle the user requests. TIME_OUT error: The program requires more time than the time defined inrdisp/max_wprun_time2. endless loops. improper selectstatements etc. > Continue > SAVE Three system configuration .This error requires memory corrections to the parameters. SAVE. 2. All the database related errors like Space issues.SM50 identifies the process which are long running.3. Processing Time: The time taken by the work process to process the user request usinginterpreters. Update (Lags in Memory)3.Check lists contains the following 1. If this is same with all the users.ST22 recovers the following1. Login/disable_multi_gui_login.AL08SM04SM21: System logs specific to the instance. they maintain transport groupsthemselves i.6.During day light savings the system date and time has to bechanged.Holds the description/ text of a T-Code.2 Clients [DEV and Customizing.Sec. 101. Database issues like table space over flow.1 ClientJOD---. Roll Wait Time: During the processing when a dialogue process communicates with RFCs andwaiting for the response at this time the user context is copied/ rolled back toBTC ---.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. System Startup/ Work process log2. UNIT Testing]SYSTEM MONITORINGSM51SM50/ SM66SM13SM14SM37SP01 99. SecurityOn JOD > 97.5. exe. Training] . Ok. Similarly perform the to include production into DC5.Sec or 10% of the response time. It displays the logs based on date/time. Enqueue Table Overflow: SM126. Illegal attempts and user locks6. Program Corrections: The problem is with SAP standard program for which SAP provides acorrection through notes (The correction can be applied through SNOTE)4. 100.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book the download managerSYSTEM MONITORING Each customer provides a standard check list to monitor their systems from time to time.3.4. 1011. Customer defined programs (Y. Generally it should not bemore than 50 M.info http://www.7.Select the system JOQ and click on Approve from Menu SAP System > Approve 98. There are sufficient processes but the existing process are held with expensive request. t-code & problem class. Z) consumes more memory. Domain name will be Domain<SID> Save the Domain.5. max-extents reached. Stop the AS and change the date if not. System log > Remote systemIt is used to display the logs for the following activities. Minimize the authorizations.ST22 ABAP DUMPSWhen ever a SAP Program (ABAP program) could not be executed due to an error it will be thrownout from the GUIScreen and a dump is recorded in ST22. Rest of all theusers are allowed to login to Dialogue instance)Note: GUI response time is not considered as a part of the Dialogue response time because therequest is not received by the dispatcher. 1. Divide Error 1/02.2 Clients [Test. user. We can also identify the logs of other instances. SWAP.e. If the time exceeds.1. We need to include systems in the DC.sapdocs. 102This complete journey should be completed within 600 Milli seconds on an average or goes up to 600Seconds Max.Sec. 96. Defining the Landscape From the DC/ 000/ DDIC > Goto STMSClick on the icon transport routesClick on changeMenu .

At this situationwe can use DPMON or SM04 to terminate the user session.CASE STUDYWe have configured 20 WP in the Instance and we know pretty well that each user request consumesa minimum of 25MB of MemoryWP MEMORY 4GB 8GB STATUS Roll_first Roll_extn Roll_Area Heap1 20KB 512MB 19.20KBExtended Memory is used by all the Work Processes.MEMORYPhysical Memory: The memory that is available or the memory that is configured on the instanceusing the parameter PHYS_MEMSIZE. It will be releasedonly after the task completion or Memory is exhausted(Abap/heap_area_dia)/ timed out byrdisp/max_priv_time. If it exceeds more than this time we can consider thatthe enqueues are not sufficient or Enqueue table overflow. screen info from the database and generate these objects. 2.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book M.Virtual Memory: Pagefile.000dialogue steps.210. If the allocated memory is not sufficient then it gets allocated from Extended memoryztta/roll_extension. programs etc are eligible for buffering. on a Centralinstance and 100 M.. new installation or when there is a mass change inthe programs. Before we startimplementation we would like to establish connecting with SAP using SAP Router. ST05 Performance Analysis)8. WP gets memory from local memory which is defined in the parameter ztta/roll_area... 150 MB in 37. There wont be any threshold value as it depends on External system.> From Help and Support Tab> click on Report a Product ErrorFrom Here Provide Customer : Company Name Installation : System ID : JODNext > Search Term : SAP Router Or Go with Message Select the system & select the componentRaise a request as follows:Dear SAP..sapdocs. 104. The user complains that he could not login to the system . If the directories/ size isfull then Buffer Swaps occurs in ST02. This situation is referred as Hour Glass Mode or WP Congestion. Sales Order. Dispatcher assigns the WP 3.197(This 16 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . LG Time: Load and Generation Time: Time required to load the objects such as source code.Local Memory: The memory that is assigned to work process is referred as Local MemoryRoll Memory/ Roll Buffer: The memory that is used by work process to store the user contextinformation is referred as Roll memory. screens. The DB Buffers are not sufficient. Out of this we dont want to allow SAP to utilize the wholememory. Name of the Server : JOMLSOLMAN IP Address : 213.Sec. WP requires memory to Roll -In the user context. 2. The DB statistics job is not scheduled in DB13.IF DB Time is more consider the following. GUI.980MB 2GB PRIV.. It should not be more than 200 M. 4. WP into PRIV Mode 2. Roll Out Time][Wait time + RI + RO + PI +LG + RFC + DB +ENT]Note: Team Viewer is the Remote Desktop support Software BOMGAR. User submits the request. Database Time: The time taken by the process to reach the database and process the request.. Programs can be stored up to 150000 KB.Sec. 107Rdisp/max_priv_time When the process uses Heap Memory it is used in Heap/ Private mode..Memory : RAM is the first Memory.MEMORY ALLOCATION 1. transactions.(Refer LC10 : Live Cache). R/3)Extended Memory: The memory that is used by SAP work processes is referred as Extended Memory.500 directories. If CPU time ismore consider tuning ABAP Programs Refer to ABAP development team (Also Refer SE30 ABAP Runtime Analysis. 4.. 3.Private/ Heap Memory: The memory that is used by work process exclusively by restricting itself. ARCHIVE STUCK (The user could not update any record and results in hour glass mode)BUFFERS ST02 The frequently used content and less frequently modified is eligible for buffering. Missing indexes in DB02.slideshare. Itgets only a part of it which is defined by parameter ztta/roll_first (20KB) 5.info http://www. If that is also not sufficient then it uses the remaining ROLL Area.213.12. Each dialogue uses abap/heap_area_dia and non dia uses abap/heap_area_nondia bothprocess should not exceed abap/heap_area_total.Generally it should not be more than 40% of (Response time . RFC or CPIC Time: The time taken by the process to communicate with external interfaces isreferred as RFC time.Run SGEN tcode after patch application. Resource bottle neck on DB.. If that is also not sufficient then it uses HEAP/ PRIVATE Memory and the WP goes intoPRIVATE Mode. Billing) are noteligible for buffering. Transactional Data(PO. Data such as Exchange Rates.Sec..com> click on SAP Support Portal. The response time should be worked out only when there are atleast 10. CPU Time: When the request are processed using interpreters an amount of CPU is utilized toprocess the request using CPU resources is referred as CPU time.980MB 5MB PRIV 107. If the processing time is morewe can consider either ABAP program is expensive.20 KB ztta/roll_first through ztta/roll_areaExtended Memory ztta/roll_extension : 512 MBCome back to local MemoryIf all the memory is consumed it cant come back so goes to the Heap/ Private Memory. To . Buffering is specific to instance. table definitions.89 20KB 0MB 19. 1. Ifthe response time is more and dialogue steps of fewer 1 or 2 then the average response time couldnot be worked out.sap. Select Expert Mode to identify the expensiveprograms.As CPU time is included in processing time it is not calculated in the response time.When SWAP occurs the content needs to be fetched again from Database which increases theresponse time.Average Time# Indicates .Total Time 10-Aug-09WORK LOAD ANALYSIS ST03ST03 It is used to calculate the work load analysis. The processeswhich are in PRIV Mode cannot be timed out byRdisp/max_wprun_timeRdisp/max_priv_timeSo configure so that the process is timed out after this time (600 Seconds/ 10 Minutes) when the workprocess goes into PRIV mode it will not listen to rdisp/max_wprun_time=600sec. 12-Aug-09 108. The DB resources are stake(CPU and Memory Utilization) i. GUIinfo. If not kill the process at OS level basedon PID. It is similar to the CPU time.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. 1. 105.Eg.Q.. 8.Shared Memory: The memory that is used by all the applications (OS.. Each buffered element is stored in the memory of the instancein terms of Directories and Space. It should be as minimal as possible.Virtual Memory: The physical memory and SWAP memory/ Pagging Memory on the diskThe physical memory will not be sufficient to provide the users for temporary work area/ Calculations/so a part of the disk which is configured for SWAP is used.Wait time).Wait time). 106User ---> Dispatcher ---> WP ---> Rolls Its MemoryRequires Memory to Roll In to the Task HandlerZtta/roll_first . Dialogue Response time: The time taken by the Dialogue process to process the request whichincludes [Wait time . While calculating the average consider the number of dialogue steps of the transaction user. or WP waiting for a lock. We have installed solution manager and 3 ERP systems in the landscape. screen is expensive or SQL statements areexpensive. 10411. 105On UNIX during installation assign atleast 20GB of SWAP. 6.service.* PHYS_MEMSIZE: This parameter restricts the usage of memory by that instance. reports and users.9.7.sys 11-Aug-09 106.. Heap memory is defined by the parameterAbap/heaplimit=4GB Abap/heap_area_diaTransaction ST02 provides the memory utilization 9.Hour Glass Mode?A.980MB 2GB PRIV2 20KB 512MB 19. upgrade.Ф Indicates . Invoice. 108RAISING A REQUEST TO SAP FOR A SAP ROUTERFrom the Market Place www. (Communication between any BW/ CRM/SCM system).e. DB. CompanyName..CPU time should not be more than (40% of the Dialogue response time . On windows assign atleast 3*RAM size/20 GB which ever is higher.. calendars. Enqueue Time: The time taken by the process to communicate with enqueue for obtaining the lockwhile updating a record is referred as Enqueue time. 7. Enqueue time should be 5 M..10.Sec on a Dialogue instance.

Define the Environment Variable..--------------RMMAIN tcode only in SOLMAN Implementation Road Map > Technical Infrastructure Planning > Order for Remote Connection to SAPProject Preparation Phase. 111Paste the file in usrsapsaproutersapcar -xvf 90000114.SAP Router is an executable which is used to restrict the access to the customer systems over thenetwork. Shunmugam Phone No:Hit SENDNote: from Market Place > My Profile > Maintain Single Sign on Certificate > Specify Password. D .sap.It depends on OSWe can download either CAR or SAR file 111.202/s/3299Create New Connection RFC ConnectionLogon SecurityE1001SCO4013677AISUSER tcode------------------------------------. It can be installed on anydesktop. SAP responds with Distinguished name.3. Provide Userid and password/ Client} Provide your name R.exe and NIPPING.Central Instance Dialogue InstanceUsrsap2.19 OS : NT/ INtel Version : Win2003 DB Release : 9.Now copy from BEGIN to END from SAP that site/ ScreenPaste it in a notepad file(without extension) with file name srcert in the folder nt-X86_6414. copy the two uncared files in to the saprouter directory.SAPSR3 . IP Address and Customer Number(SAP Router need not to be installed on Solution Manager /DEV/ QAS/ PRD. SNC (Secured Network Connection Needs to be added) For this Goto > www.{ Open the connectivity. It works like a firewall/ proxy to permit and deny the access to the SAP systems.On Windows> Check whether the SAPRouter service is running or not to make sure whether theSAPRouter is already configured or not. SAP able to connect and we need to provide authentication3.exe4. Maintain our systems in the Market Place2.SAP Generic Personal Security Encryption13. 109From Market place > Check the email.info http://www. (www.-------------SAP Router1. 113SAPSR1 .exe will be in nt-X86_64 so goto 112. Start the router using command saprouter -r -k "DN"12.pse "Paste the distinguished name"Prompts for PIN : any passwordTwiceSapgenpse . TO check the Distinguished name Sapgenpse get_my_name -v -n issuer18.210.227. Download the Cryptography files from Market place related to OS and bit version (Download *. Import the certificate into router system using SAPGENPSE11. Create SAP Router directory and copy the executables from exeucNTi386 or download from themarket place. SA38. Importing the Certificate Nt-X86_64> sapgenpse import_own_cert -c srcert -p local.2.3.SAPROUTETAB is a file (without any extension) used to have ACL (Access Control List) S .SAP router side will restrict the user.Secure.213.. sapgenpse..service. Request a certificate from the market place copy into srcert. Generating certificate from Customers End (SOLMAN System) Use the command Sapgenpse.SAR SAP Archive..com/swdc) copy only SAPCAR.slideshare. Goto SMP ---.39. Uncar the files into SAPRouter directory6.Cust Number : When we buy SAP we will be provided with the customer number. Generate the certificate using distinguished "DN" name with executable SAPGENPSE.Market place > connect to SAP > R/3 Support > Open connection 114. From Market Place > My Company App Components Look for SAPROUTER700 Windows server X64 Click on Add to download basket.Report 17 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . From Command Prompt > Saprouter>ntscmgr install SAPRouter -b E:usrsapsaproutersaprouter. 109.8.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.dll to encrypt and decrypt the messages.. 99(SAP Router)All kind of services can be acquired from OSS1Over the web using DIAG protocol.p "JOSADM"It will create a service. Work file certreq in nt-X86_64 Open with notepad And copy from BEGIN to END Paste in the STEP 10 in the text box and hit Continue Click on request certificateIt generates a text with BEGIN to END. 1159. This two executables needs to be copied to the routerdirectory.12... usrsapsaprouter Ensure that the folder has full (Read + Write permissions) 110. 114Take out the access from SCC4..7.SAR only[Global Host] ..sapdocs. Create a service called SAPRouter service.SARfiles)5.Deny.131. Create message to SAP along with your SAP Router [Hostname].124.197JOLSOLMAN194.8. being in nt-X86_64 > sapgenpse seclogin -p local.. 112 Saprouter> CD nt-X86_64Saprouternt-X86_64>sapgenpse get_pse -v -r certreq -p local.Nipping is an executable to ping to the router.msc > saprouter From Logon Tab Select This Account : JOSADM Apply--------------------------------------------To UninstallNtscmgr install saprouter -b E:.pse15.. K -SNC (Secure network connection)7.0Router String:> H/220. The password will be visible [ ].dllSapcrypt.14SAPSR2 -9 113.194.10. SAPROUTTAB > open with notepad > copy the whole content (from already configured system) > provide> SAP IP > Our IP. SE38..SAP : 213. Copy and Paste certificate from Begin to End the market place url /Saprouter-SNCADD 115.13-Aug-09SAP ROUTERTheory1. Create a sub directory E:usrsapsaprouter5.. (It is discontinued)----------------4 systems in the landscapeSAP Router is a software program which is used to restrict to access the customer systems using thetable SAPROUTTAB.2..CAR .It needs to be configure before implementation Part of SAP.SAPROUTTAB is a text file with out any extension in the router directory with prefix P. executable used to generate the personal security environment. 110NoteSAPRouter is an executable in the kernel directory (usrsapSIDsysexeucNTi386).. Execute SM59 SAPOSS > ChangeIP Address of SAPRouter at Customer SideAnd also change at SAP Side Router String---------------------------------------Goto Market PlaceDownload service connectionMaintain Data > System DataSOLMAN Production SystemGoto DB ServerHostname > SOLMAN IP Address : 124.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book is where our SAPRouter is going to be configured)We are using dedicated public IP Address SID : JOS INSTANCE NO : 00Please send us certificate details.JOS is the SID9.exe . SAP Router provides the authorization and we need to provide the authentication.sar6.6------------------------------------------19. but it is advised to install on SOLMAN system to ensure that it is monitored periodically.com/SAPROUTER-SNCADD Apply Copy [ Shows the Distinguished Name] > Hit Continue11.0. Define a file SAPROUTTAB Create a file SAPROUTTAB in the saprouter dir with out any extension10. P -Permit.pse -o JOSADM Will create a file cred_v216. SAPROUTER. From Command Prompt Change directory to trans as it is holding the downloaded files E:usrsaptrans> sapcar -xvf saprouter_12_100004305.12.. From market place click on Download Area > SAP Cryptographic Software .car-----------Note: Download Manager > Configuration > SUSERID and PWD-----------8.service.17.. Create a directory with name saprouter in usr sapdirectory.34----------------Earlier from the Back End system say for eg: SOLMAN system001/ DDIC > Login to the SOLMAN systemDiscontinued from 2006 -TCODE > OSS1 (Online SAP Service) From Menu Parameter > Technical Settings Hit Change SAPRouter at SAPNote: Instance 98 ( Is for SOLMAN Diagnostic Tool). D and S (Permit. How many hours it needs to be opened.DB .. Router as Service Services.Deny and Secure sometimes)STEPS TO CONFIGURE SAP ROUTER1. My Comp > Properties > Advanced>Variable : SECUDIRPath: E:usrsapsaprouterVariable :SNC_LIBPath: E:sursapsaprouternt-X86_64sapcrypto..exe. However we can also download from market place.sap.Compressed ArchiveKernel comes with .sar file. Login as <SID>ADM4.

e.Buffer swaps occurs when there are no sufficient directories or space. SQL Trace5. DB Buffer size is not sufficient to hold the content fetched from the database. by that time it will besynchronized between APP1 and APP2.Sec on CI(CentralInstance) 100 M. 121Ask the customer to provide the list of Active users.Open connection by selecting the service---.2.SGEN . Analysis has to be carried out ifthere are atleast 10. During the restart and when support packages are applied and when upgrade is performed. If the programs are expensive then refer to development team. 118.Used to monitor the buffer swaps on the Application Server/ InstanceLRU . User3 request APP1 for display @ 10:00:40WP will ask DDLOG table to check for recent update within 60 Sec. T001 Company info3.TABLE BufferingSAP stores the content in tables (Every data except start and stop logs is stored in DATABASE. SAP-OSS. If the content is requested after 60 Seconds. Change the program buffer using ABAP/ buffer_size to a maximum of 600 MB on 32 bitMachines. EKKO (PURCHASE)BUFFER SYNCHRONIZATION When more than one application server is configured then buffers between different instancesmay not be synchronized.SQL server performance analysis. User2 request to APP2 for update the same sales order to Rs. Similarly maintain all the other systems in the landscape.3. for every hundred reads only 6 should goes tothe database.4. Enqueue Trace: When the enque or enque wait time is increasing by 5 M. 116SAP recommends this value to be around 98%{For every 100 request 2 request goes to database and the remaining should be from the buffers}Key areas that effect the performance are program buffers. In order to synchronize buffers set the parameter 117. VBAK (SALES).ST06 OSMONITORIt Fetches the data using service SAPOSCOL and it displays CPU Utilization. Select * from can be fine tuned by using select single * from with appropriate where 18 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . T001. 500 @ 10:00:012.(Also which are small in size)Eg: T000 have all the clients and required to create a client copy.Sec on Dialogue instance (Consider switching enqueue trace)4. FULL Buffering2. 117 Rdisp/ buffermode = Send on. In this scenario we advice to deploy additional instances.1. Switch on Buffer Trace. Generic Buffering3.Specify no ofdays and hours. It is also used to start and stop SAPOSCOL (during Upgrades)Note: OSCOL brings the operating system information into ST06.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. Buffer Trace Available in ST01 and ST053. Frequent updates on the database2.Least Recently used. It displays the log files related to work process. SE01All the programs is in Uncompiled mode in TADIR table.ST01 and ST05Used to trace the following1.slideshare. No Buffering: The tables which are large frequently used. If notmemory bottleneck. Single Record Buffering: The tables which are large in size.Start service connector -.Analysis: Identify the buffer areas whose swaps/ Database access are more. and frequently modified are not eligiblefor buffering. Full Buffering: The tables which are frequently used and rarely modified are eligible for buffering.SAPOSS. The configured buffers are small5.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book Error --.2. frequently used. IF there are no updatesfetches the same from APP1 Buffer.TSTC. 116.Refer . Single Record Buffering4. It is also used to identify thememory utilized. DB buffer. Inform SAP to connect toour systems. 120Click on Presentation ServerST07 Used to identify whether the system is optimally designed or not.Ensure that DB Buffers are configured as per the available memory. (DDLOG is a buffer synchronizationtable).Compiles the programs 14-Aug-09ST04 DB PERFORMANCE MONITOR .Database hit ratio comes down below 94% then consider the following.Based on the number of servers we can also define logon load balancing. The ABAP programs are expensive with multiple conditions and endless loops. exec auto. On each backend system we need to maintain the RFC details in OSS1 Transaction. When more swaps occur theyare displayed on ST02 in swaps column. 1223.If the buffer hit ratio comes down it effects on the DB response time. Kernel Trace1.Probably the hardware is procured as per sizing but the number of users grown dynamically (300-600). noprog/ no data is available in the file system)There are four types of Buffering1. No BufferingThis is maintained for each table SE13 refer USR02 Table.It is calculated by using formulae[ Logical reads .All the programs are stored in TADIR. No Sufficient space or directories2. Calculate the number of Process Vs Users to determineno of Users/ Process.The CPU idle time should not be less than 30% [For Portal up to 80% to 85%]If it is below 30% we can consider the following.Maintain Routerdetails ------. It will updateSAPOSS RFC Connection.Physical Reads]/ Logical Reads * 100Logical Reads is the sum of [Physical reads and Buffer Reads] (Buffer Gets/ Reads)FROM ST04Physical Reads: The reads from the database. 121. SAPSNOTE are created on communicating with the Market Place. User1 request to APP1 for update Sales order to Rs.13.If there is any change then it will fetch from DB and swap out the buffer. 122.Remaining parameters based on SAP recommendation from RZ11.If a user complaints that he could not connect to the server (Ping to the desktop) 120.BUFFER SWAPS indicate the following1.---------------------------------------------ST02 continuation.Mechanism1. Authorization Trace Only in ST016.ST11: It is used to display the work directory. Memory Utilization anddisk response time. Generic Buffering: Tables which are relatively large.Connect to SAP Select the system . table buffers and Table and Fielddefinitions. 1181.sapdocs. rarely modified using a set ofkeys (Fields)Eg: USR02. (Identify those statements in ST04)Eg. When there are too many expensive SQL Statements which are increasing the database responsetime in ST04 then switch on SQL Trace. . The CPU is not sufficient to handle the load because the hardware is not procured as per sizing. If OSCOL is not started ST06 will beblank. Mass transportation of objects4.Users are 9944 and the WP are 27 so each WP serves 5-10 Users so 27*10 = 270Here users are including Active and Inactive Users.info http://www.Download service connector -. The content is frequently modified3. It also displays the memory installed on the machine. 119We can check TOP CPU utilization for the current in the last 24 Hrs. frequently used and rarely modifiedare buffered using a primary key. When more buffer swaps occurs in the table buffering ST02.550 @ 10:00:203. Some times complete memory willbe dedicated to DB Buffers. 119.DDLOG is a synchronization between instances and maintain TIMESTAMPNote: DB13. It isrecommended that it should not be less than 94% i.This is also used to identify Response time and Buffers Utilization. Ensure that physical memory free is available to handle the user requests. RFC Trace2.Each work process serves around 5-10 Users.LAN CHECK BY PING is used to ping to all the systems in the Network/ Landscape. (This is fully buffered)2. Enqueue Trace4. When the RFC/ CPIC time are going beyond threshold value then switch on RFC Trace. EO70.1.AL11 : List the SAP Directories on Application Server..Say for Eg: from the below screen.BUFFER HIT RATIO.Do no take any decisions based on the readings on a specific day.Maintain System Data -. Memory available(Free) along with theSWAP space.000 requests. Rdisp/ buffertime = 60 Sec. DB02. It is used to display the database buffer hit ratio.

table level backup)... OS. 6.5.Remote connection to SAP9.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.Payment will be released in Parts ---. RAID.com/sizing)Goto> Sizing tool > Click on Quick sizerIt will be opened on new windowProvide customer number.20% Realization .The software should be unicoded language to support all the languages. Landscape Configuration10.. 2. RFQ and RFI (Customer and Vendor)2. (Basis Consultant)Landscape Deployment Plan: 127. Time and Material (T&M) 3. RFP (Customer and Vendor)3. 124These requirements list will be floated as RFQ feasibility of software.III... Critical Tasks are based on Man days/ Man HoursExample : Disaster Recovery 1. fonts. Platform and communications3. TCS.Customer decides software with the help of feasibility reports and assistance from auditors.. The existing software is not capable to communicate with other systems 5. HARDWARE SIZINGIt is an exercise carried out by Basis consultant with the help of the customer business processowners.20%. Support . 17-Aug-09IMPLEMENTATION OF SAPPreRequisites1.e. BASIS. Hardware requirements from customers are to be documented.Implementation Partners and call them for Interview (technical discussions) toexhibit their capabilities. 19 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . WIPRO.. Landscape Deployment Plan3. Too many legacy systems. Peoplesoft. Risk and mitigation---------------1. manual inputs.C++ No ABAP. FinalPreparation .. Eg. Blue print . It is used to determine theCPUs. SIX SIGMA. partial. languages. If SOW is not defined properly.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book conditions. The existing Hardware is old and the response times are high. colors.com. FAX)2.Delay in Software. Company Strengths4. hardware and theImplementer. Financial Background and Share Value5. Module specific questions2. Desktops.sapdocs.Note: Do not switch on the traces when they are not required. 7.comAuditor gather info from . Storage (Hard disks) and Memory. Post Installation Steps7. PWC (Price Water Coupons) are the auditors to identify therequirements in the company. Documentation(Upload. Pager.Based on 4th and 7th vendor will be finalized to implement SAPNote: External Security Routing Switching Proxy Firewall Internal Security 126.Recovery etc. 127 It consists of the number of systems that are going to be deployed in the customerdata center. Go-Live .The GUI should be compatible.The software/ Hardware should support mirroring.Possible/ Not Possible/ Customizable/ If customizable Amount of effort. The software is not user friendly to take the user inputs. monitoring are the variousissues with the current software. KPBG.com. paging devices.Available to Promise -----> Ware House.. 19-Aug-09II. HP. MOTIVATION OF SAP FOR AN ERP 1.SAP is Strong in Manufacturing. The software is out of maintenance with no updates.. Past Projects and experience in that area6. Challenges in the project. Project Implementation Methodology2.5. 124.20%.sap. SMS. Hyperion. It records all the calls that are made tokernel when the trace is ON.The software should support Mobile devices. Disaster Recovery. Switch Off the trace. sapbasis. MAHINDRA submits the proposal.00.The software should support (Online. 126Authenticating Authorized users is Internal Security. Installation of the Software6. sms. AssumptionsBased on the above proposal customer and audit team shortlist the two or three software vendors(IBM. They define the pain points of every business user owner anddocument them. it isvendor responsibility. Sap Partnership)10. Project can be a fixed bid let us say 2. Weak in Retail } Tcode-SFW5(Switch Framework)SA38 . Testing Strategy 123..SAP Provides quick sizing toll (http://service. Let us say the Project Manager is SAP.3.Request for information------------------It can contain as follows1.GETSYSDEF.RC=0 (Return Code)Note: Tuning is not testing we need enormous analysis and data to justify the conclusion. Email.Example:.Business partner owners . Business Scenarios.4.. 125.info http://www. Landscape Deployment. Motivation of SAP for an ERP Software2.Capability Maturity Model. The customer could not be competitive in the market due to the legacy methods deployed B1 . 1. Disaster. risks and mitigations11. SOW and Project Award (Customer and Vendor)4. Access. It will populate enormous log files andoccupies the complete disk place and system stands still.Software Vendors. Implementation of solution manager (Provides Roadmap..These list will be submitted to Oracle Apps. Routing.Note: ATP Server .Customer calls for quotation to implement SAPThis is the first official document released to implement SAP. user friendly. Holidays. Hardware Sizing4.password change. Case studies and customer references8. Number of hours required/ No of Man days/ No of Man Months2. or with no company (CompanyBankrupt/ Merger etc.30%. It may serve the customer as an overview of the SAP systems.1.slideshare. They out sourced toSeal Infotech for training and implementation. Restore etc.Request for Quotation (Released by customers)RFI . sick etc). Hardware and Software Order5. Go-Live15.. Kernel Trace: Used to identify the consistency of Kernel.) 3. TCS. Download) etc. fax. Technical questions related to Hardware. But exact number ofsystems will be known only after the Hardware sizing 1 CPU / 2 Parallel Process By default 3 Parallel Process.Test Data Migration ServerQASPRE PRODSANDDEV/ CUST/ GOLDENUNIT TESTINGINTEGRATIONPAYROLL/ TDMS 8TRAININGPRE PRODPROD. We need to provide manpower to SAP to implement @customer site. 125RFQ . Project Manager and Hardware vendors (IBM. Fixed Bid 2. LANDSCAPE DEPLOYMENT PLAN1. clustering. SUN. incremental.bck files while reinstalling the SAPRefer: sapfans. Parallel Run14. Go Live Strategy13. Router -----. Transport Management11.Project Costing:1. Provide Customer details to SAP (Name of the contact. Authorization Check: Whenever user encounters missing authorizations and could not be traced inSU53 can be traced out by switching the trace on User. NW 4. SAP Project bidder is SAP for 28 Crores in Singareni Collories . accommodation.9. 12312. Process3.Project Start 10%. Bearing Point. PDA etc. NAVISION. sapconsultant. Replacement.Customer enquires in the market and calls for the Auditors to identify the software. VPN.1. They can also raisequestions in the form of RFI (Request for Information) 18-Aug-09------------------C:pfsapinst_instdirERPsystemORAcentralASEnsure that there should not be any .. Average man power experience going to be deployed7. Cost of the Man hours/ Man Days/ Man Months Offshore 20-30$ 160-240$ Onsite 60-100$ 1000$ 20000$3. too little integration. Customer wanted to deploy an application that suites to his requirements by replacing theexisting software due to the following reasons. Fax..ST04 > Detailed > Oracle Session > SQL Statements. Backup.6. staff. Provide Project name and create a Project for sizing. As a practice switch on the trace and informthe user to run the transaction. Email Id.Risks and mitigations has to be clearly stated in the SOW. vacations. ergonomically designed.Delloite. DELL). Seibel (CRM)implementing partners. Resource Based 4. WIPRO etc) .000 (i.The software should be installed on all the operating systems and databases. Activity Based (Try to include Wait time)The scope of work needs to be defined properly before sign-on. It cannot communicate with print.Description ---.Phase1. User management8. Certifications (CMMI .Support partners like IBM. @ Million Dollars for completion all inclusive(Fares.Note: Toughly Coupled/ HardlyPreparatory costs has to be borne by vendorsTDMS .Issue --. Offline.

PI. User ..Points to the target systemBIN contains default.sapdocs.etc -.4. Printers5. B.Based on companies stability. JAVA add on. High Availability2. Supplier.SAP . Interfaces (Like Fax.0. past experience. High Availability 131.40 HRS * 60 Mins1Dialogue Step . Philippines and MalaysiaIBM ships from USV..14400 .multicables -..BW version is 3. HARDWARE ORDER1.3. RAID5 .1.e..0BW .Sizing is based on the following.. Example Customer Database size is 400GB but they want to migrate 250GB into SAP(Customer.. For every 2000 sales documents that are generated per hourrequires 100 SAPS. If the complete system collapses due to hardware failure use clustering -. M. No of usersAlong with legacy database and future growth of usersUser Low Medium HighFI 50 250 250CO 50 250 250The sizing is also called as T-Shirt sizing which determines your servers as (S.Oracle AppsMySAPSCM .0 is based on two tier which is built on Mainframes.0 134.0. Default Host .Load On the System:Users work on the system on various modulesMM . 1312.If the sizing output requires 3200 SAPS then we need 4 CPUs.000 Users. Backup . etc. i. RAID1 Mirroring (1:1) on disk goes down other should take over.GeneratorNetwork Cable --.)4.SAPS is ( SAP APPLICATION BENCHMARK FOR PERFORMANCE STANDARDS)SAPS are calculated based on Sales module..(The hardware vendor determines the CPU Size based on SAPS example an ISeries machine singleCPU generates 800 SAPS. case studies. If the connectivity fails . MI etc. 1301.0.2.USR02.LogisticsSD .5.JAVA-----------------------------. 132ISUSER (INDIAN SAP USER FORUM)ASUSER(AMERICAN SAP USER FORUM)Communicate with SAP vendor (Channel Partners) and purchase the license. DBI). 3..License Cost varies based on Geographical LocationMySAPFI .ALL Sap tables will be stored65...info http://www.More than one cableCPUs -.HP ships from Singapore.SAP<SID> . Chemical. SolutionManager.611SQL>Select bname.000 we should have atleast 150-200 Users for 10+1 cost 18 Lakhs. X Series (I Series V5R4) is the O/sClustering (Mechanism : PING PONG)DD02L .0CRM . SRM are SRM VersionsXI .bsp .SAPs . baking.Financial40% More to the sizing result..1 are BW Versions2.Note:----------------------------IBM . L.Public .0EP .Part of the Physical Memory (RAM Memory)Physical Memory .SAPSR3 . reliability.log)--------------------------.* Every year we need to run USMM and send the report to SAP.)SAP determined to bring all the components on to a common platform and introduced SAP WebApplication Server (WAS)The first version of WAS is 620 (A direct jump from 4.10 SecsEg.40 Hrs ..Note: Legacy database size (get the details from customer what amount of data they are planning tomigrate into SAP. The sizing is based on1.6CSAPINST introduced in WEB Application Server 620-640. SICF 3. 3.. 130..3. Database3.. Utilities.0CRM ...0EP . Customer calls the RFQ from various vendors to supply hardware. Vendor..0.0XI . Textile.Two Parallel systems(Used for failover or Load balancing)Eg.Sizing Capacity . SRM CRM are charged Separately. 1293.MicrosoftP Series. I Series V5R4 DB2]SAP .SAPSR3.IV.. from WEBAS 620 to 640It provides built in ITS to make application server as WEB Application Server. APO are SCM Versions2.If we buy MYSAP business suite then all comes under one license.UPS -.0.200 * 10 Dialogue Steps = 2000..DB2 Database]..RAID and SAN8. 2. We can buy 100 Users and used for 10.It provides runtime environment for SAP Applications.5. High Availability 1.27-Aug-09 133. 134Next level of WAS is 700ERP . Mirroring..0SRM .RAMVirtual Memory ..6C 4..The Hardware resources are required for the following which needs to be considered while sizing1.pflSAP_BC_ADMIn S_Transports CTS_AdminDisp+exe ( PING.SAP Application Benchmark for Performance Standards)It is calculated in terms of Hardware vendors provide CPU in terms of the CPUsEg.7EOn 620 . CPU cannot be arrived directly because the process speed depends upon the hardware vendor..ECC6. SAP assumes that a sales order/ Purchase orderconsumes around 8-12 Dialogue steps.Part of the Memory from the Hard diskBufferBin . Install Central System Installation (Select Usage type duringInstallation)R/3 Setup is used to install SAP upto Versions Basis 4.40*60/480 = 5 Min = 300 Sec2. 133BASIS. 4.30 Sec3.Hosted on Multiple slotsDISK .Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.SiebleEach license cost 2000 USDEach Developer Cost 4000 USDAfter negotiation in Indian Market the Single user cost comes to 40..0BW .00. there is a plan to implement in future.5SCM ..SizingModule Selection: Select the modules that are going to be implemented likeLogistics.000 depending uponnumber of users.(5 Disks---.---------------------------Note:Heap Memory .6D is the Kernel Version.TKT No: 008000000001 The Strategy is to migrate/ upgrade the hardware for every three years..5B. Financials. XXL) Sizingoutput determines the memory.SAP .0 onwards and upto 3.. IBM P Series generates 800 SAPs/ CPU...PeoplesoftMySAPCRM . consistency. If the existing server collapses -. 128FI . If disaster occurs -----.Sales 128. price and support(warranty).. Modules used1. Purchase Order / Week .. 3.)SCM. ERP.. IBM P-SeriesUnless unlocked by IBM we cannot make use of the additional Hard DisksNote: For Upgrade .Storage Area Network4.Hardware vendors take 3 weeks to 4 weeks to deliver based on the availability of the hardware...Next Level of WAS is 640ERP .htmlb RT Click > Activate ServiceNote: This should be done as Post Installation StepsSPRO > SAP Solution Manager > General ConfigurationActivating BC Sets (BCBusiness Configuration)Tcode: scpr20> From End user systemIf any one stuck @ point executing a command SM59 > Help > Create Mssg..SAN5.0Install ABAP(CI.BI7. Pager etc.40 Hrs . Real Estates. XS.0. Any Kernel upgrade has been done (DEV_DISP. Upto BASIS 4.5A.* There is no lock for licensed users in the system. Etc Entry...02..21-Aug09Sizing is performed by quick sizer which is proprietary by quick sizer which is proprietary tool of SAP.1I it is based on three tier and web services are provided by using ITS. Material. ERP Version is 4... RAID.. CLUSTERING Standby server or do you need any suggestions.0. SAN .Component BC-MID-RFC Test LowTest -.ECC 5. OS2.. C and D is kernel versions(Mining.480 Dialogue Steps with the system ..Setup DR Server in a different geographical location6. mandt from SAPSR3.. 4.. Type of Users3.. FI Transactions)High Availability options (Time of Availability)These are the general details that are required for sizing.For 40. Product life cycle Management (Currently HR is not going to be implementedbut. 22-Aug-09Service Desk > 1.PI7.710).Database schema ownerSAPSR3DB .SAPSR3 from WEBAS 700It is a Netweaver (640.1COwner of the Database.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book DB. If it before three years consider HR in sizing if not.4. Interactive SAPINST is to modify the inputsmove front and back to review the inputs introduced in 20 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .. storage and CPU in terms of Saps. 3..DB2 [AIX O/s .License is a single user based. 480 .4800 Dialogue Steps .000 to 1. Email.6 A. Oil. 1 Spare/ Parity) 129.6.3.Util -4. Modules and3. SMS. Third party communication (Batch processing etc)So we can consider adding 30-50% to the sizing results..Multiple CPUSMemory . Address.MAXDBOracleSQL Server . XL. buy more leased lines from different vendors7..4..6D)On 620 . Execute 4.. ORDERING SAP SOFTWARE 132.4. BI.slideshare. If we buy one license we can access ..EP7. 700... Insurance. SRM.. 480 . EP..Need to activate some services 2.due to power cable --.

Data is normalized and denormalised according to the requirements of the customer.doc. 140.2. [CDCLS] Cluster Table.ORACLE Oracle is a database that is used by 2/3rd of SAP Customers. 9.SAPDB (MAXDB) is the cheapest combination. 17476SQL> select count(*) from SAPSR3. 65611SQL> select count(*) .USER RELATED InfoPSAPSR3DB . Database work process checks whether the table exists.4 Mb.[SAPR3] owner.rtf. test. reliability and transaction LUW. Seibel.. test. ifthe field and table exists. Users OPS$ User to connect to database and get the password of the SAPSR3 User.2.5. Oracle/lib. Delete. Dispatcher keeps the request in queue based on FIFO4.and other small softwares to compete with SAP. R/3 Work process loads all the DB Libraries.ppsDisadvantage of the file system1.8.C:shawnshawnshawn. 140 DATABASE ARCHITECHTUREConnection Mechanism (refer dev_<SID>. mssql/lib. Oracle/bin.These are the reasons for the evolution of DB.xxx 65xxxComponents: BASIS BASIS+ERP 31-Aug-09DATABASEIt is a storage.SYSTEM .0.Component SpecificPSAPSR3700 .2.Note: Committed data can be updated or Redo.5.. DB2 from IBM and SAPDB(MAXDB) from SAPshares the remaining 1/3rd of SAP Customers.Versions Oracle has versions of databaseSAP License is costlier on Oracle than any other combinations.1.9. Sales Order. if table exists then checks for the fields. JDEdwards..2..Data search is faster by using indexes (based on Keys)Eg: As in windows we can create as many folders and subfolders with the same name and the searchcriteria depends on the search string. AMD64. Invoice. strong.Version SpecificPSAPSR3USR .Data is stored in terms of tables (Tables contain rows and columns). consistent.The database contains only 8 tablespaces in 700.For Roll BackSYSAUX . Consider a pan shop Customer . SRM.ERP(ECC6).Cigarette Paper .2. mssql/bin.0. The data does not follow the LUW concept and so it is not consistent and reliable.2. The locks are released and rollback gets invalidated.2. INSERT.Run directory is used to host executables of kernel upto 640 where as OS version (NTI386.6.OLD: The database table spaces are 27 which ends with D(Data) and I(Index). Oracle is provided by Oracle Corporation which owns (PeopleSoft.. The backup management and reorganization is not available.JAVA Specific DBGUI Versions46C46D620640700710Based on Windows and JAVASQL> select username from DBA_USERS.Redo logs are duplexed (Mirror logs and Orig Logs) and ensure that the data is updated in thedatabase. 136We can also store the data in terms of file system like test. db2/lib. MODIFY.test. Modify.3.12.Databases follow RDBMS rules to achieve consistency.From 620The database contains only 6 tablespaces(Physical Location) in 640 owner is SAP<SID>PSAP<SID>PSAP<SID>USRPSAP<SID>RELSYSTEMPSAPROLL(PSAPUNDO)PSAPTEMPSQL> Select tablespace_name from dba_tablespaces.10. It is used to store the data in the hard disk.6C 8. User gets the response that the record is updated. Based on the available processes requests are served based on FIFO.SAP R/3 4.11.sapdocs.Eg. The data is fetched into Database buffers before the response is sent to R/3 work process.7R/3 4. 135PSAPTEMP . Database process keeps a copy of the record in roll back segment PSAPROLL/ PSAPUNDO tablespace to roll back in case of CRASH/ System Failure.2. 139.From Oracle Log for Administration 135. reliable.LUW . 138 01-Sep-09UPDATE COMMAND1. restore and recovery.The difference is because of --19. 138. User request for updating a purchase order/ quotation / Invoice2. table definitions and execution(Cost based optimizer) path are valid. well spoken among customers. db2/bin. test.2.old)1. program logic(Insert.DD02L.BASIS only Non-UnicodeFrom SAPWEBAS 640 unicode is introduced...Tenders (Contractors)(Eg: Purchase Order. The request is received by the dispatcher3.Database: Used to store the data in the organized format and it has to follow RDBMS rules (RelationalDatabase Management System).0. Keeps the request in Queue4.txt.Temp Storage MemoryPSAPSR3 . 21 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .4. then asks for the optimized path to go to the database table and identifythe relevant rows based on keys/ Indexes (Five 5 Seconday Indexes)10.9. Database Users (DDIC and SAP* are SAP Users resides in USR02 Table)SQL> select count(*) from DBA_USERS where owner = SAPSR3.6.7. DELETE]Scenario User requests for weekly status report. R/3 Work process handles the user request by interpreting the screen elements.7ECC6.2.It consists of one or more transactions that are bundled together which can be committed as a groupor rollback without any data loss.8.Accounts bookLog buffers are a small area around 1Mb . Request is handled by dispatcher3.2.0. 9.7 and ECC5. Gets the record to database buffer for modification (No record is modified in the databasedirectly)11. Database process handles the request and checks whether table. 10.Duplication of data is avoided and uniqueness is obtained by using primary andsecondary keys.4Linux . GR(Goods Receipt). Owner is SAPSR3 for ABAP engine and SAPSR3DB isfor JAVA Engine. The update request goes to the database. 136. All the update requests goes to the database and lock the record in the database so that no userupdate it.Purchase Order . 9.slideshare. As the database buffers need to be accessed by user modifications are not performed in DBBuffers instead in log buffers. The committed data is updated into database13..2.0.0 9. Update)6. There are no indexes to search the data.0.14. The response is fetched from buffers if they are accessed earlier7.. owner from DBA_USERS group by owner.LOGIC UNIT OF WORK. If the request is not accessed earlier.4.0 10.Database has its own structure to manage the data using the database specific binaries and libraries.. Eg.DENORMALIZATIONProcess of grouping smaller tables into larger tables for having data comprehensively available foranalysis and reporting BIW. AR (Account Receivables).pdf. test. In order to support SAPCustomers it is mandatory to know the database management. R/3 Work process communicates with database process to get the response.info http://www.ppt.. 139 Oracle is a proven. 137RFQ(Approved) .NORMALIZATIONProcess of splitting up the larger tables into smaller tables using primary keys and secondary keys.1.0. User submits the request. reorganization.IA64) with UC/ NUC is available in version 700.Sales OrderPurchase Req . R/3 Work process keeps a copy in the R/3 Buffer and response is sent to user.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book WAS700. the request is converted into Native SQL statements of therespective database.FI Dept (Approval) . test. 137.xls. Columns are headers and rowsare the data. As the log buffer is small the content is moved in toRedo logs periodically. Microsoft SQL Server from Microsoft.Databases are normalized. In the process of updating it will communicate with enqueue and obtain the lock on the documentso that no other user updates it. R/3 Work process handles the request and update the document into temporary tables (cannotupdate the permanent tables because all the LUWs in the transaction has to be completed)5. The data is not in the organized format.Database provides tools for backup management. robustdatabase to handle any amount of data in Terra bytes.Database RelatedPSAPUNDO . The version management will be difficult and time consuming to get the required/ identify the file. UPDATE.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. GI (Goods Issued) AP (AccountPayables).[SELECT.. DB_Connect to connect to database using client version3.

ORACLE PROCESSESS1. OriglogB.[Logical Reads Physical Reads/ Logical Reads] * 100i. If not it builds the plan based on cost basedoptimizer and update SQL Cache. This cannot be kept for long in thelog buffer as the log buffer size is small.4. It is used to reduce thehits on the database there by reducing the load on the database. Shadow Process 143.. It is defined by theparameter log_buffer generally its size varies between 1MB to 4MB.WP ------> SAPUSER (Table) USERID | PWD OPS$-User | XXXRelogin with the above user and passwordDisconnect from the DB and reconnect using SAPSR3 userid and password to get complete access. LOG WRITER 145. It is defined by a parameter db_block_buffers. Background/ Server ProcessShadow Processes These are used to handle the user requests.The log writer process writes data from the redo log buffers to the redo log files on the disk. User request is handled by the dispatcher.SYSTEM/ SHARED GLOBAL AREA: It is a memory area which resides purely on memory and it is lostwhen the system is stopped. 1432.SQL> show SGALOG BUFFER: It is used to perform the data manipulations by database work process. d) The record is fetched into DB Buffer for allowing selection. It will perform Log Switch. OPS$<SID>ADM is the user who owns the table SAPUSER and contains the SCHEMA OWNERSAPSR3 user and password. Every requestthat needs modification/ update / delete has to be performed only in this area. To ensure the disk consistency log writer writes into Origredolog and Mirrorredolog files (Bothresides on two different physical disks).LOG WRITERMechanism a) R/3 work process submits the request for an update.5. Out of 100 request 6 requests goes to the database. R/3 Work process submits request for an update.10. DB Shadow checks if any SQL Execution plan exists.Refer init<SID>. DB Shadow checks if the requested content exist in DB Buffer if not fetch the content fromdatabase and updates DB Buffer. DB buffers and log buffersSHARED POOLIt is defined by shared_pool_size which is a part of SGA (System Global Area)It contains DBCACHE and LIBCACHE and they are nothing but parsed SQL Statements. It takes a backup of PSAPROLL/ PSAPUNDO to roll back to the original if the update is cancelled orabrupt.e.This is the first place where a record is written to the disk to ensure that committed changes are notlost.4. MirrorlogA. The DB WP waits till the buffer total memorygets utilized and then updates the DB)SYSTEM/ SHARED GLOBAL AREA It is a memory area which resides purely on memory and it is lost when the system is stopped.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.2.. 145Mechanism1. B) from log buffer.8.DB Buffer is used to store the data until its size is full (or) the content gets invalidated by a change orleast recently used. 144. Log writer writes the commit into Redo log files but when the size of Redo log file is fullsize 50MB. Every 3 Seconds3. b) Shadow process handles the update by locking in the database c) It takes a backup of PSAPROLL/ PSAPUNDO to roll back to the original state ifthe update is cancelled or abrupt. These are alsocalled as User processes (In Oracle Terms) The process are established at the rate of 1:1 during the startup of SAP system. Check the content is available in R/3 buffers. WP task handler interpret the user request. 02-Sep-09(Note: If the buffer size is more no updates will happen.The log writer must always be running for an instance.Authorizations.info http://www. In general for an optimized database the ratio should be not less than 94%. Shadow Processes2. 142.5.e. The response is handover to R/3 Work Process. Table and Field definitions and packages.6.1. Each query/ request should pass through this area. They called as shadow processes because they perform the task non-interactively.From ST04 . It takes time to build SGA when system is startedthat is why the system is slow after a restart. bytes/1024/1034 "MB" from V$sgastat where pool. when RedologA is full it is closed for writing and RedologB is opened for writing. R/3 Work process checks if it is eligible for buffering then keeps a copy in R/3 buffers.B) from log buffer.i. R/3 Work process handovers the task to database shadow process (1:1 Ratio between R3WP:DBWP)9.ora fileSYSTEM GLOBAL AREA is the sum of Shared pool. They perform the task assigned by an R/3WP.. When DBWR signals the writing of redo records to disk.LOGWRITE (LGWR) is used to write the committed data into Redo log files (Origlog A.* Log Writer is used to write the committed data into Redolog files (OriglogA. Communicate with Oracle Client to communicate with DB in native language.2. These are initiated by system based on therequirement.SAPSR3 is the Schema/ DB Owner for SAP Database.13.7. It takes time to build SGA when system isstarted that is why the system is slow after a restart. Background Process/ Server ProcessSHADOW PROCESS These are used to handle the user requests.Mirrorlog A. 141OPS$ Mechanism It is a mechanism which is used by operating system users to connect to the database withoutany password. To ensure the disk consistency log writer writes into Origredolog and Mirrorredolog files (Bothresides on two different physical disks). These are calledas User Processes (In Oracle Terms). When the redo log buffer is 1/3rd full or 1MB of committed.LOG SWITCH It is a process of 22 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . SAP restricts the access by using internal security.SGA is lost the complete cache information is lost.This is the first place where a record is written to the disk to ensure that committed changes are notlost. Dispatcher keeps the request in Queue4.Background or Server Processes These are non-interactive to R/3 Processes. The data/ record is modified in Log BufferThis cannot be kept for long in the log buffer as the log buffer size is small.USER Request Flow/ Display1. 144There will be only one process. It will perform log switch. DB Shadow process checks the task contains valid table and field definitions. They perform the task assigned by an R/3 WP. All the work processes uses OPS$<SID>ADM to connect to the database without anypassword. Based on available resources a process is allocated to user requests based on FIFO.SQL>Select table_name from dba_tables where owner = OPS$WILLSYS99NWDADM.BACKGROUND/ SERVER PROCESS These are non-interactive to R/3 Processes.LOG SWITCHIt is a process of switching between RedologA to RedologB and Mirror Logs A to Bi. Response is sent to the user. A copy of the record is taken to log buffer for modification6. When a transaction is committed2.ORACLE PROCESSES1.When the data is committed SYS Change number is generated to ensure the faster commitmechanism log writer (LGWR) writes the commits in to Redolog files but when the Redolog file is full)size 50MB. As the processes are able to access the completedatabase related to schema owner.e. User uses SAP GUI to perform a transaction.. 14214..SQL> select name.They are called as Shadow Processes because they perform the task non-interactively. IF the table/ Fielddefinition does not exists gets a copy from the database and update the DB Cache/ LIB Cache. e) A copy of the record is taken to log buffer for modification f) the data/ record is modified in log buffer.11. SGA is lost the complete cache information is lost.3.Its size is defined by multiplying by 8kb because each block size is 8 kb. These are initiated by system basedon requirement. The record is fetched into DB Buffer for allowing selection.When the data is committed System Change Number is generated to ensure the faster commitmechanism. It should not be too big or toosmall.12.DB BUFFER : Used to store the content that is accessed from the database. Its quality is measured by databasebuffer hit ratio.sapdocs.slideshare.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book 141. Shadow process handles the update by locking in the database3.The writer is activated under the following conditions1. Origlog B.

No new connectionsare allowed but time consuming to stop the database. 151Tablespace is a logical entity which contains related tables/indexes. PSAP<SID>RELEASE PSAPDEV640/ 7003.2.ora)The two parameters DB_NAME and DB_BLOCK_SIZE should never be modified..ora .When Redologs are fullARCH ProcessDuring the log switch OriglogA gets filled for writing and OriglogB is opened for writing. 147It is used to ensure that system is consistent.ora Provide Port and the Host Name.Oracle provides default tablespace "SYSTEM to manage the database". All the updates willbe done from Logbuffers. restricted to theabove operations.download.Consistent4. A copy is made to LOGBuffer for updation. Shutdown ImmediateThe database is shutdown immediately but all the committed transaction are updated in the databaseand opened transactions are rolled back..4. When ever a check point occurs (It writes based on system change number SCN)Note: Every select statement hits the database and brings the data to DB Buffers.. The data is stored in terms ofDatabase block size in terms of Datablocks. PMON isresponsible for cleaning up the database buffer cache and freeing resources that the user process isusing and release the locks. PSAP<SID>USR PSAPDEVUSR4. SYSAUXSYSAUX is a new tablespace available from version 10g.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book switching between Redolog A to Redolog B and Mirror Logs A and Bi. When a transaction is committed2.. (Redolog files) gets filled and needto move to other location. Donot modify the control file manually. Shutdown Immediate 05-Sep-09Shutdown Modes1. 04-Sep09Special Parameterization files (SPFILE)All the changes that are made requires a reboot of Oracle database.htm#21919It updates the headers of all datafiles to record the details of the checkpoint. Datafiles : These files are with extension (. Control Files: These are used to display the structure of the database into Six different locations.sap us used to provide the database backup/ restore (brbackup... The contentsof OriglogA will be written to ORAARCH directory (Provided archieve_log_mode is set to true). allowing us toperform specific maintenance operation.1. Max ExtentsSegment means (table or Index)Group the blocks to ExtentReorganizing .PMON PROCESS MONITORUsed to monitor the process recovery when a user process (Shadow process) fails..It triggers DBWR/ LGWRSMON SYSTEM MONITORUsed to ensure the Oracle database is consistent and reliable.Eg: Req: 150 Next Max Given 200 50 500These table/ Indexes are grouped logically into a tablespace/ Container 151. .Release locks.com/docs/cd/310501_01/server.Used to start the processes if they are stopped.oracle.. 149 a) Perform an export or import of database data.Utilizing the fragmented space.e. OriglogB.The Log writer process writes data from the redolog buffers to the redolog files on the disk.sapdocs.CKPT .ORA 3) INIT<SID>.Provide port and the host nameSqlnet.e. The system monitor process(SMON) performs recovery.We need to explicitly create SP file this SP File cannot be edited manuallyE:ORACLEQASI02ADMINOracle StartupWhen Oracle is started the database available for users.3.DBWR is triggered in the following circumstances[ORACLE RAM] = SGA1. Initial Extents2. Shutdown NormalIt allows the users to complete all the transactions and shut down the database.SQL> select sequence # from V$ARCHIVED_LOG.. If it is not moved.DBWR (Database Writer)The content that needs to be updated is fetched into DB Buffer for selection. if necessary at instance startup.. Redolog files gets filled and does not have space to write the content from log buffer. Network/ AdminListener. It triggers during the system startup andensure that system is started..STORAGEThe database uses file system but organized in the RDBMS concept.ora is used to provide the startup parameters for Oracle.dbf). When DBWR signals the writing of redo records to diskThe log writer must always be running for an instance. When the redolog buffer is 1/3 full or 1MB of committed.Freeing the resources that were used by user processes. 146The Content of OriglogA. 148init<sid>.Tnsnames.3.In case of system crash/ abnormal termination SMON reads the online redologs and redo the changesto database and also reads the PSAPUNDO to roll back the changes.DBF) The location is specified by a parameter control_file.2. Next Extents4. (Which is committed)Not Consistent. End uses cannot perform any tasks.. When the request comes to access the dirty buffer content.4.PMON periodically checks the status of dispatcher and server processes and restarts any that havestopped. In order to change certainparameters SPFILE is maintained. all the committed data is updated 150.dba is used to provide authorization to SAPDBA/ BRTOOLS..brrestore) control parameters.slideshare.Tablespace is pointed to physical datafiles. It reads the init parameters in the followingsequence. Itis the most important file (Cntrl<SID>. PSAP<SCHEMAID> PSAPDEV2. Each block size is 8KB(8192 Bytes)Block size is determined by parameter DB_BLOCK_SIZE (refer inti<sid>. 03-Sep-09 146. Minimum Extents3.Used to monitor the process (PMON). b) Perform a data load (With SQL * Loader) c) Temporarily prevent typical users from using data d) During certain migration and upgrade operations e) Used during patch applications the database is opened but not allowed i. 23 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .. MirrorlogB . brconnect. SAP provides the othertablespaces that starts with naming convention PSAP1. Startup Mount: We can start a DB and mount a database without opening it. PSAPTEMP Temporary Table Space5. Initialization Files:init<sid>. When Redolog A is full it is closed for writing and Redolog B is opened for writing.a) Change the archive log mode status3.ORA 4) INIT. Shutdown Transactional. so.SMON ensures that the database is consistent (REDO/ UNDO)All the users who are working on the system gets terminated abruptly and the intermediate data islost. Startup Restrict: 149. Startup Nomount : This phase is used to create control files and database.Check Point 147.When log buffer cannot write the content then log buffer gets filled and subsequently the updatemechanism gets halted. PSAPROLL/ PSAPUNDO UNDO Table Space6. the system modifies by itself when ever there are any changes.Consistent. 148. Similarly RedologB. These are used to store the data in the Oraclespecific RDBMS format.. No new connections are allowed.There will be only one process.2.The database does not allow any new connections.ORA 2) SPFILE.The Writer is activated under the following conditions1.info http://www. Startup Open: When DB is started using startup cmd.CommandsStartup openStartup mountStartup no mount.. brarchive. MirrorlogA. Once the content is updated in Log Buffer it marks the content in Database Bufferas Dirty buffers and not eligible for selection.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.920 /a96524/C09procs. No datafiles aremounted.Init<sid>.4. Every 3 Seconds3. 1) SPFILE<SID>.EXTENTSThese are used to allocate space to a table/ segment to control the growth1. Thecontents are written by ARCH from RedologA to ORAARCH and RedologA is ready to be written byLOGWR.Data files are physical files on the file system where data is stored in Datablocks. Shutdown AbortThe database is forcibly shuts down and may not be consistent and requires recovery during startup. no new transactions areallowed..Oracle contains 3 Modes (4 Including Restrict)1.These are located in Oracle_home/ database(windows)DBS on UNIX.ORAOracle Shutdown1..2.ora . 150In the database and opened transactions are only allowed to complete..PHYSICAL FILE SYSTEM1. the redo log files needs to write to an alternative location immediately oncethey get filled.

Itcollase the space that is left in all the extents before allocating an extent. 155In this path 16 datafiles are there if we increase the tablespace size one more data file is createdcalled sr3700_17SQL> select tablespace_name.System Administrative user but cannot be used to create modify the DBSAPSR3 Perform backup.Select username from dba_users. It is updated periodically (Weekly). Optimizer is used tocollect the statistics for the tables whose statistics are outdated. Select * from dba_tables where table_name like dba%. 157> brconnect -u system -p <pwd> -f checkbrconnect -f statsUsed to run the database statistics. Max along with thePercentage of Increase.It is calculated based on readsLogical Reads : The number of reads that are made to Database buffer.SAP Tables are stored in DD02LUsers are used to login to the database with various privileges..sap ---------. Select the database buffer hit ratio. So that all the tables and Indexes where thereare stored will be known to DB Optimizer.The complete or absolute owner of oracle database server to perform the activities. DB backup is performed successfully or not2.Similarly PSAPROLL should be migrated to PSAPUNDO before upgrade. it is used to check the database and writes the logs into sapcheck directory. It is theonly log which can gives us the complete history of database activities.For Eg. (Alternatively we canadd using SQL Command)SQL>Alter tablespace (Tablespace Name/ PSAP<SID>) add datafile location and size. critical objects based on Table spaces. Next.SAPSR3DBDATABASE MONITORINGAs a part of the routine SAP basis checks the following database tasks can also included. System 8192 -. We need to run the DB optimizer once a week. CAP is Max.Check conditions are described in transaction DB17 which in turn stores the details in DBMSGORAOpen Command Prompt > brconnect -f check 157.Users encounters an error ORA-1631 and ORA-1632 Max Extents Reached.1 (For which tablespace we need to increase the size of datafile)PSAPSR3700 .Select * from dba_users. This tablespace is pointing to two datafiles ofsize 4GB each. Update stats.If the ratio is reduced we can conclude that DB_BLOCK_BUFFERS size is not sufficient or there arefrequent updates on the system.If we consider 2 Months duration the graph will be like this 154. we need tocheck if there are any missing indexes and recreate them if required in DB02/SE.Option 7 for additional space function.We need to check the abnormal growth of the database. 152Use BRTOOLS (Backup Recovery Tool) to resize the datafile (or) add a datafile. BRCONNECTIt is used to connect to the database and performs various administrative tasks.-.For each table we can create 1 Primary Index and 4 Secondary Indexes these are predefined becauseof the huge table growth indexes are missed.e.Login as SIDADM on windows or ORASID on UNIX. clear old log files.These tables are assigned to a tablespace PSAP<SID>.Open itChange the parameter valuesBackup_type = disk 07-Sep-09BRTOOLSThese tools are used to manage or monitor the oracle database which are specifically provided bySAP.Use BRTOOLS or SE14 to increase the Extents. it uses next extents.. Login to SAP system and logthe database growth on daily basis. 153.SAP Provides all the indexes (Predefined one(Primary Index) + Four (Secondary Index).1. recovery. Offline to Oraarch are scheduled periodically and running fine.DB13 .. Init.Objects which are missing are displayed in Red.Option 1 show tablespacesContinue 3 times to display the list of table spaces and their growth. segment_space_management from dba_tablespace.EXTENT MANAGEMENTWhen a table or Index is created they are assigned with Min Extent.The buffer hit ratio should not be less than 94% .DMTS .Hit Ratio = ((Logical Reads . How ever when these jobs are scheduledBRCONNECT runs in the background..sapIt resides in Oracle_Homedatabase (Windows)In UNIX DBS directoryIt controls the runtime behavior of BRTOOLS.Tables and Indexes MonitorSQL> Select tablespace_name.User encountered an error ORA-1653/ ORA-1654 tablespace over flown and the user could notupdate/ create any more POsThe user could not update the data because the datafiles are filled (or) there is no enough space toallocate for extents. restore etc.info http://www. It identifies the tables whose statistics are outdated and updatesthem. Friend comes to India from America after 5 years)Cleaning up OLD log filesbrconnect -f cleanupIt is used to clean the old log files from saptrace and sapcheck directorybrconnect -f nextIt is used to adopt the next extents (i. blocksize from dba_tablespaces.slideshare.Locally Managed Table SpacesDefault table spaces from 10g which manage the extents locally instead of dictionary management.Physical Reads: The number of reads that are made to Physical Database. The free space in theexisting extents is not used there by Fragmentation.. block_size from dba_tablespace.adapt extents)3.2.(Eg. 156Physical reads are increasing conclude that the database hits are more. 154DB02 is used to monitor the disk space.SCHEDULE DB BACKUPInit<SID>. Next extents can be increased automatically)These jobs can be scheduled using DBCALENDER (DB13).Resolution 152.BRTOOLS contains the following Options1.Recreate them.Tablespace Particular (DBA Planning Calendar)DB12 . Archive directory is having space4.BRTOOLS BACKUP RESTORE RECOVERY TOOLThese tools are provided by SAP for Oracle Database.Running update statistics improves the performance of the system. DB Housekeeping Jobs are running successfully or not (DB Check. transaction ST04 .Add the datafile or resize datafile before its gets an error message "Tablespace overflow"MISSING INDEXESIdentify the missing indexes in DB02 (which will reduce the performance without proper indexes)Goto DB02 > Diagnostics > Missing Tables and IndexCheck the objects that are missing. SAP recommends to migrate all the dictionarymanaged tablespaces to locally managed before 10g upgrade (Oracle). Select * from dba_users.Enter choice . When ever a backup is triggered BRBackup is initialized.Press EnterE:oracleSIDsapdata3sr3700_16 155. but there is a tablespace.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book Each Tablespace can have one or more datafiles to storethe table data/ Index data. 06-Sep-09SQL> select * from dba_tablespace. Monitor the size of the database to have a detailed capacity planning.f check . It requires database Reorganization.DB13We need to check1. 153ops$willsys99saservicesr3ops$willsys99saservice<SID>ops$willsys99<sid>admsys .Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.Inform the inventory department to order more disks if there is really a DB growth.Have a storage of 1 TB = 1024 GBAt the current growth rate of the database can use the storage up to 30 days approximately.BRTOOLS reads the parameters from init<SID>.Overview for a DatabaseIdentify the tablespaces which are grown more than 90% and add datafiles.command BRTOOLSType option 2 for Space management.Eg: Users are creating purchase orders extensively into the tables EKPO.Dictionary Managed TablespacesWhen ever a table is growing it increase it extents i. Size in GB1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10200 210 220 230 230 230 250 280 300 350ConclusionThe database is growing at an average of 15GB per/ day. EKKO and other child tables.Note: Each datafile is assigned to only one tablespace.-.--SQL> select tablespace_name.Segment is nothing but a table or index.BRCONNECT .sapdocs.Note: Oracle writes all startup logs into alrt<SID>.There are various types of 24 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .e. It reduces thefragmentation there by reorganization is not required.log which resides in SAPTRACE directory. select them and create in the database.BR-BACKUPBR Backup is used to take backup of the database (Datafiles).Physical Reads)/ Logical Reads) * 100 156.

. Make the BTC Processes to 0. 163. from ORAARCH directory to tape ordisk.Recover Database from Redolog Backup.e(Offline redologs) the content of oraarch is referred as offline redo logs.Specify the export location for Import. AL11(All the SAP Directories).Extend the tablespace by adding datafile or resizing datafile. POST STEPSPre stepsPre Steps on the Target system. mostly create and drop are not used). Oracle DLL Compatibility issues (Patch Oracle)9. 162Let us say there are three systems DEV.2. DB. OriglogB. Oracle listener..info http://www. Tnsnames port issues8. Online Backup3..sapdocs. It isconsistent and reliable...Reorganisation (Create. It is consistent and reliable withredo logs that are generating during backup. Start the system and restore the target dependenciesPre-Steps for DB Refresh1.Similarly we need to apply patches.So the Oraarch content needs to be moved to alternative location on hourly. ORA-272)4. B5. Partial Backup It is taken for a specific table during a patch (Especially HR Patches)Backup type is defined by a parameterBackup_mode = allBackup_type = offlineBackup_dev_type = Tape or DiskBackup_root_dir = H:oracleSIDsapbackupAll the above backups are performed by using brbackup.Tablespace management (Create drop alter. bi-hourly for every 4hours or daily depending upon the frequency of updates.Start and stop the database.Use Additional Tasks. MirrorlogA.3. Printers.e. Delete the entire SAPDATA files.If it is offline backup the foldernames offline b. Partial Backup1.e.3.3. QAS etc. QAS and PRD existing in the landscape. RZ70 (Inorder to populate the backend system details to SLD).SMLG. BRBackup.It will generate the Cntrl File under usertrace directory. dbcheck.Online Backup: It is consistent always with redo logs. DB RefreshIt is the process of refreshing the data of one system by another system data.Reads content from Log Buffer. SPAM. RFCDES and TBDLSAnd then we need to release the Transport of Copies. Offline Backup (Cold Backup) The database is down during backup and no transaction is allowed as it is down. Log writer writes to OrigLogA and OrigLog B. Tablespace over flow (ORA-1653.DB REFRESH1.sql extension..DATABASE REFRESH 162.Process1.Catalog (SUNDAY . add-ons in the landscape. 1654)2.i.Restore Database .. change schema password etc. And thenWe need to delete all the datafiles related to QAS system.Copy the cofiles & datafiles in usrsapsidtrans 163.3.5. adapt next extents).run brconnect -f stats7. so that no background job is triggered6.Whole Offline Backup: The backup taken fully and a catalog is opened to start the incrementalbackup. Incremental Backup4. Source System2. The objects whichare developed in DEV needs to be transported to QAS and PRD the objects behave differently in DEV. RFC Connections. Heterogeneous CopyWhen ever there is a change in OS or DB then it is said to be heterogeneous. To change the hardware.Full Online Backup: It is complete database backup with out any catalogs.4. SM37.4.Whole Online Backup: The backup is taken fully and a catalog is opened to start the onlineincremental backup. 1632)3. Incremental Backup It is initiated from level0 backup and used when the database size is too big. To move out from one OS to another or One DB to another DB which is called as OS/ DB Migrationwhich needs to be carried under the guidance of Certified consultant..Eg.specify the password if <sid>adm .1. restore from old backup5. Kernel Upgrade to test the objects with Production data.QAS and PRD. It can beonline or offline. now we need to deploy QAS asa copy of PRD)2. Se we need to delete thesource dependencies and restore the target dependencies.If Oraarch is full the archive gets stuck and the complete update mechanism stuck and usersencounter congestion.Full Offline Backup: It is a complete database backup without any Catalog. Rebuild.from database backup. First we need to stop theoracle services the structure should remain same. NWDA30. System Copy is performed using export and import of the database. BRRecover with various options. Kernel . 08-Sep-09BRTOOLSIt uses BRConnect. Use Installation Master DVD.THE REASONS FOR SYSTEM COPYUnicode Migration or Code Page Conversion1. stats out dated . Datablock corruption (ORA-1578). DB13.STEPS for SYSTEM COPY1.We can do the following with BRTools.Redolog Backup.SYSTEM COPY/ HOMOGENEOUS COPY/ HETEROGENEOUS COPY.While copying Oracle provides various means of log save because we dont want the corruption oflogs.sap) 159. System Copy/ Homogeneous Copy 161. Mirror Log A.n.Database standard house keeping jobs (DBStatistics. BRRestore. Batch Jobs..Take the screen shots of SM59. So we will take a copy in QAS and apply before PRD.. Create the transport of copies by using SE01 and specify the following objects/ tables USR01. MirrorLogB-When online redo logs are full then Arch writes contents to Oraarch i.Display profiles. The report is good in DEV and QAS but bad in PRD thatmeans quality checks are failed.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.. MirrorLogA. Missing end backup while performing a backup6. 160The data transfer from Oraarch to disk is done by BRArchive.BR ARCHIVE (initSID. Take a copy of them using transport requests.(OS. PRE STEPS2..System Copy. 161It is used to setup a system similar to a PRD.. WE20 (IDOCS). 158Eg: A database is of 2000 GB Which is not possible to take a daily full offline backup with a backupspeed of 150GB/ Hour. DB REFRESH3. Roles etc. Generate the control file from source system.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book backups1.RZ04 (Operation Modes) SCC4. 159It is used to backup the offline redolog file to tape or disk i.afd 08-Sep-09BRTOOLS ERRORS1.. OriglogA. RZ12 (RFC SERVER GROUPS)...Database backup. To setup a new system in the landscape (Only DEV and PRD exists.. cleanup logs. PRD DB Size 1TB 2TB..Eg...Copy the cntrl file to quality system and rename it as with .Log writer logs into OriglogA. A Small report which fetches monthly sales executes 1 Sec in DEV and in QAS where as in PRD it isconsuming 30Min. Mirror Log B. data2 etc. USR02. B. after refresh. Archive Stuck (ORA-255. sapdata.specify typical .specify Profile directory e:usrsapsidsysprofile .Directories like sapdata1.So we need to copy the PRD (DATA files) system to QAS system from time to time to get properquality done. Online BackupThe DB is up and running with out effecting the user transactions. Indexes Export and Import tables).e. 160. the system is completely build from OS.When OrigLog A is full it is moved to OrigLog B When OraArch is full it is backed up to a tape or disk.Archive_function = SAVE/ COPY/ DELETEArchive_copy_dir = H:OracleNWDTape_size= 100GVolume_archive=NWDA01. After Refresh the target system QAS behaves like production System. data1.afd online b.. We dont want any issues thatcrops up on the production system. Offline Backup2.Review the inputs and continue the import. Max Extents reached (ORA-1631.4.The rest will be taken)2.4.slideshare. It is required to keep the dependencies of the target system torestore them later i. Database and R3 without changing OS or DB. First ActivityAfter taking the backup of PRD server we need to generate control file. R3) remains the same but only database is refreshed. Users.Archive function means the saving mechanism of log files.License. screen shots etc.Source System select database instance export .. Max datafiles are 250 in SAP. 158. 25 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .> Alter database backup controlfile to Trace. Restore the database from Tape or Disk.Each datafile size is 1% of the Whole database (100-200) 2 GB 200-400 4GB. BD54. While applying patches.2. Create Control file with new database structure of QAS5.

Sizing3. Perform Sizing www.10. start_DVEBMGS00_<HOSTNAME>.2. datafile missing.gets for SAPOSCOLL serviceTrans . 1672.6.It is a common transport directory where the changes of development are stored as transportrequests. Users: Two users are created <SID>ADM SAPSERVICE<SID><SID>ADM is used to start the SAP system and Administration of SAPSAPSERVICE<SID> is a service user used to run the services.Intel ItaniumX64 . Oracle is corrupted or Disk corrupted.) Configure Local SLDIF Local SLD then Object Server Name [Hostname]Parameter SummaryIf required change the MirrorLogA and OrigLogA.Open Terminal . No of users/ Load on the system3.sapdocs.com/Instguide2. Make sure that Installation Ports 21212.sap. 165 10-Sep-09TADIR . 1661.) TypicalPrompts to logoff to get some privilegesLogin as AdministratorSelect the Usage Types AS ABAP AS JAVA BI JAVA DI EPCORE EP MI 168. MMC passwords are required to start SAP in newer versionscmd> startsap name=DEV nr=00 SAPDIAHOST=HOME----------------------------------------------------------OS = SIDADM SAPSERVICE<SID>ST06 . No Solman Key2. Download the Software from www.All the developments are hosted. OPS$ issues related to authentication while logging11.Type groupDomain. Download the Installation Guide www. Entry in etcservicesPORTSDispatcher Port : 3200 to 3299Message server Port : 3600 to 3699Gateway Port : 3300 to 3399Secured Dispatcher Port : 4700 to 4799Secured Gateway : 4800 to 48996.sap.Verify from My Comp> Manage > Users and Groups 169.service. usrsaptrans is created to host the transports. www.Intel PentiumIA64 .EPS (Electronic Parcel Service) .cmd this command starts the database and writesthe log files to stderr1. All the entries are stored in control. SAPSR3DB) ORA<SID> is the owner of the database in UNIX 170.AMD64AIX_64. saptrace.SAP<SID>_INSTANCENO used to start the SAP system. 170 <SID>ADM is the owner(Administrative Privileges) of the database in WindowsStarting up of SAP System1. stopsap)9. Set the Environment Variables JAVA_HOME PATH6.6C r3setup is used to install SAP. Database backup not successful due to space issues.com/instguide2.0.Recreate control fileNote: All Oracle errors refer to Oracle/ SAP (ORA-XXXX)16. When engine is started it reads the startup profile which is located in usrsapsidsysprofilestart_DVEBMGS00_<hostname>. sapreorg andredolog files (OriglogA. Central instance and database are installed separately (Central system is introduced withcombination of CI and DBI)---------------------------------------NTI386 .exeInstallation InputsSapinst.pfl3..exe)Installation Checks1.pfl Installation Questions1.13. runtime parameters of SAP System.pflStartup Profile consists ofa) Starting the database using command strdbs.7.exe (Oracle Universal Installer) (.10. If buffer hit ration below 94% (Increase block buffer size) 164. Install Patch OUI. On Windows MMC(Gui based) is created to start and stop the SAP SystemTo start and stop the SAP System8. provides EPSin for patching the system.sap.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book International hardware errors ORA-600 (Refer to SAP and Oracle)10. Difference between earlier and Current Versions4.slideshare. Install ORACEL 10g 10. No interactive / colorful screens8.exe from InstMaster FolderSAP Netweaver 2004s Support Release2 > SAP Systems > Oracle > Central System AdministrationSelect (. sapinst is introduced from 4. Connection issues between R/3 WP: Oracle Shadow with error ORA-1256012.service. Space issues. tape issues15. UC/ NUC Exports are OS/ DB Dependent8. 168 PIBrowse for Java ComponentsBrowse for JCE Policy (JAVA Cryptographic Encryption)Prompts for SID and the Installation Drive [E:]Prompts for Master PasswordPrompts for DBSID and Database HostPrompts for Installation Exports path (Actual Content lies in Exports) Exports varies from Component to ComponentPrompts for Kernel and Oracle Client pathsSystem Landscape Directory (. Kernel depends on O/S 32-64. Installation Checks5. sapcheck.Data dictionary is like a part of repository only. On UNIX startup scripts are created on <SID>ADM in Home Directory (startsap. Installation Pre-Requisites 167.9.) Install Database Software Only8. On UNIX login as <SID>ADM . Profiles are created in usrsapSIDsysprofilesWhich governs the startup parameters. Kernel executables are extracted into usrsapSIDsysexe directoryUsed to start and manage the runtime of the SAP System. Download the software www.service.com/sizing4. Database. Install JAVA j2sdk_1_4_2_125. Up to 4. Pre requisite checker3.xml and installation progress is stored in keydb.Stores all the repository objectsRepository consists of your ABAP objects like programs.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. MirrorlogB)Database specific file system.service. function modules. Groups: Following groups are created to work on Oracle Database and R/3 Executables. <SID>_DVEBMGS00_<HOSTNAME>. SAPDBA is replaced by BRTOOLS in newer versions11.----------------------------------------------------------PROFILE MANAGEMENTUsrsapSIDsysprofileThere are three 3 profiles which are available by default1.9. SAPDATA1 is created with datafiles saparch. Kernel used to reside in RUN directory and in current versions in sysexeUCNTI3866. ORA_<SID>_DBA ORA_<SID>_OPER SAP_<SID>_GLOBALADMIN SAP_<SID>_LOCALADMIN SAP_LOCALADMIN3.From SE11these are database objectsDatabase tablesviewsdatatypeLock objectsSearchhelp.7e onwards they are reduced to 6 Tablespaces. Oracle shared memory not available issue with SGA17..service. SAPSR3. ABAP data dictionaryconsists of tables. Installation Inputs3.com/swdc4.7 version. Download the Installation Guide from the Market Place. No screen to review the inputs and change them if required. Default2. oraarch.com/swdc 32 Bit means I386 cmd> memsize/ memlimit5.Note:Instance No 00: Port No: 3200Database sap* : 06071992O/S Users ddic : 19920706R/3DIFFERENCES BETWEEN EARLIER VERSIONS OF SAP AND CURRENT NETWEAVERINSTALLATION 166. OriglogB.IBM---------------------------------------5.sap..7. Passwords are default and OS/SB passwords need to be provided in the input screen4. Starting of SAP System. Work directory is created in usrsapSIDDVEBMGS00work used to host the trace files(Logs)which are generated during SAP system startup.2.sap. An installation directory sapinst_dir is created which host the log files of the installationNote: SMSY > System Landscape > Other object > create sap* : 06071992 ddic : 19920706 165.Startsap (Scripts)3. Tablespaces are 27 up to 4. Missing Indexes in DB0214. Set the Virtual Memory7.5..~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~Install SAPGUI (Setupall.2 Execute OUI. 169SAPOSCOL is an operating system collector ensure that sufficient resources are available to start SAPsystem. On Windows use SAPMMC/ Startsap to start the SAP System2.log which is in the work 26 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .xml If theinstallation is aborted/ cancelled then the above two files will help us to start from the point where itstopped earlier.info http://www. Oracle database uses (ORASID on UNIX other users like OPS$ Users. External disk not available. Control file missing . MirrorlogA. 21213 are not used7.6c from 4.Installation Pre-Requisites1. B to different directoriesRequires SOLMAN Key from Solman System [SMSY]Task Progress. domains etc. 164 09-Sep-09IMPLEMENTATIONInstallation of SAP System1.4.

System TraceSECR . It is translated to Private IP or Routed to PVTIP.logAll the log files resides in Work Directory. memory. Target system System -> Import with Unicode Kernel. dev_wn-1 11-Sep-09192/ 172/ 10Global IP Address (ARPANET)If we assign other than this the system are considered to be public. 174. cmd> lsnrctl 14-Sep-09 172. 171NAT .0. database startupstatuses etc..Source system .Its an Agent . BI7. 176.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.Manufact uring -.ABAP EditorThere are various BASIS platforms for R/3APO (Advanced Planner and Optimizer).pfl Such as number of work processes. the characters are stored in more than one byte.this platform is going to be a common platform for all the SAP Applications even the ICM isintroduced in SAPWEBAS and its still require ITS to process the web request.V9start. The work process is unable to connect to the database. The Dispatcher in the Application server handles the request and process it. If the database is not started then start the database and look into the log files alert<SID>.Sub Module of SRMAll these applications are robust. 2. 177.Sub Module of SCMBIW (Business Intelligence Warehouse).Product Availability Matrix32 Bit . stable..ITS consists of two gates (WEB Gate and APPLICATION Gate)Process Flow: 1.export NUC3. auditing and development. code page conversion.Refer TCPDP table and I18NNON-UNICODE: It is similar to single code page and supports only the like mindedlanguages.Check the connectivity. 174SU01 . and for this SAP Implemented a component called ITS(Internet Transaction Server) separate tool windows specific. 177Time ConsumingNot an Integrated ServiceIt depends on IIS (Internet Information Server) to host the pagesNon BusinessUser input -> Queue -> Assign a Counter -> Screen -> Withdrawal -> Insert.Extended Binary Code.e.log. SAP Stopped supporting blended (Multi) code pages i.0.LANGUAGE ***************************SINGLE CODE PAGE: The database is installed on a code page like 1100 which can support thelike minded languages around 10 (En. We need to buy public IP addresses from ISPs.Retail Applicati on Server . they are available externally by using Public IP. Ensure that the version is Unicode enabled like ECC6.log if it is not started it writes the log into stderr. It is accessed by the tcode: 27 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .System copy . dev_w1. tracing. When the process are started they read properties from Instance ProfileSID_DVEBMGS00_HOSTNAME.Allocates Processes Accelerates the requests INSTANCE .4.ITS installed on a separate machine or Application server to handle the web requests.NUC to Unicode. listener hostnames. IIS (Microsoft internet informationservice)SAPWAS: SAP WEB APPLICATION SERVER which is capable of providing internetIncluding ICM 6. listener ports.Additional Life Cycle.. 4. SAP introduced IITSwhich is integrated in WEBAS640.e. DB_Connect Issues.. . System not started?1.cmd .Physical Memory (RAM)The Internet communication Manager ICMON started by using icom. 175 . Agate converts web request into Dynpro specific requests so that theycan be handled by Diag Protocol... due to this reason we need multicode page (MDMP .exe and writes the log into workdirectory dev_ms.136. 172 07-Jul-09BASIS Recently SAP -. Update or delete.Audit Information SystemSE38 . From SAPWEBAS 640 SAP provides only two versions (Non-Unicode andUnicode). .Multi Display MultipleLanguage) on the same system.info http://www. MDMP has various disadvantages during upgrade i. German.PAM . SMLT Languages like Chinese..TASKS .e. no additional Web server isrequired as.logwhich resides in saptrace background directoryOracleSIDsaptracebackgroundIdentify for Oracle errors that start with "ORA"Example 1033 . (NON UNICODE to UNICODE)Process: UNICODE Migration1.Instead of ITS SAP included WEBAS 640 and included ICM service within the Application Server.Q.Allocates upto 4 GBVirtual Memory (Hard Disk) . listener status.146 171. 175.Supports .Note: We need to perform certain pre post steps. ****************************ITS: Internet Transaction ServerIn order to provide the web functionality to all SAP components ITS (Internet Transaction Server) isintroduced by SAP.. The IP addresses from 192/ 172/ 10are private IP Addresses which can be used internally in the companies. (ICMInternet Communication Manager) which is called IITS (Integrated Internet Server) Tcode:SITSPMON 178. 176Diag is a protocol that is used to handle the request coming from SAPGUI on port 3200 Series 3200+ Instance Number3. Check the database is up and running byStart > run > sqlplus "as sysdba"2.. and CRM2005 etc.0 Migration . and consistent which are built on ABAP language.Network Address TranslationAll the servers are managed with Private IP but .6c (Kernel Version 4.EPSIBIC .slideshare. Response is forwarded to Agate.dev_w2 ..0. 178IE -> [ICM + IITS] WEBASIntroduction of WEBASUntil versions R/3 4...exeAll the startup logs are stored in Work directory. Analysis.Monitoring (CCMS) Computing Center Management SystemSM20 . Monitoring. Refer UCMIGR. 173with Database with the Native SQL .consists of a entry . MDMP and introduced UNICODEto support all the languages i.6c to ECC6. BIW 3. Upgrade .HTML or . In future there is possibility foraddress conflict..Note: As the Kernel is going to be changed during migration the whole database needs to be deleted.It provides a platform for User Management. 5. Korean. Thai. listener. Use SAP Installation Master DVD .ABAPBASIS into a common supply chain/ PlatformBWThe integrated ITS uses the common HTTP mechanism as in SAP Web AS.sapdocs.. . 08-Jul-09BASIS . in the case of the standalone ITS.2GB64 Bit .e.Security AuditST03 .2.0 arethe last basis components)SAP Introduced ICM (Internet Communication Manager) and named the platform as SAPWEBAS 6..sql(From here we can find whether the database is up or not)b) Starts the Message server using executable msg_server.6D) ITS provided the web functionality (APO 3.CSS(Cascading Style Sheets). The web requests are received by Wgate which are in the form of .Whenever a request comes from Internet to a public IP.DispatcherAs the load goes on increases we will go with adding a Dialogue InstanceAccessing the BASIS repository over the web.Communicates 173. buffers etc and writes the logs into dev_w0.EBP (Enterprise Buyer Professional) etc.65.User ManagementSM21 ..202.It provides the runtime environment for all SAP Components. When there are no plans to expand the business globally this is the bestoption. Dutch.0 (Service) will handle the user request.4. reliable.) but each additional languages should beimported. It is also called as Trace directory or Developertraces.logc) Starts the Dispatcher using executable disp+work and write the log file into workdev_disp and stderr.Unicode consumes 40% of additional resources than NUC.. and Japanese cannot be accessed using theabove code page. In the earlierscenarios APPS Dispatcher used to handle the user request but in web scenario the HTTP requests arehandled by ITS.Work Load MonitorST01 . Administration.Administration (System Logs)RZ20 .net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book directorystrdbs. In future we can perform a UNICODE Migration.performance. These requests are forwarded to Agate. i.

MI (Mobile Infra).3397 .0CRM 4. MDM7. 184 4700 .SSL (Https) ref: help. BI.Data ConsistencyTry to populate the data from one repository to different servers MDM5. 180KM .Usage Types: Provides certain functionality to the business components. JCE Policy (Java Cryprography .Where the content is fetched either from BI.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. Work List.59916 50008 . WEBEX.Both ABAP + JAVA requiredBIJAVA . quality assurance and re-usepurposes which 28 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . Usage types are selectedduring the installation.Content ManagementTREX Engine . For documentary. XI. Dialogue Process . Provide the path for Software dump (Kernel.Knowledge ManagementCM .Netweaver Installation:1.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book SITSPMONBIW 3.Dispatcher security port 3300 . DevelopmentInfrastructure.ABAP Message Server 3900 ..Enterprise Resource PlanningECC .0SRM 4.The respective database (DB2. Knowledge Management. and SRM)Netweaver Components: ABAP. BI.Information IntegrationP .01 (EHP1).Java Components. dynamic. BTC Message.Dispatcher-JAVA is used to handle the requests and process them to server processes.JAVAMOBILE . BW.JAVA. 185 Upgrade 640-700-710Installation of Instances: It is an integrated installation which consists of 1. 181MDM .Mandatory for PI.ForegroundABAP Instance: Central Instance DVEBMGS (Dialogue.Subsequently SAPWEBAS 700 and 710 are released 09-Jul-09WEBAS ABAP could not provideColorful. SAPWEBAS JAVA 640. chat. as and when requiredThe 4 Layers PI. Logos etc.People IntegrationI . SQL.59904 . BI. JAVA 10-Jul-09Netweaver alone cannot bring business it should be coupled with one of the SAP Businesscomponent like ERP.Master Data ManagementERP .slideshare.0Netweaver Components accelerates the business components.Exports. 182. 180.. Rooms.ABAP Mandatory for all the components except for EPJAVA . JAVA. SR3 or Netweaver 07 all the above content provided on one singleDVD. It provides runtime executables/ libraries that are required for SAP Engine(SAPWEBAS)The Installation master provides an option to install all the Netweaver components together with SAPapplication component (ERP. MaxDB)After installation the entire content resides in the database only.which is used to provide secure communication overthe web. EP. SR3From Netweaver 04 S.SAPWEBAS 640. 182Netweaver is introduced along with SAPWEBAS 640 but most of the components as add-on.. 7. MaxDB. (sapinst. Mobile.Dispatcher port 184.MDM: Master Data Management . EPCOREEP CORE -EP . gateway & Update)Database Instance: Database ProcessesJAVA Instance: Consists of Dispatcher & Server processesDispatcher-ABAP is used to handle the requests and process them based on FIFODispatcher allocates the requests to work process (Dialogue) for interactive communication. SR2. 7.Supplier Relationship ManagementCRM . XI.0SCM 4. SQL.3697 . JAVA &Mobile Integration. XI. CRM.Process IntegrationA .)4.JAVA Message Server 3200 . BI-JavaPI .5.JAVA instance port if instance number is 00Say for eg if the instance number is 25 then50000 (100 + 25) = 5250004 is for Administration port : 52504Say for eg 99 .0Are the SAP components that are installed on a common platform SAPWEBAS 640. 179.5ECC 5. 4.Telnet Port 50026 .JCE Policy (Java Cryptography Extension)./sapinst on UNIX)3. Master password for the users OS : <SID>adm : SAPService<SID> DB : ORA: Sys. SCM etc. Exports.0XI 3.Secured gateway port 50000 .ABAP.(OLTP) and (OLAP)XI .17. 186 187.12.Instance Number)Eg: https://201.also called Netweaver 04 S.info http://www.04 (EHP4) 185.ERP and BI cannot put together in a single box.Customer Relationship ManagementNETWEAVER .comStarting ABAP Engine: Windows: MMC (Microsoft Mgmt Console) UNIX : startsap Startsap all : (Includes the Dialogue Instance) Startsap r3Stopping ABAP Engine: Windows: MMC (Microsoft Mgmt Console) UNIX : stopsapStarting JAVA Engine: Same as starting ABAP EngineStarting Integrated Engine (ABAP + JAVA): ABAP dispatcher starts the JAVA instance provided the parameter rdisp/start_j2ee is set to true or use SMICM to start manually. BI.Text retrieval and classification engine searches the information and bring out fromTerra Bytes of data. CM (ContentManagement). ABAP.Usage types are ABAP.PI . 187 11-Jul-09A Business Configuration Set is a set of Customizing settings which are grouped according tological.Enterprise Central ComponentSCM .Notes (Patch) : This does the small correctionsSupport Package : Group of patchesSupport Stacks : Group of Support Packages (ABAP. PI.3999 . KM (Knowledge Management). SCM they getsinstalled on ABAP platform which is a part of Netweaver. PI. Provide the following inputs 1.sapdocs. CRM.Kernel resides at OS level.Note: ipcclean in UNIX pagefile.6. JAVA. Select the respective Sapinst. Database InstanceCentral Services instances are provided in JAVA Engine which consists of JAVA Message Server andEnque Server to provide load balancing to the web users and central locking for all the JAVAinstances. DDIC R/3 DB Owners : SAP<SID> upto WAS640 : SAPSR3 for ABAP on WAS700 : SAPSR3DB fro JAVA on WAS700MSS : <SID>Select username from DBA_USERS. Instance Number (00 to 97) 3. SCM.exe for windows and . EPCORE.PIPAP . Central Services Instance 2. Gateway and Spool)Dialogue Instance: Except Message and Enque (Dia. Ports 3600 . Use Installation Master2. 179Consider an Example -XI . System..4897 .e.3297 . CRM. PI. MSS (Microsoft SQL Server): <SID> OS (UNIX) : ORA<SID>R/3 Specific application users : SAP*.sys in windows is used to clear the pages Resource at the disk level is a Semaphore.The software that is required is Installation Master. Spool. 186. Portal Content. EP.22:50001 50001 .5.4797 .Application PlatformNote: For Netweaver ABAP is mandatory as the business lies in ABAP. EP. Enque. provided as add-on. i.Gateway port 4800 . BASIS)Enhancement Pckg : is an upgrade to the current functionality 700. However WEBASABAP is a mandatoryNote: EP (Enterprise portal is not a business component for Java and it is only meant for GUI andFormatting) and EP doesnt requires ABAPEP = EP Core + JAVAERP and EP cannot put together in a single box. SR1. BI...SDM Ports (00 . Outln.JAVADevelopment 183.communication between one process to another process. Select the installation Database (Oracle. SR1. SID 2.sap.NETWEAVER: Is a common platform which provides EP (Enterprise Portal).Kernel. PI content etc.Exchange Messages called as Process Integration (or) Intelligent Broker (or) BPM using an adapter.Supply Chain ManagementSRM . business management criteria to a unit. BTC. Central Instance 3. JAVA. offline.. Update. Application Platform called as NETWEAVER 181.. SR2.0ECC 6. However when we choose to install ERP. JAVA Components) on UNIX we may need toabrupt the installation and install the database but on windows the database can be installed beforein hand.Exchange Infrastructure: Provides communication from one system to another system. ORACLE. 183Infrastructure .

It uses the instance profile to start the engine with instance specific (Memory Buffer etc) <SID>_SCS01_Hostname for SCS and <SID>_DVEBMGS00_hostname for Integrated Engine and <SID>_JC00_Hostname for Standalone Java Engine 6. The number of CPUs and CPU speed 5.okSetting Virtual Memory .propertiesSpecifies the configuration of the Netweaver system 1. IGS: Internet Graphic Server which is used to provide graphic services over the web. statistical data etc DVEBMGS it is a Kernel directory (Soft link to the physical one)2. JControl starts JLaunch process by reading instance.My Computer .properties JLaunch . What are the inputs that are required during the installation?4. It consists of the following directories 1.Dispatcher assigns the request to Work Process .SCPR20 . engine type.It also contains the directory Standalone Log Viewer to display the logs of the J2ee engine if its notstarted.255. PI and MI 2.Request is handled by JAVA Dispatcher .Central services are used for load balancing and locking purposes. 189 .1.Use MMC . DATA: Used for storing the lock entries. What is JAVA Instance/ JAVA Cluster2.0. Config Tool: It provides a tool to change parameters of the instances either globallyor locally.Dispatcher assigns the least loaded server process .Installing Database . J2EE: It specifies that the JAVA engine is installed on the Machine.The database process the request and response is sent back to the user.server processJAVA Engine Startup FlowNote: JControl reads from SDM/config/sdm_jstartup.provide the Admin pwd : admin123Install the LAN Drivers and assign the static IP Address : 172.4. 192 .4.Work process handles the request using Work Process Task Handler . .1.Create Support Message.properties Error logs are stored in DEV_JControl from the WORK Directory DEV_JLaunch DEV_Dispatcher DEV_IcmIt consumes more time to start because bootstrap reads the parameters from the database toinstance.okNow under system variable Search for "path" and highlight it and click on edit . What are the various profiles that are used during startup & Explain the significance of them?5.JAVA Request Flow .Oracle 10G . 190 7. .Note: In an integrated installation (ABAP + JAVA) J2EE_ADMIN is the administrator and onstandalone JAVA Engine (Administrator) is the userid that manages J2ee engine.sapdocs. Dispatcher + Server = Local instance (Cluster) 2. 191Installing SAP ECC6.Used to identify the usage types usrsap<sid>config usage.info http://www. It also specifies the usersthat are created during installation along with the encrypted password.Organization name : willsys11 .properties to start the instance(We can find by what time the instance is started) 194.under variable value : c:j2sdk1. 5. What are the types of Installations and which of them are recommended based on the usage types?3.Task Handler interpret the request and submit the request to Database . files. 5. Usage types ABAP.0 Install the j2sdk.10.Service_Desk_change_st32A13 .2_12 .Allocate 15. 194 Clusterdispatcherlog Defaulttrace. Explain the JAVA file system?LAB 191.Database Instance .run sapinst. 12-Jul09Usagetypes.Master Password .Dispatcher JLaunch . JSPM: it is a tool to 29 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . It uses default profile to start the engine with minimal parameters that are required by all the Dialogue Instances. (During an update)JAVA Startup .17.Access the folder oraclelogNTOraclesapserver. User uses any of the above startup methods to start the JAVA Engine 2. It contains binariesthat are required to start the above process. Hostname and ports used along with backend ABAP Client. 193 NT INTEL. System ID and Instance Number 6.click on change under Virtual Memory and Hit change . EPCORE.0Copy the SAP dump by accessing another machine willsys04d$Installing ECC6.Maintain .net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book is independent of the original Customizing tables/views which is accessible across thesystem landscape. In order to start the JAVA engine Jcontrol process is used to initialize the system. JAVAengine doesnt let us to create users as the Data source will be in ABAP.Note: SAPJSF user (Security Framework user) is created in ABAP Engine to communicate with JAVAEngine. HP UNIX etc 3.ABAP Request Handling 188.or rdisp/j2ee_start=true used to start along with ABAP Engine but consumes at least 10 Minsto 30 Mins.Central Services Instance .IDM : Identity ManagementSAP*DDICSAPCP These are not counted for LicensingDVEBMGS<Instance Number> .?6.JAVA Dialogue Instance (Optional)Process Flow 1.Server process communicates with DB and the response is sent back to the user.provide the system name : willsys11 . Cluster: It specifies the dispatcher. se v1.click on New Set variable name : JAVA_HOME Set variable value: c:j2sdk1.select C: drive and set custom size Initial size: 2046 Max-Size : 8000If RAM is 2 GB we can select up to 8GB from HDD.Startsap command .2_12bin . It also contains instance.properties and bootstrap initializes Jlaunch for dispatcher.Server process assigns application thread manager to process the request.KernelAnd prompts for SOLMAN Key get this from SOLMAN System.click on environment variables . server and bootstrap process.11 255.User submits the request 189. It also uses START_SCS01_<Hostname> for starting SAP Central Services 4.expert mode ContinueGoto satellite system SM30 Look for BCOS_CUST .4. The system is started by using startup profileSTART_DVEBMGS_<Hostname> (Integrated Engine) START_JC00_<Hostname> (Standalone JAVA Engine) 3.Exports .under performance click on settings 192.under Advanced tab .Dispatcher keeps the request in Queue.Assign the computer name : willsys11 .properties . .Assign the product key . . 3.2_12 (without bin) . JAVA.3.cmd . 4. logs and profiles thatare used.ATM Handles the user request internal process/ Intra process (For Locking) is handled by Server process. This user reads the ABAP user master and ensure all the users are in the JAVA engine.SMICM .trc is a file available in the log directory for both server and dispatcher.Process of JAVA Startup . Machine Type 193. jlaunch for SDM and whileinitializing Jlaunch for server process it synchronize the binaries(All logs) of the dispatcher andthe servers.Service Desk Creation.Dispatcher serves the request based on FIFO .Server process processes the requests till it is completed/ or the memory is exhausted/ timeout . 188 .Allocate the remaining for D Drive eg: 223467MB = 223GBDuring installation of O/S . 190.The request is received by the dispatcher .Advanced . Deploying: It is a tool that is used to deploy the small programs in to the JAVAengine.Straight away we can see the ABAP Engine It is the Instance directory which specifies the types of processes.0 on Win 2k3 Server Enterprise EditionInstall the O/s .BCSet .slideshare. EP.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.0.2_12binSet the Environment Variables from .exeDuring Installation it prompts for various inputs .Properties . JControl initializes the bootstrap process to read the parameters from 8.4.select advanced tab . BI JAVA. It contains the following directories.000 MB = 15GB for C Drive .User submits the request using GUI .After installing copy the path from c:j2sdk1.OSS_MSG -SaveHelp .SID .JAVA Components . DI (Development Infrastructure). Memory available on the system 4.Central Instance . Admin Directory: Used for administrating the J2EE engine using Visual Admin tool. instancenumber.D: . Explain the process of JAVA Engine startup & Describe the executables.provide the SID eg: W11SAP Installation.Create the change request .

Double click on cfgtemplategui. XI folders. (Platform specific JVM should be installed on the customers system) b) It is used to configure various managers and services. Download the support pack from the market place. EP. SDM is initialized by using remotegui.It is initialized by using a script configtool. LDAP protocol is used to transfer the users from AD to the Application platform. Standard error logsstarts with std and these are used to debug the startup errors. Default mode is integrated and standalone mode isused to change the password.SAP Provides predefined templates to configure BW.SDM reads the files from the specified location not eps/in and it has its own inbox to process thedeployment. There will be only one SDM inthe entire system. file system or J2ee engine.clear all the logs and that is equal to Syslog. This class file will be distributed to the customers irrespective of theoperating system Authenticate . . . Select the template file and click nextUsed to set memory. QTY. Modifications will get effect only after a restart of the J2ee engine (the parameters are static)J2ee engine startup is not required to work with config tool.Sysexe directory : Consists of run time executables (Kernel)Sysprofile directory: consists of profiles to start and also to control the behavior of the instanceSysglobal directory: consists of SLD (system landscape directory).sh in UNIX which resides in j2eeadmin It works only online because it needs to connect to J2ee engine. 14-Jul-096. hostname and port p4 (50004).bat /.Depending upon the nature of the patch it updates any one of the aboveClick on next and click on start deploymentLogviewer tab provides the deployment status along with the duration of the deployment.JAVA VIRTUAL MACHINE It is a platform specific software provided by sun Microsystems. 197 cluster = disp + server processNote: if we want to have more than 16 then we have to include dialogue JAVA instance. It is started by using sdm_jstartup. It is used for the following purposes -a) To increase the server processes up to MAX 16 197.2. Itconsists of java run time environment to interpret the JAVA programs..bat Under choose action 195. . It is discontinued in 7.jar (JAVAArchives).net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book apply patches (JAVA Support Pack Manager) 6. 13-Jul-094. SDM has its own directory which contains binaries.JAR)Changing the SDM Password: if SDM password is unknown we can set a new password usingcommand line interface 196.. SAPrecommends to use JSPM from 7. It is used to configure various services and managers.this option is used to enable SAP* user.work directory: consists of developer traces. a) When JAVA programs are defined they used to save extension ..> [mode = integrated/ standalone]Note: it is always recommended to logoff from the SDM instead of closing the window.login Authorized . SDM Directory contains a document related by SDM itself (SDMKIT. users who are created in AD(Active Directory) server. JVM Logs (Java Virtual Machine). From Command prompt telnet <Ipaddress/Hostname> <port number> telnet willsys11 50008 Provide the login details as J2EE_ADMIN and the password Prompt changes to > > lsc (list 30 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .Deploying a support pack through SDM1. . severity etc.zip. small developments that arecoming with extension . Click add browse for .slideshare. login to SDM Tool4.1. (ABAP/JAVA) e) Offline configuration mode to change certain parameters eg: when all the users are locked. It needs admin user .class file. CPU etcNote: Should not be executed after setting up the system because it will over write the changes.The patch status is obtained from system . 196 sdm changepassword.. JVM contains Byte code verifier andclass loader. This is the reason why JRE is required toexecute JAVA Program. 198 This is an admin tool which is used to change the static and dynamic parameters (ExceptJVM) It is initialized by using go. SDM : Software deployment manager This is used to deploy and undeploy the support packages. J2EE engine etc. the window isclosed but the SDM Client is still connected to the server in this case we need to restart the SDM.sdc(sdmprogconfig)During deployment (applying the support pack) it takes backup of the repository.information option in the home pagehttp://<hostname>:50000SDM startup modes are standalone/ Integrated. config. b) it is used to configure the JVM (JAVA Virtual Machine) memory settings.To handle the load we have to add server process.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.SDM can be started in standalone or in integrated mode using command sdm jstartup sdmhome =<. patch location can be a database.5.Software Deployment Manager It is used to apply the patches for various Netweaver640 and 700 and it is discontinued in 7.bat /. It can connect from any system using the above credentials. It isrecommended to execute in the initial stages. click on Deployment Tab.10 NW but widely used in 640/ 700. In WEBAS 640/ NETWEAVER 640 JSPM is not availableand in NW710 SDM is not available.properties in the sdmprogramconfig. It requires SDM Server data like hostname & SDM port 50018 During initialization it will read the repository information from sdmrepository.JAVA (eg bank.Executing tasks These files are interpreted by using JAVA Virtual Machine.info http://www.sapdocs.bat (. Initially JVM checks the class files and verify the bytes in the code and then signals toload the class file to display the screens/ Logic executed. Log Directory: solDVEBMGS00 it specifies the MMC log/ SM21 Logs with log gotoslog . when SAP* is enable no other user can work on the system.sca (SAP component Archive) .2. SDM is started as a process using the executable jlaunch.sh on UNIXIt resides in usrsap<sid>dvebmgs00j2eeIt connects to the database to modify the parameters of the J2ee engine when the engine is offline oronline. 195 Select apply and hit next. c) It is used to store the Administrator password using option secure store.bat fromusrsapsolDVEBMGSSDMprogram. The majoradvantage of SDM is to undeploy the support packages(during conflicts) but its a disadvantage whencompared with system consistency because it can undeploy the dependent packs also.java) it iscompiled into bank. Visual Admin Tool: 198. PRD) are accessed (Notmandatory to EPS) directory3. Config Tool:Used for Offline configuration. d) It is used to configure the user management to LDAP engine ie.0 onwards.sca file and hit next6.password. This is required when memory is available to configure the additional server processes. Template Config Tool : It resides in global directoryusrsap<sid>sysglobal It is initialized by cfgtemplategui.sh in UNIX)This tool is used as a part of the post installation and used to set the system with minimal parametersthat are required for an usage type.ear (Enterprise archives). (Displays the logs in userfriendly format) usrsap<sid>DVEBMSGj2eeadminlogviewer.sda (SAP Deployable archives). template config tool. Deploy (or) copy the patches into the shared folder so that (DEV.. XI. It can also used to start/stop variousservices and applications. Log Viewer Standalone tool: It is used to provide the log access at O/S level when the instance is not started and alsoused to display the logs based on search text.SDM: <sid>DVEBMGS . profiles. global directory.Adobe services etc.Unlock the admin users and disable SAP* (two restarts are required) f) It works only on the database as it needs to connect to the database using the OSauthentication (doesnt require any userid and password)5. log and libraries.standalone3.1NETWEAVER TOOLS usrsap<sid>sysglobalSys consists of system executables (Kernel).war (Web archives) etc. The server processes are used to handle the user requests. Shell Console Tool (or) Telnet tool It is used to login to the system remotely when the system is congested (Hourglass mode). It is the only toolused to modify the JVM Settings.Note: In order to change the password SDM should be running in standalone mode. date and time.

Binaries are synchronized before they get started 10. User admin is a part of NW IdentityManagement tool. It is used to set the log locations forthe applications. logs. Config Tool3. Command=> 0 to Exit Command=> 30 to refresh the instance data (It is used to clear the shared memory in use) 12 . Bootstrap updates instance.RFC. JControl Initialization 2. Application Thread Manager 204. It provides reports related to users. It is used to perform the post installation activities based on the usage types. NWA Tool (NETWEAVER Admin Tool) It is available since NW7. 204So each manager/ service has four values and the priority of execution as follows Global Default Global Custom Local default Local CustomGlobal configuration doesnt have any IDEg: Have 5 dialogue instances with 5 server process each. 15-Jul-091. Initialize bootstraps (Cluster) 3.bat which is available in JSPM directory.Eg: In Log Configurator ServiceTracing option is provided in VA Tool whereas in config tool it is not provided. Libraries. Theseare logged into categories.(The environment required for JSPM is provided by user <SID>ADM.10 all the visual admin tool tasks areperformed by NWA Tool. It needs to maintain 5 Dispatchers/ 25 server process which requires editing the config tool 30times or simply use Global configuration and edit only 2 times i. clients information etc. It is only executed in the <SID>ADM home.JAVA Support Patch/ Pack Manager tool It is introduced in Netweaver 7. These are logged intolocations.1 only7. JControl initialises JLaunch (SDM) 8. configuration andmonitoring.Traces: These are explicitly switch on by the user to trace the user activities.sar etc) and place them inEPSIn Ensure that the logged in user is <SID>ADM. Bootstrap reads properties from DB 4. administration.0telnet tool has to be executed manually from the command prompt. Template Config Tool. Server Kernel. components etcsimilar to ST03. VA services areexplanatory than config tool services and also VA provides additional functionality.18 EHP1 SOL .It is also used to upgrade kernel where the system will be restarted as per the requirement (NWConsultant should take the backup of the kernel)Process: Download the respective software into EPSIn directory (.146:50000/sldIt is effectively used in XI. Visual Admin5.136. performance. Licensing Adapter Service: This is used to apply the license from the text file. Also used tostart/stop various services.11.For J2ee Engine ABAP .0 to replace SDM tool. It is used to set (SQL. Dispatcher Kernel.comApplications only sync by the server process.sda. SLD (System Landscape Directory)JAVA Startup Framework 202.for Portal engine J2ee . JControl initialises JLaunch (Server Process) 9. JControl Initialises Jlaunch (DISP) 6. The another major advantage is thepatches can be deployed arbitrarily like 1 to 5 (i. groups and roles. 066) 201.server0appssap.EHP4Note: Among the selected packages SAP Identifies which one be prioritized first in this case JSPMgoes first. 200.service. software components. one for server and the other for thedispatcherServices: These are similar to SAP Transactions to perform certain tasks on the J2EE engine.(000.9. PI and became a mandatory component as per ITIL/ StandardsInfrastructure Library. . Select the type of the package to apply Eg: Single Support package JSPM reads the EPSIn directory and displays if a valid support pack is available. Select the target SP level can click on next to deploy the patches. User Admin10.. process and applications.DTD: Data type definitionJAVA Startup Framework 1.J2eeclusterdispatcherlog2.Logs: These are by default written to the default log locations without any initiation/ Initiative. newsoftware components & additional usage types. JSPM (JAVA Support Pack Manager)7. JSPM . SDM is not available in NW 7. .comclick on SAP Support Portal under FOR CUSTOMERS 31 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .Standalone JAVA engine has various options lie user creation and password management in the useradmin tool but whereas in the integrated engine the user management is taken over by ABAP Engineexcept assigning J2EE roles. Shell Console (Telnet)9. 203DVEBMGS J2ee cluster server0cfgkernelApplications lies here for sync. Log configuration Service: This is similar to SM18/ SM19 to trace the user activities.1 It reads the support packages.bat Specify the SDM Password (SDM and JSPM should not be operated simultaneously to avoidinconsistency of the system). SDM (Software Deployment Manager)4.JSPM is used to deploy business packages like employee self service.Most of the services are available both in config tool and visual admin tool. USER Admin Tool It is used to administer the users. These arealso used to perform certain post-installation activities. Log Viewer Service: It is used to display the logs and it is similar to standalone log viewer service. 205. Buffer ST05 Trace) the traces. JCMON or JControl Monitor It is initialized by using command line executable jcmon suffix with Jcmon pf ="path of the instance profile"Eg: D:usrsap>jcmon pf=d:usrsap<sid>sysprofilewis_dvebmgs_hostname It provides the menu to administer cluster. 200Support Packs NW . Standalone log viewer6. It can be edited by choosing the server/dispatcher.properties 5. Specify the patches target level (Select or Skip)Note: In earlier cases before applying any packs need to apply SPAM but here JSPM.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book services) > man (gives the manual)In Netweaver 7. SLD Tool (System Landscape Directory) http://<hostname>:50000/sid It is a landscape information provider service to provide the information of all the systems inthe landscape along with products.e missing the sequence).info http://www. JCMON (JControl Monitor)8. From NW7. patches from usrsaptransepsinSimilar to SPAM but it works on SDM port and password.10.2. 16-Jul-093. Libraries are synchronized before they get started 7.sapdocs. manager self service. 201 It is accessed by using the url : http://202. It is also used to set the traces for certain activities.e.001. 202 203. Initialize JSPM by using go. JSPM has its own patch level similar toSPAM which is updated by JSPM.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.EHP1 ERP ..rolesNote: ABAP roles are groups in JAVA Engine.usrsap<sid>DVEBMSGshellconsole from 7. patch levels.Goto Market place : www.Server Starts the ApplicationNote: Thread Manager is for System process Thread Application Manager is for the customer (Dispatcher cannot handle ATM) Kernel provides runtime which consists of Managers to work at J2ee Engine levelThe J2ee Engine contains the following Managers 1. JSPM maintains its own log files if any dependencies are missing it will abort the deployment. Set the granularity of the log level (Using Min & Max) Severity is also setup based on requirement. memory.It is initialized by go.The main advantage of JSPM is undeployment is not possible. consistency between support packagesare checked and displays the source and target patch levels. memory and restart the processes if required.Difference between categories & locations Logs & TracesWe can also switch SQL Trace similar to ST05 to identify the expensive SQL Statement. Enque.This is used to monitor the status of the instance8.. 2051. UME . or using the service in config tool/ Visualadmin tool. 199 5 .For user management PORTAL .slideshare. NWA (Netweaver Admin Tool)11.sap.65.sca. It is also used to control the transport of objectsbetween systems in the landscape.0 and used for JAVA engine.1 SAP provides Shell Console Tool in the J2ee Directory and up to Netweaver 7.To identify the processes 199.

ear format files 208. Programs etc.9999 and theother one is maintenance certificate which is valid up to 3 months.Specify Program ID.Preparation Export Split .sapdocs. On the SQL Server .9.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book Provide SUSERID and pwd Click on Keys and Request Tab 206.. Code page conversion 2. Configured SLD18.. Heterogeneous System Copy 211.Note: Form Netweaver 7.This is content repositoryThis two informations are updated by SAP as per Note 669669 210..Select the system . threads.Specify Hostname. UME Provider Service: 209.for Integrated SU01.19. Program IDplays an important role to establish connection between the systems.SDM and application 32 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .Maintenance certificate locks the SPAM and JSPM after 3 Months. Defined backup schedule using BRTools (Oracle)..For ABAP . Monitoring Service It is used to provide monitoring for all the kernel.Gateway Host (If the gateway is installed separately)Gateway service (< Instance>)Server Count (To specify the number of server processes that can work simultaneously for thisProgram ID. Assigning security roles using security provider service.On server side we have to set Cache Size up to 999 and file buffer size & Other parameters specifiedbye SAP from VA Tool. 210Always one patch less than the Market place available patch.Component Information Model... Working with UME Provider service to restrict the parameters of userid and password8. services and performance of thesystem.select export database 1. Client. 211JAVA System Copy/ DB refresh ERP EP XI BI DI CRM SCM With JAVA Stack SRMSAP Provides system copy option in the installation master DVD from Netweaver onwards. In case of a system refresh select Database specific tools so that the DB can be restored from avalid backup which will minimizes the export and import.Services HTTP Provider Keep Alive time to 75 instead 15 Sec.Additional software tasks life cycle .From Visual Admin Tool . It is similar to CCMS Monitor (RZ20) alert monitor.6. UME(Java Itself)) define user store. component and requests.. 206 Click on Request Permanent License Key Select the Installation Type Click on New System Provide SID as PRD System Name : Hostname System Type Product: NW Version: NW 7.slideshare. Define System Landscape (http://<hostname>:50000/devinf) usage type DI should be selected.OS For this take the backup of PRDDB New system buildPatches Install central instance RestoringSapinst Tool Install database . Password.. It is also similarto SM04 to display the login Users. Enterprise Manager in SQL Server12.Insert Installation master . HTTP Provider Service : It is used to handle the request and keep them in socket queue.Goto the target system import the databaseSystem Copy: While performing a system copy using SAP tools it will prompt whether database can beexported (use database specific methods) This option should be unchecked if we are performing thefollowing. SLD Data Supplier Service: This service populates the JAVA Engine information into SLD for every 720 Minutes(12Hrs) in ABAP Engine RZ70 is used to populate SLD.LDAP... Adding Server Process (Config Tool)4..Eg: If the defined threads are completely used then Thread congestion occurs. Goto DB13 or BRTOOLS to schedule backup. Configuring logs (Log Configurator)3. 17-Jul-09Post Installation Activities for JAVA Engine:1. Similar toST03-(Work Load Analysis)11. if not manually run/ start the application. Security Provider Service It is similar to SU01.13.CR_Content .16. Performance Tracing It is similar to SE30 runtime analysis of ABAP Program and ST05 system trace to traceSQL..For single Prog ID Max 20 RFC can be generated..Need to take complete usr directory backup for JAVACIM . JARM (JAVA Application Response Time Management) Used to fetch the information of users. add-ons using SDM & JSPM (Update the system to level 18)11. File System 2.select source system (PRD) . We need to switch on the trace explicitly for a specific module alongwith the user name.Note: [ANT] is a tool to archive .BackupBRTOOLS Backup Recover Restore toolDB13 calls internally BRTools..Click (Install license from File) and Upload the file. (Process needs to be followed)Enqueue Table (100MB size) determines the locking table size enque/table_size8. If no threads areavailable the system marks the respective Manager/ Service in traffic light signals (Yellow-Green) inthis case it is Red.10 onwards VA tool is discontinued instead NWA is implemented. Pfcg which is used to create users and assign roles..9.. 209 It is used to set the logon parameters similar to security parameters that starts withlogin in RZ10 Loginpassword digits Loginlang etc. Defined process documentation14.Both the systems are used to maintain the landscape information. Installed additional dialogue instances13..12.17. In this case it exports the directory structure.DB Refresh/ System Refresh PRD DEV QAS120GB 125GB PRD 2009 (500GB) Rename PRD to QAS QASRepository consists of Functions.. Applying license (Licensing Adapter Service)2. It is widely used in XI/ PI to checkthe specified applications are running. Installed Netweaver Developer studio to start the development.SDM & JSPMApply the license through Market placeDisplay license scriptDownload to PCFrom Visual Admin .info http://www. 207 Application Server : wilsolman System Number : 00(Backend EP System) Client : 001 Logon Lang : en User : sapuserSMGW is the T-Code to verify whether the connection is established or not.Scenario: 1. Locking Adapter Service It is similar to SM12 and is used to identify the users who are explicitly locking theresources for update. From VA Tool . It is also useful to deploy the small application like (*.. Or Select database rt click .. Database backup Only export the file system . Defined the user management UME . JAVA System Copy 2. JCORFC Provider Services: It is similar to SM59 used to create RFC connections to the backend systems. RFC. for a standalone JAVA engine (SU01.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. 2087.Goto Maintenance plan .Click on DeployThe small programs which are developed in-house are moved using this service (When NWDP not inplace) Netweaver Development Infrastructure. Applying patches.JCoRFC Provider Provide : Program ID : JAVA_2_ABAP Gatewayhost : WILSOLMAN Gateway Service : Sapgw00 Service Count :4 207.System Copy of JAVA Based systemsSystem Copy / Homogenous Copy Existing System PRDUpgrade PRD without touching the box PRD. Language (Details of the backend system)5.Management Studio . Configured JVM memory using config tool..4.Define the schedule for backup. Deploy Service: It is used to start and stop the deployed applications. OS / DB Migration changing OS or DBNote: It is a time consuming process because the complete database content is exported into anindependent format which will suite to all operating systems and databases..Note: Solution Manager installed with usage type JAVA and SLD is configured on it. Userid. They will wait in thequeue until they are processed (or) timeout (This is applicable for dispatcher only). 1.. We can select the user and release the lock.. Buffers and enqueue.15. Defining Admin Users7.From Visual AdminDispatcher . Define RFC connections from JAVA to backend systems (JCORFC)10. Configuring Time out period (Http Provider)5. Configuring JAVA System to send information to SLD (SLD Data Supplier Service)6..ear) Enterprise Archive files..SAINT & SPAMFor JAVA . Screens.12.10.0 (2004 S) System: NT/ INTEL Database: Hit ContinueNote: In earlier versions we use to type the command saplicense -getFrom Visual Admin Tool Licensing Adapter for Hardware KeyNote: It contains 2 licenses one is standard license (Permanent) which is valid till 31..

If Extended memory is not sufficient then it uses the remaining part of the localmemory i. ABAP Engine 2. packages. Heap memory is configured using -XMS 1024M from config tool.User Master record in SAP system .UME resides in J2ee EngineUME can get the users in the following ways1.It provides userid and password.XX:NEWSIZE . 21-Jul-09JAVA Authorization Concept . 19-Jul-09No class 20-Jul-09 212.a) LDAP (Light Weight Directory Access protocol)b) SU01 of ABAP Enginec) UME itselfd) UDDI (Universal Directory Description Integration)a) LDAP (Light Weight Directory Access protocol) It is used to populate the users from a directory server (MSADS .It is also possible to have LDAP in the back end engine i.Eg:Note: Use only 50% of Extnd Memory for PVTMinimizing the work process will causes Hour Glass 214.Memory Usage sequence: Zttaroll_first 20 KB Zttaroll_ext 500MB Roll_Area 20MB ABAP/ Heap 2 GB PVT ModeDIA . 217 .e.bat) Select UME LDAP data and provide the following info. su22. only local configuration is allowed. 214Eg:Search for Rdisp* from Rz10 Rdisp/max_priv_time Rdisp/wppriv_max_no (wont waits for default 600secs)Eg: Say for eg: 4GB 50% 2GB 2GB/ 250 = 8Note:SM04 is used to find how much memory is consuming with Tcode. su24. 216While interpreting the requests if a new content is fetched it uses NEW GENERATION MEMORYwhich is configured by parameter. Using ABAP SU01 (Mandatory in case of an Integrated Installation i. The default store is UME store (UserManagement Engine).Note: Only server process requires more memory because it needs to process the user requests.It is only configured for Active instances i.configured by ztta/roll_extension 4.We can also use VA tool to get the configuration of the back end engine. UME can get the users from any one of the following Data source.10 Users.XX:MAXNEWSIZEIt will be 1/3rd the size of heap memoryEg: for 1GB(1024) Heap 341MBPERMANANT GENERATION MEMORY: If the content that is interpreter is required permanently (JVM) (classes. if the work process uses the heap memory it is said to be in private mode andits runtime cannot be controlled by Rdisp/max_wp_runtime but it is controlled by Rdisp/max_priv_time If more number of WP goes into pvt mode then memory bottle neck/ hourglass/ WPcongestion occurs which can be resolved by killing the expensive work process using DPMONbecause logon is not possible to kill through SM50.Universal Description Discovery and Integration is used to populate the users from the third partydatabase (Oracle. (D:tmp) 18-Jul-09Discussion class about System Copy. 213 Ztta/roll_extension per user context Em/initial_size_mb = 512MBHeap Memory: The memory that is dedicated to a process till the completion of the task or timeout.info http://www.OLD GENERATION MEMORY: (Tenured Generation) If the content is old and can be reused then it will uses OLD/ Tenured generation. . It effects only after restarting the system.the data/functions that needs access are provided with the help of Roles and Profiles. It is configure by the parameter -XX: PERMSIZE -XX: MAXPERMSIZE It will be around 1/4th of the Heap memory. JAVA Engine itself. 212Memory ManagementPhysical Memory: The memory that is installed on the machine and allocated to the machine byPHYS_MEMSIZE.Security Provider service in Visual Admin tool . 3.SU01 or USR02 table authentication in SAP system .(Lotus-Domino from IBM).e.JAVA uses (Userid and Pwd) Authentication method comes from user store.Command soladm> memlimitsMultiple instances on a single serverThen for eg : 64GB 16 16 PHYS_MEMSIZE 16 16 215. ABAP + JAVA). Roll. User store can be 1. Directory server using LDAP 4. In order to roll in the User Context it consumes memory that is configured bymemory ztta/roll_first. byte codes are verified before they are interpreted. ABAP engine take over the complete user management i. UDDI (Universal Directory Description Integration)How to configure user Goto Security Provider in Visual Admin Tool (go. 2. This memory shouldbe configured by (PHYS_MEMSIZE). If this memory is not sufficient then it uses the extended memory i. Siebel etc).Config Tool (usrsap<sid>jc01j2eeconfig tool.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. It is an industry standard to populate the users from one database toother using web services.slideshare.sapdocs.e. The above scenario is on process based. 215MEMORY ALLOCATION: 1.User Management Change Mode ..e. IPlanet. 33 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .Click on Manage Security StoreDo not modify the store unless it is recommended by SAP. The programs are loaded usingclass loader. Each dialogue WP serves5 .Local Memory: The memory reserved for a work process Ztta/ roll_areaExtended Memory: The memory that is exclusively measured for all the SAP WP (It is a part of sharedmemory) 213.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book specific content. It should atleast 20GB or 3 times theRAM (which ever is larger)Shared Memory: The memory that is shared by OS DB and R3 Processes. su20. ABAP/heaplimit ABAP/heap_area_dia ABAP/heap_area_nondia ABAP/heap_area_totalNote: If any error encountered like Storage_parameters_wrong_set its a memory issue.e. JAVA uses heap memory to ensure that the requests are completed. 218.Authorization objects. 3.ST02 Over all memory Page. Heap memory = OLD + NEW GENERATION MEMORYFor server process the new generation memory will be 1/6th of the Heap size or 1/4th of the PERMsize.Microsoft Active Directory). usersare created only through SU01 (The back end engine can get users from either LDAP or CUA)Note: No Client Mechanism in JAVA EngineStand alone JAVA EngineIn order to ensure the consistency of user management SAP Allows only one data store to populatethe users. users can be populated in ABAP engineusing LDAP. If the content is not eligible to store it will be thrown into garbage (GC)Should be careful while changing the memory parameters1.Note: No need to create RFCs to have the users to replicate in JAVA which has been created in ABAP(SU01) & LDAP. Dispatcher and serverhas their own values.e. Authorization fields & Activities Pfcg. configured by ztta/roll_area 5. Goto . Each WP required around 75MB to 150MB (DVEBMGS) of memory.WP congestion or Hour glass ModeWP goes to pvt mode then use DPMON and kill the session. It is calculated by using new generation memory. When a user request for a resource the Work Process rolls the user context forhandling the task. 216. 217. surc. 218Note: In case of Integrated engine. pfud Authorization activities table creation of TACT & TACTZ . The details areavailable in UME Provider Service from VA tool.JAVA MEMORY ALLOCATION JAVA memory is managed by JAVA Virtual machine. HeapSM50Refer : SM56/ SM66Note: All the memory parameters need a restart as the memory is @ OS level. bat)JAVA Authorization Concept ABAP using SU01 JAVA Using UME Directory Server Using LDAP UDDI providerGoto .methods) then it will uses PERMANANT GENERATION MEMORY.Virtual Memory: (SWAP) The memory that is installed could not cater to the requirements of the users so a partof disk is used temporarily which is referred as virtual memory. If local memory is not sufficient the it uses the heap memory that is configuredby abap/heap_area_dia which is a part of abap/heap_area_total 6.

9. Functional information. SU01)8.SAPJSF .. Upgrade the system to NW EHP115. Specify the connection (LDAP Connector)4. software components for third party vendors.. Each program that needs control is definedby permissions.To work on JAVA EngineSecurity Roles ..19.saperp.10... userid/ pwd.Material information. J2EE Security roles..User management to create usersRoles: Roles are used to provide access to data and functions. Java roles provide screens. . Defined XI Domain and included technical & business systems.Security roles.These roles need to be assigned to the users using VA tool..net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book 219.2. Defined products.c) UME Engine The UME manages users by itself (Very rare) Goto . password to read the info from ADS .Security provider service .24. Imported the latest CR Content into SLD from the Market place. Use log viewer service to monitor the logs related to the applications.26.http://<hostname>:50000/ useradminClick on Configuration_provider and provide the above details. 219 (datasource_ldap.. In most of the programs web. Installed standalone gateway/ and configured parameter Data supplier18. JAVA and NON-SAP systems21.. Schedule synchronization using RSLDAPSync_user11. Save and restart to get this effected. Due to the discontinuation of VA Tool.(It purelydepends on the backend system database time)10.info http://www.. Refer: TDDAT. Transport)LDAP .Note: ABAP roles are used to protect the sensitive data like HR information..SAP_BC_RolesSU. Log files such as default.b) Users from ABAP engine Goto . The response time is defined as 2 to 3 seconds depending on the system resources.a) User Administrationb) Role and Administrationc) Support and AdministrationJ2EE Security Roles 222.slideshare. UME Roles 2. identify the missing indexes etc) 224..trc J2eeclusterserver03 Monitor the space (there should not much growth on the file system.UME Provider service / User Admin tool Click on configuration Select the abap.this user contains the role. Portal roles are application roles that are used to protect business packages.xml) .net . CCMS)SM (Monitoring)ST (traces.are the groups in JAVAGroup of roles are controlled by authorization group. Log files in cluster directory and archive them frequently. Performed backup of the SLD so that it can be imported during SLD Inconsistencies23.... If any one of them are missing user cannot access thefunctionality. pages to display the above data.It is a manufacturing. tran/eps/in (Can be cleared)4. Displayed the SLD Logs during Import errors25. ABAP roles does nothave any authorization in JAVA Engine. User creation and role assignment12. willsys.R/3 Roles are groups in JAVA EngineUME Roles . in order to access a report on the web the user should have permissions 220. integration and Intelligence16.UME Roles: J2ee core engine is built with Java programs.save and test the connection/ Test authorizationUserpath: it shows where the users are placed common name : BASISThe above information is provided by Domain administrator.17.. patch application.User should authenticate to login JAVA and Authorized to access the screens.Specify the server name .. Configured JAVA engine using SLD DS service to populate info in to SLD20. XMII and BINote: X Cross APPs .Roles are used to protect the base of the JAVA EngineNOTE: SAP_ALL (S_RFC is not accessed)ABAP roles wont play any role in JAVA authorizationSOX: Segregating roles to different users. 220both on the J2ee/ ABAP (back end system).5. Configured ABAP engine using RZ70 to populate information into SLD. Monitor the growth of the Archived logs.. unless the log files growabnormally. TDRG 22-Jul-09ROLESJAVA Roles ABAP RolesActions Authority checkPermissions Authority ObjectDefined in programs field valueRole: Is the collection of favorites..* SAP_BC_JSF_Communication_RO (read only) we can also cerate our own user but the above role isrequired to communicate with J2ee.. programs or generic connection tothe back end)Each Application should be defined with roles that appears as J2EE security roles. Ensure that traces are not switched on during normal operations(they will fill the OS and the J2EEengine may not be started)8.specify the active user.sapdocs.these roles will be moved to portal roles and can be assigned using User Admin tool.. These applications provide functionality tocommunicate with backend system (functionality means screens.Actions are assigned to the rolesNote: There is no need to create UME roles unless SOX is in place. Execute SM592. menus. The DB growth will be normal as there were no updates but keep an eye on the size of DB if customupdates are defined. Define the landscape and include all the systems in the landscape. A business transaction should not be assigned to a singleperson to avoid the fund misusage 221.Permissions are grouped into actions . Also should haveauthorization in the back end engine. 2239. Connect to the LDAP server using system user7. account and group path. Deployed business packages like ESS.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. component overview and identifythe critical requests with high response time. Dev_Rd are not populated largely (the growth indicatesthe RFC issue).. composite profiles etc.specify the server port . 22411. 222SAP Applications are ported on J2EE Engine.. .r. Define a connection of Type T3. However otherapplication roles will be displayed as portal roles. Monitor the work directory so that Dev_Rfc. Even though fullauthorization is provided in JAVA engine we may not able to access the content/ functionality in theback end system unless ABAP roles are assigned to the user. Use LDAPLog to check the user synchronization logs. The backend system may sabotage(damage) the response time of J2ee Engine so it is alsorequired to fine tune the back end systems (running DB stats. 34 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .The same can be configured using User Admin tool.. Upgrade the kernel to level 18514. Create an (System User) not SU01 user5 Define LDAP Server by using connector6.specify the userpath. Duringdeployment the descriptions should specify the roles. Define LDAPMAP for user attributes (users that are defined in ADS needs to be mapped w.7. Alerts..User Admin to create user Assign roles etc We can also use Visual Admin tool . As discussed above users are onlypopulated from the backend systems we need to assign roles in the J2ee engine to access thefunctionality over the web so. Use RSLDAPTEST in SA38 to test ADS (Active Directory Server)JAVA Monitoring1.SM591.security provider service . The traffic light should be green 223. SOLMAN SLDAdministration SLD is only a landscape information serviceTADM 10_2 based on J2EE engine. RZ (Profiles.SU54 Authorization Group. As the programsneeds security the developer should identify and define them during development. Sale Info etc.. MSS. Defined technical systems of ABAP..xml contains theroles and these are displayed in Visual Admin tool Services . Using monitoring service to monitor the user request overview. 221Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX) 23-Jul-09AUTHORIZATION ROLES: Roles provide the activities that can be performed by user..xml file and specify Client.22. Patching the systems using SDM and JSPM13. Worked with SLD assigned roles LCR* to configure SLD both manually and using NWA Tool.Example: SLD: The role name is lcradministrator is now displayed as UME Role..To restrict the applicationR/3 Roles . Logon lang and host name..333Where as for SAPSR3293276. JAVA Roles are defined as 2 types 1. 389 (default for MSADS) .t. JAVA require only memory and CPU no need of DBRequest -----> JAVA ----->Stores in the ERP ABAP SystemSelect count(*) from DBA_TABLES where owner = SAPSR3DB.

Change Logs: Used to display the logs of content change based on user name. patches.9999SAP Supports support packages. SAP_SLD_DATA_COLLECT SAP_SLD_DATA_STARTUP5. But we can also importthe content that is exported earlier from the same SLD.Distributed Management task force is an initiative to provide the information of the availablesystems in the landscape.To get the enhanced features that are 35 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . stacks.SLD .6C maintenance is expires on Dec 2005Each SAP Product is supported based 5-1-2 i. Export and Import logs 4.3. It provides the product and software component information alongwith systems that are configured on the SLD. SLD on a standalone J2EE engine is not available to other systems.Import: Basically this is used to import the content that is delivered by SAP. RFC and the Gateway)But business system is a technical system pointing to a business client. All the systems to configure as backend for EP.e. SLD can be started and stopped using the option Administration.Netweaver 2004s . To display the SLD.slideshare.ZIP. 25-Jul-09SLD.info http://www.7.Data Supplier: We can configure other SLDs in case if we are defining distributed SLD. This is required asa part of the ITIL standards. clientinformation. It provides the available and current patch level information using CIM/ CR_Content(Component Information Model and Content Repository) This information is updated bydownloading from SAP Market place using note 669669. 225 24-Jul-09SLD: SYSTEM LANDSCAPE DIRECTORY AND SOLUTION MANAGER SLD provides the landscape information of both SAP and NON-SAP systems. CIM and CR ContentProfile It is used to set various parameters that are required by the SLD (Do not change theparameters during import. notes. Used as LIS (Landscape Information Provider System)3. CR_CONTENT. but it is recommended to use RZ70 in ABAP engine 227. Integration Repository.3. export and backup) 230. After 3 months it locks theSPAM. JAVA and NON-SAP Systems. 229 >My Company Application ComponentCIMSAP_CR > Import the file to this folder. So it isrecommended to have individual SLD for each landscape and communicate each other using datasuppliers. patch levels. 227Specify the following details1.It is possible to have more business systems from a single technical system.To define a third party system we need to define Product and the Software component version. logon groups. In order to work with SLD we needlcradministrator role. Coke has their global presence through out the world which maintainsmultiple landscapes across the world. SAP Application.zip. Under software Catalog .4. number of instances.sapdocs.ZIP provides the product and software components versions that arereleased by SAP.e.Content Maintenance: Used to define the role of systems in the landscapeEg: XI-Domain. Remedy can be registered as a third party systems. 230Eg: In a standalone J2ee installed reset the Data supplier parameter.50 Lakhs + 10 Lakhs ----------. Backup (Copy of SLD Content)Export: It is similar to backup but versions are maintained between exports along with time stamp. Seibel. It is used for comparison with market place products. Eg: R/3 4. SLD can be initialized by using NWA tool. Gateway host.The additional fees are based on total cost + additional users4. 17%6 Year with additional 2% i. It provides the details of each managed systems like OS. 2286. Default trace should be false. Run Visual admin tool2. All of the above can be obtained by using suserid of the other companyMaintenance optimizer is introduced to approve the patches related to our landscape.2 YearsThe license is valid till 31. Save the settings with interval 720 Minutes. It will be difficult to fetch the information of all the systems using single SLD. The product is out of maintenance and support.Name Space: Used to define the namespace for developing the objects by default SLD/Active isprovided.Gateway Gateway installationSLDDSUSER (for Directory Server User)SDAPIUSER (for communication) Created with master passwordsSLD_UCSLD_NUC RFCs are created to establish communication with SLD. CR_CONTENT. IT Infrastructure library standards.Backup: It is used to take the backup of SLD content. SAVE and Activate / Execute to send the information to SLD. It contains only time stamp to differentiatebetween backups. It uses SLD_UC RFC connection (Type TCP/IP T)REGISTERING JAVA ENGINE1. because SLD needs agateway which is available through ABAP engine.From JAN 2009 maintenance certificate will be issued for every 3 months. 21% + Country Taxes.50 Lakhs150 Users .2.e.DMTF. upgrade. DISTRIBUTED SLDCompanies like HP. P&G. GE.Initial configuration or . Specify the details like SLD Host and Gateway4. TYPES OF SLD1.2. Used to define business systems(Business systems are associated systems that are used in XI Domain)(Technical system is a system which is pointed to Hostname. gatewayservice. MI. It can be assigned using Visual Admin Tool but now in User Admin Tool.deploy and change configuration views 226. etc. message server etc.Note: 1.All configuration tasksPost Installation activities can be done from here for PI. It will not effect theoperation of J2EE Engine. Used to display the logs of a SLD runtime 3.DMTFSLD is available using url http://<hostname>:50000/sld.System Message: SM069 SM02Content: Import export backup. Automatic(Recommended) RFC to SLD_UC/ SLD_NUC.4.5 Years with normal maintenance fee i.Class Browser: It displays the class information of the CIM Model.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book 225.Installing Standalone Gateway: Sapinst. TREX server. class name and thetime interval. Eg. This is used in small mid sized companies where only one landscape is maintained.12. BI.developer keys etc. To work with standalone gateway to be installed onthe SLD. EP. ISLAND SLDCompanies may require Data security.click .SLD Log 1. 19% and7 Year and 8th Year with additional 2% i. 226 . runtime support. BTC job interval (default is 720 minutes)2.The Hardware doesnt support the current load and users encounter-frequent bottle necks onmemory CPU and storage.Downloads Tab > SAP Distribution Center >Downloads >Support Patches and Contents 229. The system is registered in SLDREGISTERING NON-SAP SYSTEMS Systems like XI. BI needs to be registered as Technical systems inSLD. 231 26-Jul-09UPGRADE MOTIVATION 1.REGISTERING ABAP SYSTEM: We can register a system in SLD. Goto SLD Data Supplier Service3.8.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. All the production systems in the landscape uses a different SLDcalled as ISLAND SLD. SINGLE SLDThere will be only one SLD in the landscape which provides the complete information of systems inthe landscape. QAS and PRD. Adapter Engine. It provides the log settings and filter 2. It is also used to import and export the CIM information. 231.31 contains 382 Products and 2189 Software components. DB. 228. Specify the SLD Bridge information SLD host and the gateway (we need to install gateway in case of J2EE engine)4.exe . Production systems and they doesnt want the SLD to beshared between DEV. Specify the RFC (Use explicit if there is an RFC customized to communicate with SLD.e.7 Enterprise edition normal maintenance ends in 2009100 Users . Startup and also the availability of SLD to other systems.RZ70 NWA Tool .Click productsSLD is used for the following1.5. Used to register ABAP.zip contains their own versionsGoto SLD Administration and click on details to display the versions.Note: ABAP should know which gateway it should be used. It is used to define the system landscape and system domain. XI. CIMSAP.NWA tool is to check the SLD. By default SLD is configured in the J2EE engine. license key.Also used to define associated systems in the XI-Domain.Standalone Engine .CIMSAP.

13. Patch.. Download upgrade master/ upgrade technical guide2.1.21. Include support packages in the BIND_PATCH phase.slideshare. Programs RICEF) that is code which is written inABAP is changed.22. Mount point of CDs (Upgrade master.TIPS1.com > My Profile > Single sign on for SAP Certificate4. Disk space. Verify the compatibility of OS/DB/SMP/PAM (Product Availability Matrix)3.0.6c to ECC6.Free database size and recommends the tablespaces that needs to be extended. On UNIX we may need to create /usr/sap/put with SIDADM as the owner with atleast 10GB ofspace.7EE on ECC5. Different OS. Prepare and upgrade phase list are provided with expected percentage of time. SR1 ->SR2 ->SR3 ->EHP1 ->EHP2 ->EHP3Say for Eg: if a product costs 60 Lakhs 50% discount will be given by the SAP 30 Lakhs but the maintenance cost is calculated on the whole (60L)PREPARE Can run during production operations. Development and Technical teams need to certify the upgrade before going live.Profile paths usrsap<sid>sysprofile. So upgrade server needs to be started to run theupgrade assistant.0If the DB Schema ID/ Owner is SAPSR3 then it is an ABAP system on NW7.jar UaServer us> java -cp uagui.log .If the DB Schema ID/ Owner is SAPR3. VERTEX.Checks the Archive directory (ORA-272.sap. TABLE E070 . Upgrade may involve OS. batch host (The instance that provides the background process). SAP<SID>. DB should not be done at a time) Eg: WinNT Oracle 8i 4.log Mount the upgrade master and execute prepare.stores all the change requests. 23320.Heterogeneous. MAESTRO.Checks the connectivity to the database (ORA 12500). 232. SCM. DB Versions. Read the checks..2. Decision on Add-ons11. CONTROL IN etc.7EE . Instance) are corrupted or not readable the PREPARE fails.5. Define the best strategy for upgrade (Downtime/ Resource) minimised18.0 SR319. Upgrade runs on client ..3. which can beincluded in the upgrade of other systems in the landscape.0If the DB Schema ID/ Owner is SAPSR3SHD then it is a shadow instance on NW7. File system. Download the software from Market place/ SWDC6. Host name. readability of profiles etc.)All the components are priced based on business suite. DB.Eg: If profiles (Startup. port number. SAPINST. INSTALLATION Provide the following details for upgrade shadow system.0 vice versa because the complete DD andRepository is different..net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book provided in the current release. R/3. programs. SDM. kernel.SAR 28-Jul-09PREPARE also checks the following. R3TRANS. move name tabsand performs main import.UPGRADE PLAN1.Customer might have changed the above objects by obtaining SSCR keys (SAP Software ChangeRegistration) or they are upgraded by Note. Additional Hardware. put directory is an upgrade directory.. Upgrade should be performed in the sequence of landscape. log etc.6cMySAP (CRM. R/3 patch levels for homogenous.PI.14. Prepare prepares the system for upgrade by checking all the pre-requisites and documents inchecks.2 to 10. DB upgrades as well plan them accordingly/ separately(OS .. 236During the upgrade it prompts SPDD/ SPAUSPDD: for the data dictionary elements (like table.0II.IV. Different DB but same R/3 versionwith patch levels. domain and the dataelement). Run the prepare well in advance. It checks for unreleased transports. BI.It is used to run before upgrade 234. TP if required. The upgrade only upgrades data dictionary and repositoryobjects.The should not be any terminated/ Pending updates. Add-ons inIS_SELECT phase and languages LANG_SELECT. SPAM.6c to ECC6. Perform Hardware sizing with expected growth of database for next 3 years.0SAPSR4 . kernel directory.0 from below versions 4. conversion.15.logOS.Running Prepare Prepare need to be executed and ensure that all the prepare phases are run successfully. ORA-255). Do not skip any phase in prepare/ modify the logs manually.Note: usrsapputlog specifies the log files during the upgrade. SPDD and SPAU correction needs to be handled. REDWOOD. INITIALISATION PHASE Specify the parameter dir_put (put = usrsapput) put directory is the upgradedirectory which hosts exe. Default. Use the following commands to start the server and GUIJAVA -cp<upgrade directory> uaua.9. Eg: Employee ID is 25 .language compatibility and database issues like table space over flow (ORA-1631 & 32). 235. DB versions. function modules etc.another instance.In the INPUT phase provide the following1.jarNOTE: There is no upgrade to ECC6.bat to create a directory and extractexecutables.0If the DB Schema ID/ Owner is SAPSR3DB then it is JAVA sys on NW7.17.sapdocs. Support Package. Unicode consumes atleast 40% more than the current system resources.jar UaServerto bring up the Upgrade (Assistant) WizardFrom Menu Start > PREPARE 237. Upgrade key from solution manager and upgrade key from master note are required. IMPORT PHASE It performs extraction of release dependent data and the support packageimports.upgrade languages. distribution.log for the prepareerrors. checks for enough space in theput directory for import. During initialization it checks for OS. 237Provide the following or follow the on screen for inputsHost : willsysdellUser name : administratorMount 36 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . checks RFC connection using DDIC pwd and the client. (ORA-1653 &54)Archieve IssuesEnsure that all the prepare modules ran successfully to proceed for the upgrade.7C TO ECC6SICKSE06RZ10System name : Can be find from RZ10StmsSlicense (HW Key)E:usrsapputus> java -cp ua. upgrade exports) From 4.4.It is not possible to refresh database of 4.)Accelerated Components (XI.stores the installation time taken. It performs a test import (DDIC Import) activation.Patches. Background Schedulerslike TIDAL.info http://www. 232If the DB Schema ID/ Owner is SAP<SID> it is 4. VIRSA. kernel.. EMPID 25(INT) is changed into EMPID 50(INT)SPAU: for repository objects like (Reports. Download relevant JRE7. add on conflicts.6c OS upgrade from NT to 2003/2008 Oracle 8i to 9. 27-Jul-09 233. createDB_user for shadow instance.Free extents in the tablespaces which needs to increase (ORA-1631. 236.menus.6C and below..16.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. SRM. Checks the connectivity with the DB.. Document all the interfaces and 3rd party tools like IFS. SAINTTABLE E070 UPGRADATION FROM 4.SAP upgrade may involves O/S and database upgrade which drastically improves performance on thenew hardware.. The upgrade timelines should be calculated on the mock system with production data. ORA-1632). 235III. From service. 234I. All the above phases can run individually or can run as a total. languages.Checks the space in the upgrade directory.. DB upgrade.. Instance number of shadow system. Upgrade SAPUP.The SPAD & SPAU changes can be recorded in development system to change requests. screens.. then the version is 4.2. Screens.There should not be any unreleased transport requestsSPAD/ SPAUDuring the upgrade it only changes the SAP standard data structure like tables. A user created in component can access othercomponents with same license key.During the prepare phase we need to download the upgrade fix FIX. profiles (usrsapput)..server mode. Decision on support packages10. Use that list todocument the phases and to update the status to management and SAP. Instance number.The same OS. It also checks for incomplete imports. Download upgrade notes and known problems8.Upgrade never impacts on the DB Size.ECC5.4 R/3 4. It checks for the following OS Versions. INPUT PHASE It checks all the pre-requisites and writes into checks. Decision on Languages12. Stack etc. SAPCAR.

TFDIR.RDDIMPDP.NWDI_CMSADMNWDI_DEVNWDI_ADMThese users are created during post installation to work on DI. (Generally domain will be development). CRT. PORT NUMBER 50018& PWD.Developer uses developer studio to develop the programs upon successful completion they will checkin the objects into usrsaptrans of domain.NWDI AdministratorJDI AdministratorNWDI DeveloperJDI DeveloperUse url http://<hostname>:50000/devinfdevinf : displays design time repository DTRThe DTR provides central file and folder based on storage of source code. It enables effective team work among developers distributed overdifferent locations. JAVA requires JRE.Provide SAP Components ..Lang1 . DD02L.log *.pflTo read parameters from tp_domain_<SID>.10. R3TRANS should be compatible with DB specific libraries to connect to DB for import.1.. TRDIR.Data P . Customizing . PROD.*.Index View.* Import java.9. DB Exports are OS/ DB independent.cmd *.Note:/ Mechanism: The Transport Mechanism performed by using SDM.Experienced OS/ DB Consultants can trigger all the above at OS level using R/3 load. TEST.pfl TP initializes R3TRANS and writes all the jobs in TRBATand TRJOB.SAVE and Click on SAVE & RESTORETRACK Track is used to define the path to move the objects. Refer Table TADIR. DB export methodUse option 4 only heterogeneous environment/ Unicode conversionExport the structureImport the structurePerform table splittingThe above two options are used to handle large databases to perform parallel export and import. Version histories andconcurrent work on resources.Primary Key These all will be in the Task File I . ABAP development resides in the Database. javac and java to save. JAVA uses tracks to transport the objects. Change request of type Work Bench2. ABAP development consists of the same program with different versions from developers. JAVA uses the entire system to differentiate customizing because JAVA does not have clientcustomization.STR files are provided by SAP (We can create STR Files during the exports)1.to Lang6 . 2419. 243Each Individual system is a DEV System but development is not done in the DEV system. 238.5.Downtime minimised provides high availability to the system which is going to upgrade. JAVA Programs are executable provided we have JRE8.2.Table entries 30-Jul-091.However DB export will be performed by option 3 only. Consolidation. JAVA uses CMS and four system landscape (At least 3 system landscape) CMS . 242Select the usage type DI during the installationPOST INSTALLATION.2.sapdocs. Test and ProductionThat needs to be configured as a system in the landscapeProvide the details of each system as followsSpecify SDM HOSTNAME J2EE Engine URL SDM PORT NUM J2EE Engine User : J2ee_Admin SDM PASSWORD **********Select 4 systems in the landscape DEV.Click on DOMAIN DATA and specify the following 244.10.6.Click on the Tab Runtime SystemsCheck the following options : Development.to UPG16Sapcar -xvf *. It is an usage type provided by SAP to develop programs in-house for meeting the specificrequirement.NWDS (Netweaver Developer Studio)In order to work with DI we need to be NWDI Administratorhttp://<hostname>:50000 /devinfClick on Change Management serviceConfigure check in so that the objects are checked in using the default directory. The objects arechecked into DEV system using the credentials that are provided in runtime systems. JAVA objects are defined based onproduct/ SWCV version (Software Component Version) that are defined in SLD.DEVELOPMENT INFRASTRUCTURE DIJDI is used to provide development of JAVA programsDI is an usage type which provides JAVA transport Management system (Change ManagementSystem) to move the developed objects in the landscape.awt. HOST.sar (TO car the sar files)Usrsaptransepsin (Support Packs)The standard objects should be corrected within 14days after an upgrade. JAVA uses SDM to move the object to the landscape5.tsk *. 240Forms SE71 (Medruck)Transaction SE91Note: Transaction is a logical entity (internally contains Programs/ Reports)[Prog/ Report] in pfcg roleCofiles.ACCTIT Large size tablesCOEP 29-Jul-09[TP R3 Trans] ------Communicates with DB Depends on OSTP Connects to the database using R3TRANS. JAVA is Case Sensitive but ABAP is not case sensitive. PI there is a locking system)7.info http://www. JAVA development resides at file system.toc *. After 14 days we need toobtain SCCR KeysUpgrade Process: We need to choose the strategy either downtime minimised or resourceminimised.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.JAVA DEVELOPMENT INFRASTRUCTURE.upgrademasterUMN Windows . ABAP uses transport routes/ Transport layers to transport the objects. ABAP requires SE38 transaction to perform development.8. ABAP uses client mechanism to differentiate customizing 241.data *. 238TP. 2392.http://<hostname>:50000/nwaform tab Deploy and change option select scenario as DI from the Drop down.INSTALLATION 242.Programs/ Reports SE38DomainData elementTables SE11Function Module SE37Screens SE51Menus SE41 240. If anychanges required it will be sent back to individual systems which is considered as Development. ABAP uses TP. No specific format for ABAP Programs. ABAP objects are defined in the custom name space Y and Z. Activate and Execute. Add-ons. *.Kernel . R3Trans to move the objects from DB to OS specific and vice versa. DB Export .bak T .Note: No business data @ OS level or file system. RDDNEWPP jobs should be scheduled in client 000 using user DDIC (DDIC should not belocked)RDD* Jobs are scheduled in the background which reads content from TRBAT and TRJOB and importinto DBR3load .4.(usrsaptrans : usrsapjtrans)Configure Check in > NEWClick on Landscape configuration to configure the JAVA system Landscape.* Public static void Main()JDI . ABAP requires both compiler and Interpreter (F3 & F8) Save.Consider the diagram 243.Change management system6. Splitter3. compile and execute program4. users require certain roles to work onCMS.net.7.Select NWA to perform post installation activities. Notes. Data files. ABAP are not executable outside the SAP environment.3.tpl *.slideshare.I/E *. JAVA can be programmed using any of the editor at file system. DB Export with DB specific method4. ABAP Development is Central where as JAVA Development is Local. 244CMS Name DEVCMS Desc DEMOCMS Url http://willsys28:50000CMS User NWDI_CMSADMPWD *********Transport DIR d:/usr/sap/trans/eps/incmswillsys28DEVNow under DomainDomain ID DEVDomain Name DEVDomain Desc DEBExt ServersSLD Url http://willsys28:50000Save the domain.3. ABAP uses transport routes/ transport layers to transport the object.In order to apply them to a specific database and O/S TP. Transport Requests will be in our scope1. CONS.ctf (Create Task File)R3load .tsk. R3TRANS should be capable ofcommunicate with DB Libraries and update database.R3Trans is capable of converting the DB specific data into OS independent/ DB independent cofiles/datafilesThat is why support packages. ABAP Objects are consistent because the objects are locked by a developer while modifying thecode while others can only display.JAVA1.upgradesap upgrade1UPG1 .> tp connect DEV pf=E:usrsaptransbinto_domain_dev. Track 37 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .str*. DataInconsistency (In BI.Table D .Eg JAVA program import java.Provide the passwords for the following system. Execute. Structure 239.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book Points .

Low usersUsers are segregated based on the answer time between pages. 248 01-Aug-09Current Environment Problem1. IE etc.Track ID DEMO .1. suppliers. news. technicalconsultants. Japanese and Korean etc using the samecode page.2. Web browser2.MDMP has various issues during upgrade and migration.3. Goto CMS define TRACK3.5. Define the tracks4.sapdocs.Customer (SONY) should provide the feasibility to work from home for developers.to make effective use of JRE.ABAP Users1. As a new consultant we need to performthe following.1.Little Endian is used by Windows NT. functional consultants and end users. EP provides Interactive environment where logos. Exchange Server. SAP provides predefined content in the name of business packages which can be deployed byusing JSPM. FileServer.Repository type DTR . It provides 20 Languages by default.3. 31-Jul-09SINGLE CODE PAGE Each database supports various languages depending upon the code page i. It runs for hours1. 2493. It resides on the proven JAVA Engine there by using all the features of JAVA. XI. over the web. 245assigned to a transport layer and layer is assigned to a transport group and subsequently assignthe route to a system to define the landscape. German & Otherlanguages. User management. High users 4800 to 144000 Dialogue steps / 40 hrs 480 dialogue steps = 40 * 60 * 60 seconds Each DS = 40*60*60/ 480 = 300 secondsAssuming 38 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . XI. softwarecomponents and programs specific to industry requirements. language specific.info http://www. transport mechanism to transport the objects. SUN SOLARIS and ISERIES.Component build service used to build the componentsNote: This DI Configuration is only required when there is a need to develop the products. While exporting select Unicode(Little Endian or BigEndian)4. Include SWCV defined in SLDDefining a Track : Click on the Tab TRACK DATAFrom CMS Click on NEW Provide . Define the Domain3.Zcsa/ system_languageAbap/buffersizeUnicode consumes 40% resources than a Non-Unicode system. CRM. 250. Define users and assign roles so that users can work on CMSInstallation of NW Studio on developer PCsNote: Even though DI is introduced for transporting the objects EP. Too many applications like ERP.2. 248. Low users 0-480 dialogue steps/ 40 hrs2.10. Define Product and software component version in SLD2. Less Productivity.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.* NUC to UC happens only during the Exports. Export the database using Non-Unicode kernel.9. blended code page. SCM.In JAVA TRACK is equal to DEV CLASS and LAYER1. SRM etc. SAP GUI.Track Name DEMO Track Desc DEMODesign time Rep URL : http://willsys28:50000/dtrComp build server URL: http://<hostname>:50000 SAVEDTR . Move the objects between systems either manually or using DI6. AIX. However authorizations needs tobe maintained in the back end systems. Specify the parallel process at least to increase speed depending upon the available resources. web based.4. Too many passwords to remember. Single sign on is configured to communicate with all applications.16.12. People centric.Customer needs multiple GUI to communicate with each of them.8.5. EP Provides collaborative environment where employees. Oracle Apps. managers. Mailbox.17. Include the run time systems5. single point of access to applications. Execute the transaction SPUMG and schedule the consistency check for all the tables (Transparent.STMS EP Transport of Packages (Export/ Import) PI/XI . There are around 3000 MDMP logon/system_lang = EN 247.SAP from 2007 onwards implemented Unicode i. BI has their own transportpackage. 247Unicode supports all the languages because if it is installed on double byte code depending upon thelanguage. No GUI is required (Browser serves the purpose)5.ABAP engine user can use EP without any license. Administration. user based. It provides an interface to communicate with all the applications 249.Users are categorized into 3 types 1. all the products will be released on Unicode only. It provides personalization to select our own themes. 246CBS . Web server GUI. screens and desktops can becustomized. history of navigation.4.e. Domino Server. selected. Single sign on to communicate with all the applications. EP provides content management which is the part of Knowledge Management to access thedocuments from various repositories. 246.If the customer is not satisfied with the Single code page then we need to install additional codepages i.Export Objects and Import Objects BI-JAVA . announcements etc.7.Unicode to Non-Unicode is not possibleBlended code page .15.Customer needs the people centric. Too many GUIs (Outlook Client. chatting engine.e.Transportation etc. Single point of access to all the applications. Single interface with back end connectivity. otherscustomers communicate over the web.4. Its License cost is around 1/5th of the ABAP license cost and cost depends upon negotiation. 250INSTALLATIONSimilar to JAVA Engine we need BI functionality is required over web then Include BI-JAVA usage type. SAP ERP.13.Unicode is installed on code page 4101 or 4102 which depends on Endian [Little Or Big]. Web Server.Big Endian stores the most significant byte in the smallest address. SAP components are installed on code page 1100 which supports English.Customers having applications like Microsoft. It is used tocalculate the hardware resources that are required by the selected application based on number ofusers.Pooled and Cluster Tables) depending upon the size of the database.14. user forums. It is not possible to access the system in Chinese.Eg. SAP provides administration environment for Monitoring. It provides self registration features for the guests.Note: Without executing SPUMG Unicode conversion is not possible. It provides user friendly navigational features. quick poll. High Users (concurrent users) 2. browser used to communicate without any GUI Installation. SAP provides development environment using visual composer which is a web based tool.How to resolve?1.HARDWARE SIZINGSizing is an activity that is calculated over web using sizing tool provided by SAP. role based. SRM.MDMP Multi display multiple processing. in the specific language to allthe applications. SSO provides only authentication (Single Sign on)6. Install the system with option target system using Unicode kernel. role based single point of access.slideshare. FAQs. single point of access to all the applications.SAP Introduced Enterprise Portal to overcome the above issues. File Browser.Design time repository Design time repository is used to maintain the versions. It provides the following. fonts and colors etc. banners. Medium users 480-4800 Dialogue steps/ 40 Hrs3.SAP Note: 648016 Conversion to Unicode. Medium Users 3.Pre-Requisites for UnicodeFrom market place/Unicode (Unicode Media library)SPUMG: It checks for all the tables that needs to be converted to Unicode.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book is mandatory to move theobjects. WebTop i. In ABAP engine the objects are assigned to development class and development class is 245. LINUXBig Endian is used by HPUNIX.e. Executes the background jobs from the Unicode conversion2.Multiple language with different code page.is deployed on portal so it uses transport of the packages. vendors. Define software CV/ Product2. Lock of Interface and Integration. BI . Siebel.e. EP provides rooms.Motivation of PortalPortal provides a role based.Portal is meant for . It may take hours.11.)3. favorites etc.Deploy service is provided in Visual Admin Tool to import the small objects.

save it as a new theme and customize accordingly. CPU and memory are major bottle necks on the portal.2.CRM. DUMPS and other software (One disk each)d) RAID one disk for parity (Hot swappable drive) 160 * 6 = 960 * 90/100 = 850 GB (NET STORAGE) 253. Portal is accessed by using URL http://<hostname>:50000/irj 03-Aug-09Starting and stopping EPAs portal is installed on JAVA Engine. Navigational Elements1. XI)6. Specify the component (Usage type BI. BROWN 3.32000 MB4. User creates 8 POs per day. Visual Composer. HP. EP is an application that resides in JAVA Engine. BIW. KM.Portal utilizes the J2EE engine runtime along with deployed portal applications (BI. The collaboration and KM features are available which needs activation/ enablement for access. SDM. 256Goto System Administration > Portal display > Theme EditorTheme editor provides options to create. STANDBY Server.But in general PO is created with 8 DS 96/8 = 12 POs per day.6. SUN has their own measurementsfor CPU calculation. Platform/ Hardware details like OS DB. EP. 255It is the first strip on the page. Public. the same process is applicablestartsap stopsapPortal logs(Config tool. EPCore. Calculate the number of interfaces 2. RTC. It contains salutation. banner. We can change banner and logo. RTC Real time Collaboration. Country Name4. 2513. for every 2000 sales document that are created 100SAPS/ HrSales order contains more dialogue steps.One dialogue step2. 253Note: Consider the number of interfaces on the system (Job Scheduler. BI_BASISWe can view these from System > StatusPOST INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES1. Most of the EP content is available through roles5. Storage size should be net storage/ not gross storage. high7.800 SAPs are generated by I Series CPU (IBM) similarly DELL. XI.2. It does not have any specific steps in NWA like BI. medium. Content Manager . Content Area3.. SAP_BW. ABAP engine)Installation and Post Installation Activities/------Install PortalApply patches.SAP S is an understandable unit of hardware.3. High Users Each DS = 40 * 60*60/ 14400 = 10 Seconds 360 POs per dayJAVA SIZING As it is web based the time taken to flip between pages is considered. It contains collaboration. Savefavorites detailed navigation. history of pages navigated and flexibility to moveforward and back. RED 2. 254.. CLUSTER. Development . JSPM. Developing pages internally for training. work. Database growth for the next three years3. Visual composer fordevelopment etc. Header Area2. export and edit themesGoto Themes import > specify the path and import the theme into the portal.Low Users Consumes 600 SecondsMedium Users Consumes around 180 SecondsHigh Users Consumes 30 Seconds. content managementetc)Working with user management (LDAP.LOGO.SAP also provides theme editor to create and edit the themes. Personalization is onlyavailable when EU_ROLE is assigned. logoff.One dialogue step*ST03 Work load analysisWe can find number of dialogue steps2.Change the theme according to the requirement. team documents and portal information on thefourth strip. personal.SAP best practices provides 3 Three themes1. Selecting field ..Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. Collaboration. DB and other applications utilization. you need to1.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book each PO high volume consumes 12 dialogue steps.User SAP Proprietary tool (QUICK sizer) 02-Aug-09SIZING Tools1.It is a platform and we need to have an application installedon it. NetworkConnectivity.7.3. Front end customization can be performed based on requirement.A company buys 10 HDD of 160GBTotal 10 * 160 = 1600 (consider only 1400) Remaining will be for format etc. Memory and Storage2. Content AreaIt is used to display the content and it will be around 2/3 of the page. Mail Server. Hard ware details like CPU. Memory . 252. Navigational ElementsIt is used to provide various navigational elements. Calculate the OS. Cust info like contact no.a) Space is reserved for firmware (10% of the disk)b) OS mirroring and Log Mirroring (One disk each)c) SWAP. webdynpro connections which needs to beconfigured.Third strip contains company. EP by default cannot contain any business transactions. The business packages need to bedeployed to communicate with backend systems. SAPs is an unit to measure CPU.Developing the pages for E-Filing Tax returns. ContentManagement. Band width etc. Header Areaa) Mast Head 255. The deployed business packages contains roles. salutation can be customized. Paging. KM repository & CM repository (Stores in the Portal) 3.c) Top level navigationThe third and fourth strip on the pageTLN is a role based and tab strips are displayed based on assigned roles. CPU systems of SAP (SAP APP) benchmark for performing standard It is calculated based on SDModule i.Dialogue steps1.Screen desktop.4.3. They resides on the LHS to the page. Administration . SAP provides various themes to customize the desktops. Vendor (Pentium. logos.Memory UsageMemory concept is as same as JAVA stack. maid. MSS and XMIICustomize portal. search and advanced search collaborationneed to be enabled.e. Specify the customer number2. MSS and XMII configuration (Manufacturing Integration and Intelligence) Defining roles and User assignmentEnabling various functionality of portal like (Personalization. BASIS. ESS.If the component is SAP-APPL then its an ERP Component BPP-CRM CRM Component BICONT BI Component ABAP. SMS.8.. Cytrix.d) Page title barThe fifth strip on the page and it contains page title.Eg: Home ----.Third strip contains the header and fourth strip contains detailed actions under that role.slideshare. import. PI. SRM and SCM) (Memory required at CPU Level)In Principle add 30-40% more the net calculation while calculating sizing for portal 1. 2549. common folders and Taxonomy (displaying in a structure)4. Logging in .PORTAL DESKTOPIt is default desktop that is provided by SAP. 120 POs per day 251. Customization .Single sign on Deploying business packages Patches Establishing connectivity to backend systems.Knowledge management from various repositories. Save and calculate the resultResults provide the following1. EP consists of portal. RAID. login screen.The portal desktop elements are the following1. branching and Images etc. Telnet tool.5. Knowledge Management andCollaboration.)Portal User ManagementJAVA UME is used for user management. MI and SLD.PORTAL ACTIVITIES1. banners. 18 patchDeploy ESS.sapdocs. personalize and SAPlogo. EP. Dealer management. Storage Capacity 1000 GB3.Goto Theme Editor and select a theme . CPU could not arrive as adirect measurable unit like memory and Hard Disk which is independent of the Hardware vendor. Vendors to calculate the number of CPUs required. Backup mirroring.b) Tool AreaIt is the second strip on the page.Portal SecurityPortal roles are available to access the portal content.. UME provides portal roles to access the EP content. Celeron and ) each processor has their own unit.. Name the project3. BLUE 256. Issuing SU01 Tcode . VA tool. Specify the users low. home. 252Ordering the HardwareDo not order the sizing output directly.) http://<hostname>:50000/irj (integrated run time java)PORTAL DESKTOP/ HOME PAGESAP provides default desktop for the portal which can be customized.e.Example.------TASKS 39 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 ..CPUS specific to Hardware.One dialogue step3.Note: The purpose of JAVA standalone .2.info http://www.2. Medium Users Each DS = 40 *60*60/4800 = 30 Seconds I. Update etc. NWA Tool for monitoring.. collaboration. There is no single role which provide access tothe entire content. It provides an option to save the screen as favorite.

EN .----Portal + ERP ESS.System Landscape.0 (SCM7.. create tasks. Iview can be SAPtransaction. Instant messages. Provide an user mapping ID in user admin to access the content without userid and password. one Master data for all the systemsNote: Web dispatcher identifies the least loaded ICM when going for BSP 258.Home > DocumentsCollaboration is used to provide various options to communicate with employees. views.Using delta link the properties are inherited from linked iview and master (template) iview. contact info.saperp. .1.Portal content contains the following iviews.e. 263Enterprise port contains predefined content that is available through PCD.Tool Area ..PCD contains folders.objectsSelect tool area > open+ Enable collaboration launch pad (CLP) Set YES 260.IVIEW: It provides an internet view to the content.e.System Configuration. Browse > Select Folder > Rt Click >Create > New Iview. pages. SU3 authorizations required for that user. Select the folder > Rt click> and select create "New system from template (new system from portalachieve) par file.e. SAP also recommends to use thepredefined prefix to identify the objects uniquely.. material master records in varioussystems and synchronization is becoming difficult.5.Iviews are defined from a portal template when we copy from an iview it is completely copiedpointing to the template.net) 261.ADD SYSTEM LANDSCAPE TO FAVORITES. Fonts.4.System ID Prefix EWD (System should have atleast two dots like com..Specify the system name: ERP .DEFINING THE CONTENT. when a user partiallyentered data in the screen while navigating away from that screen it should prompt whether to savechanges or open up a new window or discard the changes or save the data. KM3.3. Every user needs EU_ROLE (Standard End user role) which can be customizedaccording to the requirements. 06-Aug-09DEFINING SYSTEM Each back end system needs to be defined as a system in the Portal.SAP with dedicated application server/ load balancing when more than one instance isavailable.PCD is the portal content database which are in the directory structure i. logon load balancing is configured in SMLG/ RFC server groups configured in RZ12. The alias name will be unique through out thelandscape.TCODE: SU2. User Groups RolesTcode: SUGRAuthorization > transfer > changeAuthorization of Group check S_USR_GRP--------------------------------.Goto User Admin Tab > Identity Management > Add Identity Search name: ABAP J2ee_Admin Hit modifyGoto User Mapping for system access > System : Your Back End System Eg: NW6 Userid : Superuser Passwd: Admin123Note: When you copy the system to the FOLDER the alias will not be copied. System Administration> System Configuration > System LandscapeSelect the System Landscape > Right hand side corner click to add to favorites.Select Iview template. Collaboration.User Management EngineNote: If SAP * is enabled we cannot login with the other users. TEP10_2)MDM:SAP introduced MySAPBusiness suite 7. 262. url etc.05-Aug-09 259. Login to the Portal2. 04-Aug-09SAP Netweaver certification books (TEP10_1. webgui.0.slideshare.open . assign the tasks. CRM7.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book 257. layouts. Goto > Content Admin > Portal Content > Select the folder and create the respective content. Add the role to the end user group and assign the group to everyuser. 257List down the JAVA ActivitiesList down the SOLMAN ActivitiesWhat is the purpose of DI?Explain the process of upgrade (326) include prepareExplain HW sizingExplain the functionality of Market place with respect to customer environment.. worksets and rolesGOTO > Content administration Portal ContentSelect the folder that is created above > Rt click the folder to create PCD objects. supplier. not from the copied iview.) Transaction Iview > Next > 40 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 ..i. 262Defining the portal ContentPortal content provides the data that needs to be displayed over the portal. vendor.Unlock the object System Administration. Eg: Users uses standard HR user to get the HR related informationfrom the back end. Select the template . Due to the performance issue on the web the personalization is restricted to change thepassword and contact info only. (Portal Content Database/Directory).e.sending email..The properties are inherited from the Master template only. It is displayed in the content area. User] [Save]Display System AliasAddAlias name: BASSave . Select SAP with dedicated application --> Next . JAVA Engine2.07-Aug-09PORTAL CONTENT DIRECTORY 263. 2616. SRM can be considered as R3 systemsNow > GOTO property type : [ User Management] Select type : [SAP Log on Client] Logon Method: UIDPW Mapping type [ Admin. Select the language . Aliases is apointer to the backend system.Monitor Specify the prefix Custom mon. SAP provides MDM where the synchronizationstarts from MDM to all the systems i.THERE ARE 3 SYSTEM TYPES 1. FINISH. specify the iview name For Eg: Name . SAP_R3 2.com or EWD.Now Goto > System Administrator > Support > Sap Application > Select type >Transaction > RUNNow Goto your Folder > select RC > IVIEW > (.Work Protect Mode: This option is used to set the work protect mode i.netSelect the GUI type > Next> select the system ERP .There are locate name prefix which is displayed in Quick Info.CloseSystem aliases is a name that will be used while defining the portal content objects.Enabling Collaboration OptionHttp://<hostname>:50000/irjClick on content administration> Portal Content > Portal users > Standard Portal Users > Open default Frame work page Check .Portal content > Rt Click > Create new folder to identify our objects (Your custom portal content).Motivation for portal.Netweaver 04 Installation (based on 640)1. so you need to createalias one again. MSS configuration---. The real system will be customer system.User Profile: It is used to change the general information like email-id.0) All thesecomponents need to be maintained customer.User Mapping: (Remote Iviews) While accessing the data remote systems specify the useridauthorized in the backend systems. SR3 EHP4. address andorganizational elements.info http://www.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.Iviews are pointed to an alias > Rt click the Iviews and preview. monitor the tasks etc.When the content is defined like ESS and MSS they will use alias name which intern points to the realsystem. On a standalone JAVA change password is also provided. pages. Click on the Tab System Administration. ECC6.System ID: EWD.* Portal provides user based.Click on next Finish SAVE.Specify description [ ERP system as a backend system ] .Iviews are created as an copy or as an delta link. 259ENTERPRISE PORTAL PERSONALIZATION It is used to setup the portal desktop along with specified language.Once you add it refresh it till you get in under portal favorites. SRM7.Rough ----------Refer ST07UME .Under "Personalization Tab"Portal Theme: It is used to change your portal desktop.. Create System2.willsys.sapdocs. 260Enable RTC Real Time Collaboration Set YES SAVE.Portal content is built using templates and delta links. 258Note:Central Services InstanceCentral InstanceDialogue Instance--------.saperp.0.System Definition1. SAP_BW 3. themes andmanage personal data. role based and secure interactive content.0. It is also used to move the objects based on the folder name. SAP_CRMNote: Supply chain management (SCM). worksets and roles. portal content directory.Open the object for describing the backend details and specify application host [Willerpdev] gateway host [ ] gateway services [ ] sapgw00SAP ClientClient 800Port 3200System type SAP_R3 Save..

From Client 2. What is the significance of the portal number. How the user request is handled in portal when compared to ABAP request?9. worksets.Internet View which displays the content. My Portal could not be started? How do you start and where do you start from? What are thedeveloper traces?22. 2644.We need to import the package and define the JCO connections. pages.Enterprise services repository. . . role defines a group of activity and mostlya position in a company.SOFTWARE DEPLOYMENT MANAGERIt is used to deploy the patches up to version NW7. All the above can be assigned as a copy or as a Delta link. To use portal we need only internetexplorer where as for ERP we need SAP GUI. What is Visual Composer? Adobe SVG Viewer?Iview .34.0. What is the significance of memory in JVM. It isrecommended to use delta link because inheritance from parent to child exists in Delta link. pages. Rooms?37. 09-Aug-09 267. user role)No user gets access to the portal content without defining permissions.info http://www. workset and role. server. groups or roles.Importing Packages.25. How do you configure CRM in the portal? Explain the steps?33. Server which reads from directoryD:usrsapnwsysglobalpcdimport.6. Delta link also copies but with reference & inheritance.10 and BW3. Portal lies in JAVA Engine where as ERP lies on ABAP engine. EHP2. How do you transport packages (Export and Import) in portal? 266. How do you install Portal? OS and DB?2. How do you configure them? Explain the ratiobetween them?20.Config Tool.JSPM reads from EPSIN where as SDM needs to be feeded with the pathESR .Page is a layout to store and display the iview.EPA . What is SSO and how did you configure between ERP & Portal?18. 7. groups etc.DEPLOYING ESS/MSS AND XMII1.Goto Webdynpro (in Content Administration Tab) . Define the webdynpro connections. How do you configure BI in portal? Explain the steps?32. Bootstrap.5 to BI7. User JSPM to deploy 265. How did you perform Sizing?3. What is the difference between config tool and visual admin tool?7.Select the Iview > RC > Add to page.10 PI.Import and Export: The developed content can be exported to global directory to transport to othersystems..sapdocs. What are the various tolls available to work on Portal?6. worksets. . pages and a workset.If DI is not configured then select no NWDI control.BP Best Practices provide predefined content.10Note: NW7. single sign on et. roles. What is ESS and MSS and how do you configure them?16. Check the dependencies before deployment. What is the significance of BP/12.start JSPM using go. What are the various patches that you have deployed?11.> Give the path > Select Import. worksets define the activity. Role assigner (Include it for a group.3.5. 4) when EHP is applied. 268 .Enterprise Portal Archive.When the BP is deployed the predefined content is also deployed as well. 26631. log.) Default page > Next > light : 2 Columns > ADD > T-Layout > Next > Finish.SDM uses port 50018 and password to deploy the packages. ABAP13. It can contain iviews. 2654. PCUI needs to be downloaded from the market place. How security is controlled in Portal?26. 3. How did you configure UME in the portal? Explain with steps? Expected user store in Visual Admin.02. global config directory etc. It can contain iview. cluster.Meta Data/ 41 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . Page define the layout.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. Favorites.1.04(EHP1.03.After Import > Goto Content Administration > Portal Content > Content provided by SAP > Specialist> Here you will find all the roles and iviews. MSS.slideshare. (BP . What are the post Installation activities for Portal?5.10.3. worksets. News.Best Practices) System Administration > Transport > Transport of Packages > Import. What is the difference between Knowledge Management & Collaboration?14. Download the content from Market Place2. CON.Webdynpros etc. 264.select the JCO connection and CreateThere are 2 types of JCOsApplication PathConnection should be created using dedicated application server. 7. 268. PCUI (People Centric user interface) need to be deployed to get the interface in the Portal. What is SDM & JSPM and explain the difference between them? Which one of them are consistentand why?10. support stacks and business packages.Deploying Business PackagesSAP Provides predefined packages that contains views. roles. What is portal content views. It is discontinued from Version 7. LDAP.JSPM .net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book Select the system [ALIAS]> FINISH > select the iview and preview.Page can contain page and iviews. dispatcher. role. 1. bootstrap. 267SDM .Now Goto > System Configuration > System Landscape > Assign the alias name as SAP_R3_BP >SAVE. ESS/ MSS package is required to get the portal content. users to implement in thelandscape with high productivity.Note: Iviews cannot contain anythingWorkset: It is used to display an activity. What is the significance of NWA Tool?30.(.4 associated patches. Copy the content to usrsaptransepsin.Role: It is a synonym of a position. Similarly define page. Explain the significance of JAVA startup (Jcontrol. Explain Portal branding techniques (Logo Banner etc)24.) Role needs to be assigned to the user. documentation.Back endsystem user and Password. Shell Console.10 when is it upgraded where as it comes 7.Goto > Permissions Editor (System Administrator Tab)Select enduser role.It provides two options.0/ NW640 becomes NW7.SAP Provides transport of packages option to include the content in the package and transport. page. Forums.Deploy the packages. SDM is also used for undeploymentwhich is a great disadvantage/ because of dependencies may not work.Roles are assigned to users and groups. Allows us to set authorizationpermissions on portal objects. What is meant by system alias and how do you create systems in portal?27. What is the purpose of Portal? Explain few differences when compared to ERP Engine?A. How do you work with Quick Poll. JCO Connections. aliases. What is the significance of SLD in Portal?28.0 to PI7. template. Standalone. What is webdynpro (JCO Destinations) in portal?29.Now Goto > User Administration > Identity Management > Select the user J2EE_ADMIN > modify >Assign role called Finance Manager select Finance manager ADD similarly add material manager. How documents are stored in Portal? How do you create documents?36. What is meant by personalization?15.Select the iview and paste same.bat .Now Goto > Identity Management > Find out the user J2EE_Admin > Goto > User Mapping forsource system tab > Give the mapping users & password > Mapping user id sapuser -. How they are calculated?19. Copy it into usrsaptransepsin3. Copy copies the content without any references.Identifying the Patches.5. Explain the directory structure (VA.)21. Backend system is recognised only when it is configured in SLD to create JCO.On 7. How do you monitor the portal? What are the various tools available?35. Name the significance of Services and Managers? Explain some of them?8. (Java Connector) 08-Aug-09Questions PORTAL1. roles. components and services to portal users.Page. user mapping or Single sign on etc.JAVA SUPPORT PACK MANAGERUsed to deploy the patches/ support packages. What are the factors considering Sizing?4. BI are availableEg: XI3.PAGE : Select the Folder > RC > page > give the details > Next(. Jlaunch)23. What are the various mechanisms for fine tuning portal?17.Client : PathServerThe extension is *.epa (Enterprise Portal Archives)Permissions Editor : Used to assign the permissions to the content.ESS.01. 7. BP ERP is required to deploy ESS/ MSS2.select the business packages & select the system in the system landscape if NWDI is in place.

The backend system will provide authorization to modify the leave request.5.Users ----. web basedinterface to the users.3. 4. 269 5.Group of users . Collaboration brings the integrationbetween people and provides all the features which are available with yahoo. STRUSTSS021. User sends a request to modify the leave request. 269. Personal Documents: We can store our personal documents and can display from any part of theworld provided access to portal is available. end user.Http://<hostname>:50000/ user adminIdentity Management LDAP Server.4.Content --------. date of expiry.It can be enterprise portal archive or webdynpros.Users are created in ADS (Active Directory Server) ---> PopulateWhat is the difference between JSPM and SPAM?SPAM is for ABAP and JSPM is for JAVA. Here we can create the documents.To transfer the data or client copy with in the system or local clients in the system2. login is possible. read only.SINGLE SIGN ONThe portal is role based. Service User: Is also called as reporting user. 3.defining roles based on content. it provides only authentication.Teams: It is used to collaborate between group of people. Each Portal Content is assigned with a role 2. pages. end user. MMgroup etc)Understanding the user and security mechanism.To Provide additional rights to the user.Eg: Science/ Physics. PWD) and user is issued with a logonticket.Role Role. user mapping. Taxonomies: It is used to organize the date in categories.sapdocs. JSPM or SDM . role or a group. We need to configure rooms before wework with teans. Lotus domino server or any other mail servers.3. authenticationscheme. PWD doesnt expires.In order to setup SSO.Note:Portal provides runtime for any kind of JAVA or WebdynproESS/ MSS For Knowledge ManagementJAR files.6.There will be a SMTP server built-in. Group ware transport are used to configure the Microsoftexchange server. personalized. issues. We can check the users availability to send email.3. 271.Define the permissions for the deployed content.Documents: Home > DocumentsSAP provides entry points to store and access the documents.info http://www.Single sign on provides an access to all the back end systems without any password.Note: All collaborative activities using system administration > System Configuration > Collaborationin RHS and click on group ware transport. end user. Reference Users . the request should go to thebackend ERP system. 271 11-Aug-09NO CLASS 12-Aug-09* SU01 users should belongs to ESSGroup 272.Send emailCollaboration means communication between people. Instant Messaging to the users who are logged on to the portal. employees.Assigned with rolesNote: Even though roles are defined on portal they are used to only to control the access to tabs.Click on NEW > Provide the user logon domain. The information is fetched and organizedby topic. Google etc. It provides 6 entries.TCODE: SCOT to configure mail server in SAP.Collaboration provides the following : Work :1. chemistry.to behave as owner. Role assigners andadministrators.Eg. language specific. Folders.4.slideshare.COLLABORATION It is available by default when the portal is installed. people centric. 274 14-Aug-09PORTAL DAY TO DAY ACTIVITIESTransportation of Portal Content Objects. The user login to the Portal 2. Edit)4. biology. Create BW system in EP5.SSSO cannot provide Authorizations.Goto > Content Admin > Collaboration Content > Room Creation (in Right Hand Side)Give the description and details > Hit Next > Add User > Finish. JSPMwe can jump from 6 to 9 42 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . sets.Content -------. Create tasks to the subordinates and check the status of update from time to time. Contracts Management (Add. JCO.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.Application data should be created using a dedicated Application server.Show the status of the users . Perform user mapping.000 portal users will be maintained by using user groups. digital signature. Favorites etc. Maintain the portal setting in RSPOR_T_PORTAL in SM30 back end systems3. Recently used: It provides the list of documents that are recently accessed.SAP also uses TREX to search and classify the information. assigning to a group and group assignment to users. 273Navigation: Home > Work > Documents etc. It contains userid. It can also be server as Intranet portal for the larger companies.Webdynpro is deployed through.7. SU01 . The logon ticket is stored as a non-persistent cookie on the browser and valid till thebrowser is closed or logoff. User creation.Quick Poll Administration. Webdynpros mainly transported using JDI. role assigner.Directly to behave as owner.4. Test the connectionRefer to ESS/ MSS documentation and create systems and aliases accordingly. Predefined roles are available only we need to setthe permissions (Role owner. 10-Aug-09DEPLOYING MSS/ ESSDeploy using JSPM:The content deployed contains predefined roles.SU01 Types of users1. System User .2. meeting invitation etc. read only. JSPM is cumulative/ growing and SPAM is incremental. like RFC users. End user etc)Assign the roles to users and ensure that the respective tabs are displayed. Themapped user should have a valid employee ID which can be assigned in Transactional HRUser. The login ticket does not contain passwords.users ---. role assigner.Content Assignment to group -----. The roles are controlled by assigning them to end user. Create RFCs in BW and EP using program id (SM59. Communication User: To transfer the data from one system to another system.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book Dictionary DataConnection should be created using logon load balancing. (like SD group. Similarly export from keystore admin and import in STRUSTSS02.Now click on Enter Roomhttp://<hostname>:50000/irjContent Management .. read only. Productiontarget/ bonus.Regarding Permissions> System Administration > Employee Self Permissions > PermissionsPermissions > 1. SAP_TRAVEL_METADATA: SAP_TRAVEL. customers and businessprocess owners).Under Role tab. 13-Aug-09What are entry points?Entry points are those in the home page of the portal like public documents. 270The user from Enterprise portal communicates with backend system using mapped user.to behave as owner.The Data access is controlled in the backend engine. When the user isabsent the reference of the other user will take care. pages and worksets. vendors. If you click on physics you need to get statics and dynamics.Roles ---. 272Collaboration:Enable the collaboration launch pad/ real time collaborationFrom Content Administration Using default framework page >Open > Rt side select > Enable the collaboration > SAVERestart the engineCollaboration provides the following . Delete. role assigner.Password rest.Groups . 274. we need to setup single sign on parameters from RZ10. The logon ticket is send through the request and gets authenticated on the backend system.Repopulate info to SLD 270.5. information about the issuing system. The user credentials are authenticated (UID. (Usetransport studio to transport objects or SDM to deploy them manually)User management (End user requests from suppliers. JCORFC provider service)2. 273. Common Folders: It is used by a team or group to store the documents between them. Export the certificate in STRUSTSS02 and import the certificate in EP Key store administration.The Content can be administrated by using a user.Eg: A company with 30. Dialogue User. Execute RSPOSRT.Configure SLDRZ70 .CONFIGURING SSO EP to BW1.2. Iviews.1. Favorites: It is used to store the accessed in links/ documents and provide navigation in one step. 6. Role Assignment(in portal and backend system). user based.Mechanism: 1.

2. We need to work with DB and their Patches3.0It became a part of architecture with Information Integration)Motivation1. STMS etc) other wise SAINT wont work. BWUSER are created with password provided.Releasing the object locks similar to SM12 approval is required.13. Reporting system to run the heavy background jobs. *. Graphical Representation with help of BO (Business Objects).com/ SWDC .System Administration . 275.Search in Google. ST03 279.Assign Portal Roles ---. We need to work with OS and their Patches2.8. 279RSC_COl is a background job runs to pump the date to ST03MONI is the table from here the data will be 43 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . We need to work with Browser IE/ Mozilla Patches5.. Define logical system to client (BI uses ALE Mechanism to transfer data from ERP to BI) so thecommunication happens between logical systems only.sap.User Mapping --ensure backend system mapper user (ServiceUser) has relevant authorizations.BI ADMIN is a business package provided by SAPBPBI Administration .Request Overview.(In Netweaver 7. Business Cockpit (In BI7) New6.Installation & Upgrade . Crystal reports.Component.Monitoring .200Request overview provides the user and component accessed along with CPU time and duration. XCelsius can also be used to fetch thereports from BI system. If BI Portal along with webdynpro development then select DI as well. Bar Charts.7.Small tables are grouped in to (DeNormalization) Big Tables. Request is handled by dispatcher and assigns to Thread Manager 4. Analytical Reports2. We need to work with Backend systems. Thread Manager assigns the request to server process 5. of Calls etc..batSelect business package -> Next > SAP BI/ ADMIN (next) Deploy will be finished.BI Communicates with various backend systems (ERP. 15-Aug-09BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE/ BUSINESS WAREHOUSE / BUSINESS INFORMATION WARE HOUSINGVersions3.downloads . When ABAP is installed (SAP-ABAP. RZ20.Add to download basket & Download BIADMIN also from the Market place. Web Broadcasting5. Set up the Master client in table RSADMINA --.System Administration .7.My SAP Application Components .service. SGEN. Establish connection between ERP and BI system 278.Portal Thread Weaver is a monitoring toll.If the calls are more and response time is high we may consider deploying of a proxy server. Pie diagrams.specify the field MANDT = <CLIENT>SE11 . Select the usage type ABAP for a normal BI system. 16-Aug-09--------. FAQS. total number of calls.What does BI do? 277. 2769.2000 As the calls are more Response time will come down4 -----.Content OverviewIdentify the component which consumes more gross time.17-Aug-09DOWNLOAD BI CONTENTwww.Portal Users . find out the missing index and recreate.Monitoring .txt. BIWFrom WEBAS 640 it is by default available with the Platform i.The Data is not eligible for fro updates.1.sap software distribution center . BW User = BW user6..slideshare. Line Chartsand graphical representation . i. Archiving system (Date from legacy systems is achieved into BI Systems.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.goto SE12 Specify the table --. 2789.RSPOR_SETUP is a program (BI and EP)Maintain settings for Integration into SAP EP.Configure Thread Manager in Config Tool.20003 -----.8.03 around 500 MBSelect download .10005 -----. using JSPM and update Kernel.BWMANDT = 1 save.000 as per the Industry standards. Withthis we can admin BI System through Portal.7. CPU time and No.Once deployed goto > /irj > User Administration > Identity Management > Find the user > Modify >Assign roles > Search for "BI Administrator" role > Add > SAVE.Now Under system administration > Monitoring > you will find Business Intelligence. Wecan display the content based on search criteria like duration.Goto Security Provider service and monitor the user sessions and if we require to terminate we canterminate the session upon approval..Normalization is a process of splitting up the larger tables into small tables upto sixth normal form tohave the granular information and establishing the key relationship between tables.4.sca format)Now goto JSPM & initiate go. Decision Making System3.Rare Job (Sys Admin -----System Config)Apply support packages/ business packages etc.> Select -> DownloadOnce downloading copy it to usrsaptransepsin (It is in . Thread managers are used to serve the user requests.Each component should not consume more than 2 Seconds on all average. Roles etc. Initialize RSA1 to replicate and activate the BI System. *.6. Userid etc. User uses only CPU and Memory of the portal to get the content displayed. It is used to identify theexpensive users at that point of time.e.2. Eg.RSADMINA ..ST04 > DB Buffer init ratioDB02> Missing index.Front end can be BEX or an Enterprise portal. User Submit the request.SAP_BASIS.sapdocs. ECC/ ERP system is consuming more timeto run the background jobs.Installation of BI System1.Check test and activate the connection..net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book Directly where as in SPAM we need to follow sequence. Requests are handled by server socket queue of http provider services.4. Never exceed 80 to 85% of CPU load for extended period of time on ABAP 70%10. Average response time..SAP Provides BI_CONT (BI Content) which contains predefined info cubes.Portal ---.xls.1C are the Basis versions . Itcontains time because the database engine is a backend system. CRM etc) and fetchthe data into FACT and Dimension Tables.03.Request summary is used to identify the CPU time.Now it supports XML files through PIBI is an Analytical system it is based on OLAP Technology (Online Analytical Processing). Dash Boards etc.100002 -----.Customization.Fine Tuning the Portal. 3. BI is used to run those reports with out effecting the performance.These tables are used to define various reports as per customer requirements. We can recreate the index by usingBRTOOLS also. https://<hostname>:50000/irj. 1.1------. it is runningexpensive Iviews (Embedded Iviews). We need to work with CacheNote: Tune Performance of Enterprise Portal . 277BI is an SAP ABAP application system with platform ABAP. Request.2006 -----. We need to work with JVM and their Patches4. Server Procurements is not as per Hardware Sizing 276. QUICK POLLS etc.info http://www. If BI Portal is required then select ABAP-JAVA-BIJAVA-EPCORE-EP3.It is used to display the components that are accessed.5. So. We can download from Market place and apply. Compare the date that is available in market DUN & BRAND street to define the competitivereports. DB Statistics. RSA1 > Goto Source systems Select SAP > Create RFC Connection Available destination: DEVCLNT001 SID: DEV Sys No: 00Users ALEREMOTE. Download the BI-Cont and deploy through SAINT (SE06.Change . SAP_BW) comes by default..It is always advised to terminate the user session instead of terminating the locks. Content Manager role to change the NEWS. Server process assigns the request to Application Thread ManagerSo we have enough threads to process the user request.Threads min is 500 and Max is 10.NO CLASS ----------. Missing Index and buffers aresmall.03 (Deploy atleast 703 because upto 702 are out of maintenance) current is 710.Modifying the system IP Address (Host Name) in systems if required --. It becomes intelligent by deploying thebusiness content through SAINT. 275Monitoring content overviews .Monitoring the user load on the system.BI Content 7. We need to work with Iviews7.CPU time more than 40 to 60% of the response time then consider CPU is expensive.. Flat files (*.csv.e.downloads .The data can be a master data with transaction dataThe report fetches data from various data sources so more memory and more BTC work process arerequired.8.

Easy Administration for Complex BWsNavigationGoto > SPROWhy do we need EP for BI Administration?1. SMLT.Select Info Objects .sapdocs.activities. Click on new entries.1.We can also include authorization object in a Transaction SU24. Now the user can access the complete SAP Schema.3.0Eg: To Create custom authorization object we use SU21 in R/3 where as in BW(BI) we useRSECADMIN... Installation of ABAP.SAPSR3DB is for the JAVA system. If you install Solman wewill get all the above components. Run "Oradbusr. 280.From BW3.Define SAP_BW as a system and create alias. Reporting retrieval settings > Overview Integration into Portal.Now Goto > RSECADMIN > Maintain > CreateGive the description ./irj > Content Administration > Webdynpro > Maintain JCO RFC. STMS. SR13. RSSMQ has been moved to RSECADMIN in Netweaver 7.Save and generate the profile in PFCG and assign the role to the user.SQL> Select table_name from dba_tables where owner = OPS$willsys99NWADM.7.Goto Authorization Table . Info Objects. roles.4.S_RS_COMP . reporting component. It is a web based BI Admin Tool introduced in Netweaver 7. PFCG will defaultly we need to use. 6.slideshare. 19-Aug-09SYSTEM COPY (FOR BI SYSTEM)1. Info Cube. Clean the database (SAPDATA1.Now goto> SPRO > SAP IMG Reference SAP Netweaver > Business Intelligence > General BI Settings Setting for Administration Cockpit.Mechanism: 1.2.e. 284. Info Provider.Define JCO Destinations in webdynpro (Four Connections 2 Metadata and 2 Applications)Goto . Qry OwnerS_RS_LCUBE .Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. work process connects to the database as user "OPS$<Hostname>SIDADM to getSAPSR3s password.do theuser comparison. Backup.Note: Logical system names are required to change only during system copy..4. 280The roles are : BI Administration. SAPDATA2. Installation of ABAP System. RSSMTRACE. SU21.S_RS_COMP1 ..TRANSPORTATION OF OBJECTSIn RSA1 define the objects -.In BW3.1c version of BW. 4.. To perform this we need to go with BDLS andchange LSNRSPOR_SETUP (SA38) is a report specify the steps that needs to be followed to integrate BI with JAVAEngine. post installation activities. up to ECC5. For WEB Monitoring using Business Packages2.The connection is only possible when . SP01. Take the backup f the production system (Source)2. objects .02..DEFINING CUSTOM AUTHORIZATIONGoto RSA1 .In thenext screen Add manually . After performing system copy in thelandscape we need to change the logical system name.Now Goto > PFCG -.Select the char which is in authorization relevant. Define source system i. DBA_USERS2. development.Info Area. Info Cubes.. c.Assign the roles to users in the Enterprise portal.System Copy in LandscapeThe above figure shows it is a system copy in the landscape.0 SAP<SID> is the owner of the database.Save.. Now it is RSECADMIN. DSO.) 283. EPCore when EP.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book read by the above Job.RSR and RS .e. Perform other post installation activities like (SE06.BI Content . Up to 4.Info ObjectRSA1 is the TCode which is used to activate the content and replicate the content.sql (Change the SID and path name of datafiles accordingly)6.)5. Generate control file (Alter database backup control file to trace)A trace file is generated in saptrace directoryRename the file to control.Perform user comparisonGoto PFCG .. Implement Usage of BIADMIN cockpit. b. BI-JAVA.info http://www. SU22. 281BI SECURITY 1. Restore the database from backup /or physical copy of the datafiles (SAPDATA1.Reporting component. Info cube Sub objectSAP Provided RSSM and RSSMTRACE upto 3. 2... User i. Business Explorer.We can perform Technical .1. administration and deploymentBI Security is similar to R/3 Security which consists of SU20.Create Zrole ... SMLG. a backend system in TCode RSA18.. BI Integrated planning that is modeling can be performed over the web. userwith prefix OPS$.Note: Dont change logical systems name once they are assigned to client. composite profiles. From Netweaver 04S (WebAS 7. BI_JAVA.. Netweaver onwards the above transaction is obsolete.give the object which is authorization relevant .Note: Every user will have the default tcodes (SU53... SAPUSR TABLESAP recommends to change the schema user password using 44 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . SU3). We need to provide this toevery user..Assign the user .In RSA1 . Remove the entries before "startup nomount" and after "Characteristics WE8DEC Run Control file on the target system7.e.3. BI Explorer. SU25 with authorization field...sql" to setup permissions on the database to create OPS$USERS a. Pre-Steps on the target system (The tables/ Data that need to be restored after a system copy)3..USR02. 284Note: If any of the 1-5 fails then R3Trans -d results (0012) snote : 400241SAPSR3 password resides in two tables..6c SAPR3 is the owner of the database. The OS user is created in the database with prefix OPS$(OS Username).Solution Manager is a CRM System. EP. Define Master Client in RSADMINA Table. Instead use BDLS tochange the logical system. BI System & Solution Manager System. Analyzer.. SAPDATA2. New Security Features 2. When the user log in with userid/ password/ mandt/ language it goes to the table USR02(Internal security of SAP) to validate users.Info Object . /nwa RSPOR_SETUP (SA38) SPRO in BI System Or manually in BI System. composite roles etc.Select the object click on Truck BEXwe can transport in this way...Info Area. 282In order to protect the reports at object and field level we need to make them authorizationrelevant in RSA1 where as SU20 in R/3. BI Intelligence. SU56.Goto > RSA1 .. 283SQL> Select username from DBA_USER. BI-JAVA functionality is required.Goto Business explorer tab -Authorization Check relevant.. Standard JobScheduling (SE36) and DB13 etc.SQL> select bname from SAPSR3. It is also use todefine key figures.SQL> select count * from dba_table where owner = SAPSR3. authorization classes. Modeling & Administration etc. Activate the content by using SAINT6..Collect them in package and transport -.. Broad Caster can be used over the web. You cal do it by using NWA ..The area that differs is to protect the info objects at field level. The Process gets the password and disconnects the session. 5. user comparison. We have another button Object Changeability with this we can give theobject as a edit compatibility.RC Change .Select the grouping . authorization profiles. Chars.0) on wards SAPSR3 is the owner of the database for ABAP..Include Authorization object manually or..Transport Connection . It is also use to define the transportconnections and editability in the Target systems.. Web tools for modeling. Download the BP[BI ADMINA] from Market place copy it to usrsaptransepsin directoryUse JSPM to deploy the Business Package [BI ADMIN]BI ADMIN COCKPIT1.menus..Define Role -. SAP Provides around 20 authorizationobjects which are required for reporting administration.Remote_OS_Authenticate = True 3..5 i.0 the RSSM. 18-Aug-09SARA : Tables and Archiving objectsTDM_365_BW : BW Security 281.. user assignments.. Process relogins to the database with user SAPSR3 who owns the complete SAP database. SAPSR3 is the schema user whose password stores in table SAPUSER which is owned byOPS$<hostname>SIDADMNote: OPS$ mechanism provides a means to connect to the database without any password i. Download BI Content from Market Place5.Click on change authorization tab -> X .is the prefix for all reports.Use Object Changeability tabin RSA1 to ensure that the object can be modified in PRD system. Execute > Setup call to BI Admin cockpit. 282. favorites. authorization objects.e. JAVA.Define the Integration between portal and BI Engine (Reporting Setting) in SPROUse NWA toll to perform..

Capacity Planning:DB02--------.It is similar to a post card.All the clientsSMLG .ADMIN123.e.4. SAVEGoto that particular SU01.. 285SQL> Truncate table SAPSR3. RFCDES.Process Flow1. This period job runs in the dialogue mode and collects thejobs and runs them into active mode which are in the ready state.Response time depends upon the data to be fetched.If it is manual we need to change in two tables. queries. If not the restore system behaves as a source systemand triggers the jobs. 285.This is sued to truncate all the RFC connections. If child client is not available it creates atransaction ID in SM58 and ensures delivery when the child client is available. SIDCLNTCLIENTNO. etc. gets the acknowledgement and datatransmission is consistent. How can you achieve this? This will beachieved from SECATT Tcode. and a backgroundjob RSARFCSE runs for every 60 Seconds. Export that data as excel sheet. It is reliable but the resource gets blocked at the target system.RSA1 ADWRSPC VariantRSPC Process LogNote: Each BI System has its own process before you start working ensure that you are well aware ofthe process of DTP. Source System.The source system process does not bother whether the information is received by the target system.Transport GroupBTCTRNS1 .3. extended and heap memory.. SMQ1..-------------------Ensure that R3Trans -d results in 0000POST ACTIVITIES1.Profiles.Now go to change mode > click on Patternwww.. ARFC2. Majorly we are going to use in BI and XI Systems. User authentication/ authorizations/ validity . A background job SAPMSSYST which runs periodically for every 60 seconds or the time specified inthe parameter rdisp/btctime = 60 Secs.OrYou have different users with different roles and profiles. BW to CRM.TOC (SE01) Transport of copies 2. Specify the RFC name in FINB_TR_DEST.CDCLS is the cluster table which is having huge dataDB02 . TRFC4.Space Analysis------.Global InstanceSCC4 .SQL> Insert into "OPS$willsys99NWDADM". SMQR Quin SchedulersQRFC generates the process of LUWs in the sequence.info http://www.BTC uses abap/heap_area_nondia where asDialogue uses abap/heap_area_dia 286.1.. File system issues when extracting the data from flat files (File corrupted. Truncate the table RFCDES. Transaction of reports and processes.Example: Central User AdministrationParent client creates users and send it to child clients. TBTCS.6. extended and roll memory sequentially where asdialogue uses roll memory..PreActivitiesSM51 .1. Variant is a selection criteria to provide the inputs runtimewithout user intervention. Change .Transfer ----------.To find all the IDOCSTRFC: Transactional RFC : It is an advanced version of ARFC. When the sequence is mandatory in the datatransmission QRFC is recommended. Table .Exchange -------------. 286ST03n is used to identify the response time of the users. query being used. BTC jobs are defined in SM362.ALE: (Application Link Enabling): It is used to transfer two loosely coupled systems (SAP to SAPsystems) Eg. SMQ2. issues3.Transmission => Are SameAnd is recommended to define the RFCs using logical system name to uniquely identify in thelandscape.QRFC: Queued RFC: It is an advanced version of TRFC to ensure the jobs are processed in a queue.Save. If the acknowledgement is delayed it will go into RFC/ Sleep/ CPIC Mode.With best of efforts it will deliver to Target system.Active: The job is actively running on the system.While client copy in ECC error: FINB_TR_DEST type 3.Give the techname - 45 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. filesystem permissions are not as per ETL format. If the target system is notavailable (Example BTC Process waiting too long in the active state)All BW Systems uses SRFC.Give tcode SU01 give the record name. QRFCARFC : Asynchronous RFC: It is used to communicate between two systems but the source systemprocess may not get the acknowledge from the Target.. Alternatively you can set rdisp/ wp_no_btc=0 before you start the system or set the time tordisp/btctime = 0 (Dont worry as SICK results in error)3. Database specific issues related to space during the data extraction from backend system.erpgenic.. SAP consider SRFC. or the duration of the report.TCodesRRMX ..2..Exactly once in Order. 20-Aug-09BI MONITORING BI uses batch processes to execute the reports.Released: When the execution time is specified for a defined job then its status is released to executeat a point of time. SAP named it as QoS (Quality of Service).We have SMQ1 (Outbound).Finished: The job is successfully completed/ TerminatedCancelled: The job is failedThe possible reasons for Job Failure:1..sapuser values < SAUSER. 288.EO (Exactly once) . reports transactions. which consumes more time andresources.SAPUSER valuesSQL> Alter user SAPSR3 identified by "New password"When you insert password it is alphanumeric(It will be in the encrypted format after restart)Goto > Tcode SECATT Test [ ] create Description [ ] Component [BC] [SAVE]Question:We have 300 user and every month their password needs to be changed. Each system that participates in the data transmission is identified byits logical system name i.RSRV . SAP Implemented all the above services to ensure the quality inthe data transmission. Change thepassword & username and .Click on Execute F3In the main screen >> In the toll bar.There are 4 types of RFCs1. file not opened. The jobs are saved in table TBTCT. (It is also used to identify the accidental data growth)ST04 : Buffer MonitoringST30 : Global Performance Analysis 22-Aug-09DATA TRANSFER TECHNIQUESRFC: Remote function call (SM59) it is used to call the other system using the gateway to fetch orsend the information.We can find the top 50 Tables. The memory is not sufficient2.It is used to start the business explorer and analyzer.For this we need to create a self RFC. Programs .Is a report to pause the background jobsBTCTRNS2SM37 . The dependent jobs are not completed in the process. SALE/ BD64/ BD54 it is used to define the logical systemsand sending/ receiving systems.Create Model View . system specific programs.slideshare. DBLS (Used to change logical system names) Clientinformation. QRFC EOIO .Relocation of objects SE01(Relocation of objects) 3.SRFC: Synchronous RFC: It is used to communicate with receiving system and wait foracknowledgement. It is used to communicate with receivingsystem and if the system is not available it will generate a Transaction ID in SM58.It is used to monitor the process chains and check for the links that are broken.(From Date . TRFC -.sapdocs. It is reliable.Logon Load BalancingRZ04 . If the memory is not sufficient in both thecases the process gets terminated or hangs up. TBTC*3. When you find BEit is SRFC.To repair the info objects 287.SQL> Insert into table OPS$<hostname>/SIDADM. ERP to ERP etc. Some times the data may be lost in transition.Identify top 50 table and record them every week to identify thegrowth of the table. 287RSPC .It checks exactly once.Ready: When the specified time elapses then the status will be ready.Use 1.RFCDES.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book BRTOOLS/ SAPDBA. STMS configuration.. TRFC and QRFC. Process Owner. The variants are not properly defined..BE (Best of Efforts) .5. SRFC3. Critical Jobs and their priority and escalationlevels.Change password .Now goto SM35 you will find all the activities on SU01.List of Background JobsRZ11 . SRFC --. Define the distribution model (In Sale TCode) in BD64 (Change) . Screenshots..To Date)Scheduled: When the jobs are defined the status is scheduled.2.com/ecatt-------------------SM35Create new recording . Toexecute QRFC we have a job called QUIN Scheduler.. CDCLS(Cluster Table) we can truncate strictlyBackup need to take USR02. Technically batch process uses heap memory.Operation ModesSTMS . It is not reliable and consistent. 288SM58 . SMQ2 . SLICENSE.

JAVA and process 46 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.messageExchange Profile: http://<hostname>:50000/ exchange profileIn order to ensure SOD (Separation of Duty) XI creates users during installation only. IDOC Adapter.XI3. The BAPI will be assigned between the sending and receiving systemBAPI contains one or more methods. Difference between SDM and JSPM?2.0 all the above can be selected during the selection of usage type.Integration Landscape userPISUPER ..0 called upgrade.Mostly for SAP Kernel.2.Usrsapsiddvebmgs00j2eeconfigtoolconfigtool. REP etc for user name analysis) 294.0Install ABAP Instance (Central and Database Instance)Create a client and perform ABAP Post Installation ActivitiesInstall JAVA as an add-on on that clientInstall XI_ContentInstall Adapter EnginePI 7.batOn UNIX . Users created in standalone JAVA & Integrated engine Administrator. 292Note:1. In India Reliance. Design means IR Customize means ID config time.Non SAP systems could communicate directly with SAP systems.0 based on WEBAS 640 Process Integration 7.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book Continue. SAP standard systems and mechanisms.Integration ServerIntegration Directory ----. 2901..ZIP .0 based on WEBAS 700 PI 7.2. Difference between config tool & visual admin tool?3.2GB.0 very limited based on WEBAS 640 XI30 to PI7. We have default user PISUPER Password : Master Password..It is used to define the XI Domain.XI/ PI ContentToolsVisual Admin Tool.Web ArchivesSCA .Select ABAP.e.NOTE: XI/PI license is based on date transfer like size -.ABAP Engine)?EP UrlsIR http://<hostname>:50000/irjUseradmin: http://<hostname>:50000/user adminJ2EE engine: http://<hostname>:50000XI UrlsIR: http://<hostname>:50000/rep (SXMB_IFR) TcodeID: http://<hostname>:50000/dir (SXMB_IFR) TcodeRWD: http://<hostname>:50000/rwpMDT: http://<hostname>:50000/MDT .It is used to define the roles of business systems in the XI domain.e.0 Xchange Infrastructure 3.Enterprise Portal Archives. ROSETTANET etc. Agreements).Integration Repository userPIISUSER . How did you transport the objects.PI 7. file transfer.SAP Archive -. 293UsrsapsidsysglobaltemplateconfigStandalone Log ViewerUsrsapsiddvebmgs00j2eeadminlogviewerstandalonelogviewerQuestions IMP1.. This can be installed at partner landscape.batSDMUsrsapsiddvebmgs00SMDremotegui.ID (Integration Directory) is referred as config time (Integration directory) which is used to configurethe run time objects (Sender.If the participating system is ABAP a technical system pointed to business system is mandatory.sapdocs.Runtime Workbench user. 289... It requiredboth command on ABAP & JAVA Environment.You can find in SU01 -> PI* Press F4PI_JCO_RFC . Hero Honda is using XI3.0 Immediate release on WEBAS 700 which required both ABAP & JAVA Environment. How do you apply kernel?4.Architectural components need to be defined. (Business APIs). 293. 292. They required adapters (File Adapter. 5GB. 2892.J2EE Adapter.QAS...6c isinvolved then it requires an adapter.XI/ PI EXCHANGE INFRASTRUCTURE/ PROCESS INTEGRATIONIt is used to communicate between SAP to NON-SAP and vice versa.0In PI7.XI Installation640 . Interface. 294Note: All the system that need to participate in the integration must be registered in SLD alongwith software component version and products. APIs Application Programming Interface: It is an interface in BD64 select the model click onADD API defined based on your application either to send or receive data based on the business it iscalled as BAPI. J2EE_Admin?5.XI/PI has not penetrated into market because ALE. <customer>. HTTP Adapter etc)When the supply chain market is growing the necessity of E-Commerce Electronic business EBs) isgaining importance and the vendors. UME in standalone JAVA & Integrated Engine (JAVA .XI Uses global format (XML Format) Extensible Markup language with the help of SOAP (Simple objectaccess protocol).EDI: Electronic Data Interchange: It is used to transfer the data between SAP to Non-SAP systems andvice versa.Integration Directory is nothing but customizationIntegration Repository is nothing but Development. Receiver. 23-Aug-09XI 2.JAR .Methods are similar to function modules to perform certain tasks. Integration server to process the messages2.Zip FilesEAR .Integration Server UserPILDUSER .0 very limited XI20 to XI30 is called as Migration.For XI we have XI Super andPI we have PI UserUsers in PI .slideshare. 291..Eg. <price>.Compressed Archive --.By using Tcode SXMB_IFR => To Open the XI Home Page. To replace them we need a new server i.To avoid complex developments SAP Provides predefined XI-Content which can be deployed usingIntegration Repository.(In the above user names take out PI and use the AF.. PRD) environment which is expensive and technology required.XI is Used to exchange the information between SAP to SAP and NON-SAP systems vice versa. Why SLD is mandatory in XI?.XI 3. 10 GB.(BE. suppliers wants the documents flow electronically with out anypaper In order to monitor multiple senders and recipients it will be difficult to use SAP Standardtransactions.info http://www. EDI. Where as companies arehabituated to use TIBCO. 4.batNWAhttp://<hostname>:50000 /NWASLDhttp://<hostname>:50000/SLDTemplate config Tool.Adapter UserPIDIRUSER .JAVA ArchivesWAR .Super UserPIRWBUSER . DIR. How to open the XI home page from ABAP?.SLD : http://<hostname>:50000/SLD 290.10 based on WEBAS 710 PI 7. landscape (DEV. Architecture of XI?3. 291.TPZ" Extension. How did you apply patches? Through JSPM4.Usrsapsiddvebmgs00j2eeadmingo.batJSPMUsrsapsiddvebmgs00j2eejspmgo. Batch inputs.PI is deployed through Integration Repository (IR).Enterprise ArchivesTPZ . How did you deploy XI-Content? Through IR. Application system which is a sender or receiver 24-Aug-09PCK: Partner connectivity kit. <shannu><willsys>.Integration Directory UserPIREPUSER . ABAP and JAVA. This is used to communicatewith XI/PI to transfer data to SAP systems.Extensions:CAR .e. It contains two areas IR and ID.Mostly for PatchesSAR ./go(JAVA parameter need to set like environment variable)Config Tool.XI Architecture:Integration Builder -------.. XML is an industry standard which is in the understandable format (Using meta data(Data about data)) It uses its own tags <address>.There are two roles in the XI System1. It communicates with bothsending systems and receiving systems via Intelligent Broker.Business Process EngineIntegration Repository --Runtime Work bench Central Adapter Engine.RFC UserPIAF User .SAP Component ArchivesSDA . The content provided will be in ZIP format which contains ".XI Communicates with out Adapter for the versions based on WEBAS 640 and above i.10 based on EHP1 WEBAS 710It requires both environments i.In order to monitor the EDI used TCODE WE05IDOC: Intermediate Document: It is in the understandable format of both sender and the receiver.Integration Builder is used to build the objects that are required for Integration (Source andreceiving system). BDC (Batchdata transfer communication) are in place..SLD is to define technical system (Hostname) & Business system (Client) that are going to participatein Integration . IDOC.Deployable archives software SAPEPA . EO and EOIO).XI/PI is an Intelligent broker to communicate with systems using adapter with RFC Mechanism.IR is often referred as Design Time (Integration Repository) which is used to create and design theintegration objects.

.Go To > Int. Transaction SLDCHECK is used to check the SLD Connectivity20.XI/ PI should be updated (kernel. Define a business system i.13.Use the URL: http://<hostname>:8000/sap/bc/spi_gateWith user PIRWBUSER & password. Import the system landscape (Products & Software components) into Integration Repository. product. 2987.It is used to populate the monitoring into ABAP Engine.3. Use RFC/ IDOCS to communicate with backend to import the IDOC/ RFC structure to use thesending/ receiving system data structure.SPROXY (Tcode)8.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. Defining Interfaces for archiving & retention period.sap.1 it is recommended to use NWA tool only (like creation of Users (SUSERS). Configure delete procedure in SXMB_ADM .Note: In PI 7.2. Define a technical system in SLD & assign the product and software component.1.e..lcrCom. Assign user in SZDAPICUST (PIAPPLUSER with LCR Rights with assign password)6.5.So each system that needs to participate in the integration define itself with a system role.12. now moved as a part of post installationactivities.. Importing content to Integration repositoryResides at sysglobalXIrepository serverimport. EP. 296Com.Maintenance certificate locks SPAM & is valid for 3 Months.XI requires both ABAP and JAVA components. interface. These can be performed manually or using NWA tool. SARA.The service defined in SLD. 295XI. 25-Aug-091. LCRSAPUSER14. businesssystem.1.4.Create specify conditionUsername : DDICAction: 47 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .aiiCom. Check all the services are running from Visual admin tool.Production Landscape 295..POST Installation Activities1. generation ofroles and profiles and assignment of roles to users. 26-Aug09INTEGRATION REPOSITORY1.XI Content contains predefined integration objects to avoid the design & development of objects. 296.Unzip the content into . MANUAL PROCESS. define technical system.Define RFC type "H" INTEGRATOIN_DIRECTORY_HMI to refresh the service in J2EE Engine.Senders & Receivers are configured as Application System.remoteprofileCom.Note: There will be only one integration server in the XI Domain that is used to process the messages. Define RFC connections "T" from ABAP engine to JAVA Engine.SXI_Cache (Status of XI runtime Cache)19.Import Design objectsDevelopment. Assign roles to PISUPER (4 Roles)7. Initialize integration Repository2. Triggering the self registration of Adapter Engine Deploy comsap.8. Use SLD data supplier service to populate information of JAVA engine to SLDNote: 9 & 10 are mandatory for all systems that are going to participate in the integration.sap to define the objects ..XI content should be relevant to the backend engine version ECC6. Generate proxy objects (sproxy in ABAP) (Tools. Configuring Logs severityGoto T-Code : SXMB_ADM Integration Engine Configuration Click on specific configuration Click on change .11. 297. Error Analysis Settings It is used to trace based on users. to a technical system).Earlier these activities are performed during installation.(Infocube objects)5. BI maintains their own SLD.9. Configuring Integration Server on ABAP Engine.Post Installation Activities1. Import the landscape information for custom development. Repository > Environment > Configuration of Integration DirectoryIt is also JAVA webstart on all the client machinesBusiness System 299. The Program IDcorresponds to the entry under for the J2EE Engine (Used to refresh the runtime cache)AI_RUNTIME_JCOSERVER (SLDAPIUSER_<SID>.Java prog (IR))ABAP .It is used to delete the messages (Activating the delete switch) .We can use ABAP/WEB to display the end to end monitoring of a message.Goto : DB15Tables in Object : SD_VDDAT6. 300It is used to delete the messages that are flagged for deletion. 29715.Receiver Determination to define namespaces.af.4.XI LandscapeXI Usually connects to ERP and SRMThere should be at least two systems in the landscape one for DEV and one for PRD.Tools .Transport Organizer User InterfaceINTEGRATION DIRECTORYIt is used to define the configuration that will be used at runtime.sap.slideshare. Party in acompany customer.AI_DIRECTORY_JCOSERVER: Points form integration server to the integration builder.tp2 fileThe XI Content is available in the shipped DVD or download form the Market Place.Each XMI Message in flagged for archiving or deletion upon processing.Execute transaction SXMB_ADM (Integration Engine Administration) Each ABAP engine is a Integration Engine.info http://www. Define URN (Uniform Resource Name) Com.Edit . Define RFC type "A"5. Import the design objects provided by SAP3. Configure ABAP system to SLD using transaction.sap..When the data is not updated in the messages during runtime.Change Global Configuration dataSelect the business system roles and save it. 299The system that is defined in SLD (assigned with client no. It is used to define the time period before it gets archived.rprof.4.Manage Queues Register Queues (Should say Registration Complete)17.tpz files.6.Note: CPIC_MAX_CON=500 (Environmental Variable) to avoid the error max connections reached. If the integration engine is configured as anIntegration Server then it is called as XI Engine & other are called as Application system (Senders orReceivers)Similarly as Master system in BI (RSADMINA)SXMB_ADMConfiguration .Process Monitoring Info.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book integration.new entries Select the category Specify the parameter valueQM1 . Export XI Content3. File.In principle XI Domain is defined in SLD & associated.It is used to set RFC destination.sap. SF01 to configure & Schedule the archiving)4.7. Import XI Content2. Config SLD . Clear the cache if required for SLDNote: IR requires JAVA webstart which is around 30MB on each XI Consultant desktop. Create RFC connection of type "H" for PMIStore (Process Monitoring Infrastructure).. Number ranges etc. a technical system with specific client. Application system integration server.16. Then we will go to ID to clear SLD. Message mapping 298.Each system is registered in the SLD. IX0S & DARK are third party tools for archiving.Category : ParametersMonitor : PM2_MonitoringTuning : EO_2.aii.2. Register Queues SXMB_ADMAdministration . client & condition also set for tracing.Assign LCR roles to users (P1APPLUSER)3. software component. (In ERP weuse DB15. Assign application role to user group in SLD data Supplier service click on user group icon. Patching XI/ PIUse SPAM to patch ABAPUse JSPM to patch JAVAMaintenance certificate is mandatory for all the patches in NW04S SR3 form January 2009 onwards.xiNote: Deploy service is also used to deploy small applications. Scheduling Archiving Job It is used to schedule the archiving based on time and date. We can specify the sender & receiver whose messages can be flagged for archiving. Define the uniform resource name5. Patches).Integration server & application systems are defined in SLD itself. SLD.Business Service . You can use NWA Tool to perform the post-installation activities automatically.Integration Engine Configuration (Change Mode)Menu .18. RZ70 with the help of RFC "SLD_UC"10.cp . Time Unit.cpp to trigger SAL selfregistration. Define the role of a system in SLD. The interface objects are cached in the table which can be monitored by transaction.0So to Integrate Repository . CIM should be updated before any other system inthe landscape. but ABAP engine process the messages flow between themusing Integration Server..Set to integration server. Execute transaction SWF_XI_CUSTOMISING to configure the basic settings for XI/ PI . Schedule delete jobs Job Name: SAP_BC_XMB_DELETE_<Client> 300.sapdocs..

slideshare. Oil. WE21/ To check IDOCS. Technical Routing: This is where the exact business system of a sender and receiver is identified. J2SE. data and time.112. XI.. which will be displayed in themessage monitoring3.com Internet/ Intranet http://<hostname>:8000 EWA MCOD/ OLTPBASIS NETWEAVERRequirements in the MarketBasis ConsultantNetweaverSecurity ConsultantEnterprise Portal TechSolution ManagerBasis: A foundation layer for all SAP systems and with out Basis there is no SAP SystemRole of the Basis Admin1.5. PM. SMQ2.2. receiver. as well as one or more databases.e.I18n3.Technical ComponentsAn SAP system consists of several application server instances. IIOP and Telnet protocols. too many receivers are not allowedin BE SYNC (Synchronous) i. Solution Manager and CRM)ECC.0. Insurance. 3. Installation of all the above components2.Logical RoutingT . this should be displayed in the messagemonitoring.5.● AS ABAP components (in the graphic on the left):○ The dispatcher distributes the requests to the work processes..1.. Toretain clarity a few communication channels are not included in the graphic. Call Adapter: If required central.The message is received by the inbound proxy of the receiving engine & it acknowledges back to theintegration server. It specifies where the message is stuck in the errorcategory. It provides the followingmonitoring elements. Non Unicode / Unicode4. If receiver agreement not foundthan this error occurs. Oil.1Portals 5. Unicode system (Multi language Support) . There are mapping failures (in IR).0 4. Component Monitoring3. It can processboth server and client Web requests. It is possible to define more than one receiver E010/ E0Technical routing fails with message outbound binding not found.0. the ASCS (ABAP System Central Services). 303Check the adaptors and connection between IS.0. monitor the status of queues. BI. Insurance BI. High Level Security (SOX)15.○ The instance controller controls and monitors the life cycle of the AS Java instance. 7.16.info http://www.BE . Sender_back. 3.● AS Java components (in the graphic on the right):○ The Server Processes execute Java requests.ThreadAdapter Problems 303.6. End to End MonitoringCOMPONENT MONITORING: (INTEGRATION SERVER)It is used to monitor the -Integration repository.○ The work processes execute ABAP or Java programs.QUEUE MONITORINGSMQ1. It cannot process any dialog requests.Technical RoutingM . RINF. adapter engine is called (CAE). Fabrication and Banking17. Supports (24/7 * 365)6.BE .1c. HR.2.iBW 2. HTTP.XSMB_ADMMessage Monitoring: It is used to monitor the XML message use transaction SXMB_MON1/SXI_MONITOR to monitor the message or the web option (rwb0 to monitor the message. 3. sender. Chemical. Continuous improvement by releasing Support Packs. PI etc.The graphic below shows the components of the SAP NetWeaver Application Server (in grey).1.sap. 305Advantages of SAP1.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.restart not possible. It supports HTTP. We also need to refresh adaptercache in SXI_CACHE into adapter engine cache.. Interface determination Interface has to be determined so that the message will be pick by that API. Check and refresh the cache using SXI_CACHE or check the configuration in theIntegration Directory. J2EE. 301It is used to monitor the XML messages from one end to another end. FI.5. IS Textile.IDEX5 is used to identify the XML Messages (IDOCS) in the adapter. 304UpgradingIntegrationDevelop * CustomizationBasis Platform 305.0. It consists of various adapters (FileAdapter.Small Midsize Business BI (Netweaver) latest in BI Suite7 Notes / Packs Support Packs Solution Manager EHP Good Feedback from the customers Good service provider from service. Mapping: The sending message data structure should map with the receiving message datastructure.ICM .exactly are the message has to be transferred.. Supports all third party tools mobile.● Central services (message server and enqueue server) are used for lock administration.the SCS (System Central Services) for the ASJava. OS Independent8.0 i c .Enterprise Central Component 48 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . CO. The message is received in the inbox of the integration server. PS.IDOCS: If the messages are still processed using IDOCs use SM58.0. The SAP NW AS can act as aWeb server or a Web client.Mapping ErrorsNo_Mapping_Program_find (Indicates problem in the mapping programs)RFC ERRORS Check the RFC connectivity. Post Installation Activities + Specific post installation for (CRM.The message is received in IE or Server by using Inbound with logical routing & the message isprocessed through the outbound processing using LTM.0 4. 3024. Sender. Supports MCOP [OLAP/ OLTP) Supports all kinds of interfaces Will use XI to communicate with other GUI Developed in PHP or JAVA 306. DB Independent9.Full disk or database errors. The message is processed with receiver determination to identify the receiver who is configured inthe integration directory.No receiver .Integration directoryRuntime WrokbenchSLDIntegration ServerNote: We need to see the icon as green Yellow means warning Red as error. Receiver and sender. On day-day basis we need to identify the messages that are not processed and escalated tothe respective trans. Userid and Password.0 c b 4. SMB (Small Customers) . Sender sends the message to integration server. PIsupports it. There are 6Pipeline (Central. WE05. Pharmacy. If all the processes are occupied therequests are stored in the dispatcher queue.Message Flow:1. ROSSATANET).Message MappingProcess Flow of MessageThe message is sent by a sender using by calling a outbound interface (Sending System). 7. The status determineswhether the message can be processed or not. receiver_back)Each pipe line internally contains pipeline elements.A dialog instance with AS ABAP and AS Java consists of the following components:● The Internet Communication Manager (ICM) sets up the connection to the Internet. Gateway.0 b3.TOO_MANY_RECEIVE_CASE_BEThere should be only one receiver in a synchronous message.Connection Exceeded (Increase the ICM Threads/ Soft shut down RZ10)ICM/ Min . InAS Java the ICM supports the HTTP(S). 3. Netweaver7. SOAP. there is a special instance thatcontains the message server and the enqueue server . Central_back.○ The SAP Gateway provides the RFC interface between the SAP instances (within an SAP system andbeyond system boundaries). P4.More information:Internet Communication Manager (ICM)Work Process (BC-CST) SAP Gateway Java Cluster Architecture.cannot be resent. It is used to process the message from Sender to the receiver. i..Argument: 3If the message id is 235 then logging in 1If client is 000 then logging is 0Display pipeline definition. messageexchange. It usespipeline call integration server.Messages can be filtered based on status. receiver.ASYNC .sapdocs. Exchange information between SAP to SAP and NON SAP11.e. Intranet and Internet (Web based)13. 30614. Upgrades and Enhanced Patches2. 6. 27-Aug-09http://<hostname>:8000/sap/xi/engineRUNTIME WORKBENCH 301..0 a 4.7. 7.7 ECC5 ECC6 ECC73.Message processing is based on LTML .net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book Trace level. (Register in the SLD) 302. Message Monitoring2.1a 4. if the error is like SYS_FAIL . 7. High level Security5.. 304. MM. and load balancing in the SAP system. HTTPS und SMTP protocols for the AS ABAP.In addition to multiple dialog instances that execute user requests.case . Tightly integrated with rich set of modules SD. Industry Specific Solutions10. If third party adapter like Tipco is used.

308Enterprise portal 640. create groups. Extracts the software.For UNIXSAP SERVICE <SID>Sys Master DatabasesystemJ2ee_ADMIN Java WebSAP* SAP R/3DDICSAPSR3SAPSR3DBUnicode . 3. 4. 710PI 7.cmd file and during the process they writes into . PS.1.Caching/ BuffersNote: If one App server is down no need to worry we can access another application server.Can create the useridNote: The user who initiates the installation should have the privileges as Local administrator to installthe software. To manage computer memory2.0.str .SSCR . Counter Centralized of Database) <They do not carry Any thing>MobileIEDebit Card ATM* Commit occurs then only amount (Synchronous update) will be debited from the ATM. Principle Consultant (Exp in Life Cycle Stages)14. 3153. Web Application/ Portal Engineer2.sapdocs.6D (3.cmd Sapappl0.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.USR02. 309.A client accesses the servers.log . AD Admin .0 SOLMAN.6B. It is intelligent to store the frequently accessed data as in Cache/ Buffer Rarelychanged. To perform input and output services (which allows computers to interact with terminals storagedevices and printers) and7.info http://www.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book 307.Different level of Designations in SAP1. 3073. To allocate the resources of the computer (such as CPU and input/output devices) among users.A server has its own address and sometimes multiple addresses.Interface / ScreenExports/ System CopiesKernel [ Dependent] 312. Load Balancing9. Alpha Versions)Libraries (Linux) ~ Exe (Windows)R/3 ArchitectureEg: Consider the Reservation Counter. PM. It provides access to services andinformation.GUIPresentation Application Database (Native formAll the passengers Resrv. Sapinst tool is used to install the software if required we need to download it fromservice. 314 DB OSKernel Provides communication between SAP. Frequently accessed/ rarely changed (Master Data) Eg: Address..Run sqlplus "/as sysdba"Select username from dba_users. J2EE RolesCO. It requires its own address. Patch Management4. SAP Basis & Virtualization ConsultantBasis Layer up to 4. 32/64 bit dependent)usrsapsolsysexeStart . XI Security WEBAS Java Security.. FI. 308.0.10XI 2. create users. SAP SD Solution Architect6. SAP Security Engineer9.com/swdc 315. Users always communicates in OPEN SQL which is SAP Specific format and notdependable on any database. 4. To control access to the computer3. and click (not double click) on the Databaseserver and then click on release notes. ORA<SID> provides the runtime environment for Database. 312Install Mstr [ Dependent]Java Comp [ Independent]JRE [ Dependent]Exports [ Independent of OS.Earlier case Individual passwords need to be set but now days only one Master password for all theuserids.On Windows OS <SID>ADM is also responsible for database but on UNIX ORA<SID> is the ownerto work on the database. (Sap Users) SAP K E R 314..Specifies the installation success / failureSapinst_dev.0.Pl/ SQLPresentation Server: Submits the user requestApplication Server: Process the user request by interpreting the request and it has a queuingmechanism based on FIFO.Multiple Components on a Single DB repositoryA host is either a client or a server.tsk file specifies the table/ index etc that needs to be created on the DB. SAP Abap13. Checks for user <SID>ADM (SAP System Administrator) Who owns SAP System and has all the privileges on SAP (Start/ Stop/ Environment)Domain Admin. MM. support packages. 4. SAP Business object Consultants3.slideshare. profiles. (This problems occurs ina Domain)If the user does not exists it creates now. Unicode. SAP Security Admin Lead11.SMN EPDB Owner 1. It provides set of services that canbe used by programs insulating these programs from the underlying hardware./usr/sap/<SID>/SYS/exe/run—the directory that holds a local copy of all SAP instanceexecutables. SOXHR Security/ Structural Single sign onAuthorizations LDAP User Administrative Monitoring BI Security.0B. DB and the OS.Transact SQLOracle . User Administration | Security5. There you will see the SAP R/3kernel and patch level etc.sap. SAP Development Lead10.150 Customers (Beta.6) ECC BI SCM SRM CRM B A S I SNote: Application Server provides Internet and Intranet to BASISSAP Web Application Server . 310.Each task is commanded by . create services etc.What happens during installation?1.orKERNEL: The kernel is the part of the Operating System(OS) that interacts directly with the hardwareof computer through device drivers that are built into the kernel.log . PI7. DB]Multiple components on a Single DBSID .(It may be required to create SAPMnt in earlier versions but in the current versions based onNetweaver it is created automatically)SAPLoc in WindowsThis SAPmnt is shared because it needs to share the transports. SAP technical architect consultant12.executables etc between systems in the landscape. 309 24/Jun/09SAP R3 4. Customize and Development. 310Kernel or Shell :The core that provides basic services for all other parts of the operating system.SAP software change registration.. EPNETWEAVER is a PIPA Application Platform People Integration Information Integration Process IntegrationBASIS NetweaverERP Security User Management EngineSD. 313Sql Server . A host has its own address on the network.also provides similar log in case of installation is aborted. To handle interrupts5. 4.log Sapappl0.xml -Helps to restart installation from the point where it is failed.Multilanguage Support This requires additional 40% of resources.0.UsrsapsolsysexeucNT1386 25/Jun/09Installation LogsC:program filessapinst_instdirsolmansystemoracentralasSapinst.2.0. 4. 311Default Users<SID>ADM -. and is its ownmachine.WEBAS ITSBasis LayerNetweaver 7.xmlKeydb.Structure of the DBControl. DB. Administration & Monitoring8.5B. MDM7. SAP BW Migration16. SAP Basis Senior Consultant7. SAP FICO Consultant8.--SAPMnt: Is a shared SAP Mount which is used to host the directories related to SAP.KernelSet of Executables (OS. 4. Role Management |6.tsk Sapappl0. 700. Company name. (database users)Select BNAME from SAPSR3. 313. SAP MM Consultant5. SD.log fileEg: Sasapappl0.SAP start (OS Level Access Related to SAP)ORA<SID> -.SAP<SID>SID . SAP XI/PI/ Enterprise portal lead developer/ programmer15.0 (SAP Stack) BI7. 3. To maintain file system4.Major functions of kernel are:1. It processdata rather than carrying data.[Dev] ---------->[Qlty]---------->[Prod] SAPmnt 311. To handle errors6.5.App server doesnt contain any data on its own. Performance & Fine Tuning7. 7. People Soft tech lead-security/ Portal/ Admin4.tsk.6D and so on . libraries and toolsHow to know the kernel version of a SAP R3 system ?Goto transaction sm51.bck Sapappl0. PM. WindowsApp Server 49 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .EPD SMNDB Owner 2 SAP<SID>First Shipment Customers .Integration of BASIS and Internet/ Intranet all functionality of SAPdefined in ABAP so called as SAPWEBAS ABAPSAPWEBAS JAVA to be more interactive through web.0. MultilanguageSAPWEBAS Application platform to host all SAP Application components.0SAPWEBAS SAPWEBASABAP JAVAProvides Business Functionality Interactive/ Dynamic. assign groups. Used to convert the data in to Native SQL Statements.

Upon running all the tasks the SAP Database is created and DBStatistics runs.RFCsPOST INSTALLATION To Check/ Test the installationPre. Listener .PI Suppliers DealersEnterprise Portal 322..cmd .ABAP Instance 321.toc.exe and writes Log file into dev_icm.SAP<SID> is used to start the SAP System.. Check the groups SAPLOCAL_ADMIN SAPGLOBAL_ADMIN ORA_SID_DBA ORA-DBA ORA_SID_OPERATOR7.These are also populated from JAVA Engine (Generic Request Message Generator GRMG)PUT .Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.Used to collect the OS Resources 2.STARTUP Sequence1.SRM .info http://www. and SAPLoc on windows Run .is a ABAP Engine JC00 .6...CRM . It creates local groups and global groups and assigns them to users 316. 318PRFCLOGPUTSID HOSTSTransCCMS . Netweaver & CRM2007)I. these users owns the respectivedatabases. Check the installation Logs4.Standalone JAVA Engine SCS01 .Used for alert logs that is populated by the service SAPCCMSR(Java Stack Only)PRFCLOG .slideshare. Starts internet communication manager by using icman. owner from dba_tables group by owner..Select count(*)..JAVA InstanceNote: Each SID uses different PortsNote: In the console tree of SOLMAN if all the three entries (SERVICES.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book Database<SID>ADM <SID>ADM UNIXApp Server Database<SID>ADM ORA<SID>Note: SAPSERVICE<SID> is a service used to start and stop the services (Password never expires) <SID>ADM expires for every 30 days Eg: SAPOSCOL.SAPCCMSR is an agent to collect JARM (Java Application response time Management) and pass it toABAP CCMS (Computing Center Monitoring System)It is only used in JAVA and ABAP stack. Checks the DB StatusSQL> Startup followed by enter keySQL> shutdown immediateNote: Only one SAPOSCOL per system Max of 97 Systems on a single box 98-99 for routingSAPOSCOL_00 .TPL Tablespaces are just like almoras in a house.Domain Level Local groups . 321SAPOSCOL_01 . sapstart. <SID> Directory usrsap<SID>. 3205.properties .Query:Select count(*) from dba_tables where owner = SAPSR3.groups. DVEBMGS <Instance Number> DVEBMGS00 . DB).Directories..cmdIn order to start the system it looks in to the profile START_DVEBMGS00_WILLSYS28 <Instance> <Host Name>3. sapinst_dev. 01)Mater PasswordJCE PolicyPath for the CDs..Services. (SAPMnt).is used to host the Developments 26/Jun/09TASKS Installing SAP Component on SOLMAN On Windows/ SQL Server On Windows/ Oracle Windows/ DB2 Linux/ Oracle HPUnix/ Oracle AIXSolution Manager Connects all the three systems (ERP i. 29769 ABAP related tables.cmd. .5. Check the disk space. RDBMS (Structures))1.exe and writes the log into Dev_ms. Login to the system as <SID>ADM with the specified password2.sapdocs. It starts database by using command strbs.11. log...Requisites for the Installation (JAVA. Check the two Installation users on OS From Local Users and Computers <SID>ADM.III. 316 Global groups . scripts and executables USRSOLSYSEXEUCNTI386 strbs. 323 If the folder name changed as NTi386 to NTi3867 sap wont startup4. SAP<SID>_00 . Check the USR Directory (SAP Instance files.II. Starts the instance i.7. . Usagetypes.LocallySAP_LocalAdminSAP_SOL_GlobalAdmin From Computer Management -> LocalSAP_SOL_LocalAdmin Users and Computers we can view this6. stderr2.Installation Successful --Installation Directories D:usrsapUSR directory is created with a shared folder SAP with shared SAPMNT & SAPLOC Eg: willsyssapmnt ~ d:usrsapSAPMNT: Both in Win and UNIXSAPLOC: Only in Windows not in UNIXThese are shared between systems and accessed locally and globallyCCMS 318.. SAPOSCOL .0) .10. Installation InputsSAPInstSID 319. . DB Users are set with default password and SAP Application open RFC Connection.7 we can see only exe directory13.ef | grep ora* On Windows services.Which is mandatory to start SAP3.log (Standard Error Log) . SAPCCMSR are created and Run with user.hosts all the executables from netweaver exe dir contains UC/ NUC and 32/64. Check the Hardware conflicts using OS Utilities Run . Installation Logs SignificanceSapinst_dir (Win..Trans .tpl. App) predefined shared SAP Directory withSharedMnt.cmdNote: Exe directory holds commands.DB DependentNote:Master password is set accordingly to the company policy.tsk. SAPSID-Instance Number5.Create MMC for Windows to start/ stop sap system From cmd prompt Startsap name=SID nr=00 SAPDIAHOST=willsys28Sets the user as SAPSR3 for ABAP SAPSR3DB for Java Engine 317.str..e.log USRSAPSOLDVEBMGS00WORKEg : 323.SharedMnt.UsersGroupsServicesCreating directoriesExecutables . i386/ ia64In 4.Updated Stats. Creates the tablespaces and datafiles on DDLORA.0. Installation Steps Users.SAP Central Instance DVEBMGS00 contains J2ee/ SDM/ JSPM direntories then it is Integrated Engine (ABAP + JAVA)Note: Portal is only an application that is not based on ABAP EngineEg: Consider Hero Honda Land ScapeBI . Unix)Sapinst.is used during upgradeSID Hosts . Trans Directory .. Config. . ECC6. Starts Application Server (Central Instance) It is started by using msg_server.str and data on the exports10.LoadDB. SAPOSCOL. Creates the Database and runs the scripts8. VMACHINE. CreateDB.SAPOSCOL is started first to check whether the resources are available (Operating system collector) Itis used to collect the OS Utilization information and pass into SAP system. USERS and GROUPS) areavailable then only we can confirm there are 3 Instances in one single system. Now command files are created pointing to .DXDIAG Tool on windows to check the consistency of the hardware 320. .Used for transporting the ObjectsNote: SID Specifies the Application Server and is possible to have multiple <SIDS> differed by theinstance numberQueries:SQL> Select status from V$Instance. --.OS Dependent .Kernel (Extraction)..Oracle Listener service should be started on the specified Port (1521-1529) 4. dev_w1. It starts the database and writes the logs into the work directoryNote: Stderr1. The task files are created to create the tables and load the entries The task files are displayed as process on the installation screen"2 complete 3 running 4 waiting"11. SAP<SID>_01. SYS DirectoryContains executables and profile parameters to start and stop the systemEXE Directory . if the service is not started SAP will not start. Database Server/ 50 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .9. 319Instance Number (Default 00.e. Checks the DB startup User issues a command called startsap2. 32212. dialogue by using disp+work and writes into Dev_disp. usrsap<SID>config on a particular <SID>ERP <SID1> ERP<SID2>EP EPBI BIJAVA JAVAABAP ABAPNote: Now-a-days its possible to install different engines as add-ons.the complete SAP Application Server.msc8.e. dev_w0. SAPSERVICE<SID>6...Cmd "WillsysUsr"9. Check the services and ensure that they are running 1. Linux...ERP (ECC5.. Work Directory This stores the startup and error logs --------------------Starting and Stopping SAP SystemOpen up the services file from windowssystem32etcStartup: What happens during the startup?1.12..Extract Kernel Executables (OS..used to specify the usage types that are installed on thesystem. utilization and upgradability Eg: root in Unix C: in Windows3. It creates Services SAP<SID>_00. Oracle Service<SID> Which is required for the Database On UNIX ps .. 317Where the systems are installed with these schema owners i.

Interpretation of user requests. 700.ini .. SAPRFC. Stop the dialogue instances 3. JAVA. Startup Errors and Resolution8. XI..1. Pre-Requisites 1. Power Outages 5. Installation Steps4.Steps: KernelsLogs: SAPInst..log for Oracle errors like 0ra-1578. JAVA)1.exe and writes log into Dev_ms. 327. Memory could not be allocated as per the Oracle Profile Parameters3.Set the parameters rdisp/trace = 0. Changes or corrupted profile parameters.net.Goto SE80 and publish system/ InternalNote: Download SAPNote to activate SICF services. SAPMSG. JAVA. If any of the memory. 326Various Reasons for the Failure 1. 325Database can be started using command startup or startup openSQL> startup Says. It is also referred as an Interface Eg: SAPGUI It has various versions: 4. dispatcher. work process.Solmanguipressgui.dev_rd. SAPInst_Dev..Mandatory 2. 3245.to access sap library5. 329We need to maintain the following initialization files.willsys.log. this parameter needs to be set in RZ10.. ICMSHUTDOWN Sequence1. 620. Instance is a service that represents the sap runtime.0.4/2_12 7..ini . Fully qualified host name FQHN dev_ms the host name should suffix with at least two dots(Eg: www.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.6c.log/ stderr log fileIt could not be started due to the following reasons. SID. 1. ICM2. Starting and Stoping System7. 710From Netweaver onwards to provide Web functionality <<internet communication framework>> ICFis provided so that the system can be accessed through web browsers. D: Oracle SOL Saptrace background alert_<SID>.net) Ports 8000: ABAP 330. Message server/ DB down 3. In sap terms it is aninstance.Instance profile depends upon the resources and it contains only dispatcher. [SM02] 2. 328RZ03 . JRE and set the path 1.com) 4. Servicemarketplace/instguide 3. IP Address/ Hostname . Installation post steps1.Goto SAP Internet Communication Framework (SICF)Tcode: SICFLogin to the system with the user DDIC with the Master password and create a super user similar toDDICUse SU01 Tcode to create a userNote: Dont allow to perform by the DDICSICF and press enterUnder SAP ->Public ->BC (Basis connector) ->Rt click activate.Used for load balancing 3.Starting Dispatcher and work process It uses disp+work to start the instance and writes the logs into stderr/ dev_disp/dev_w0. Installation Logs and then Significance 324.JAVA (Non Windows. startdb.cmd We should logon as <SID>ADM/ ORA<SID> win/ UNIX to start database.(Root and Administrator) .LogChecklist: DirectoriesStartup Startup Uses MMC ->Select SID -> RT Click .4.Causes:1. Dialogue Instance4.. Hostname/ IP Address change 2. The system name should be FQHN (Fully qualifiedwith atleast two dots eg: www. Instance has its own 51 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . 325. Swap memory 20GB RAM * 3 Times 5. SAPDOCCD.Activating Webgui/ SOLMAN functionality over the web..net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book Instance2. HTML . Central Instance3. Connection to Database failed due to authorization/ listner4.. Hostname/ Ip address change 2. Select webgui -> publish complete serviceApplication Server: It is a physical entity used to handle the user requests.Say for Eg: 20 Instances .ini .Ports should not be used 6. ->BSP (Business server pages) ->PING ActivateAll the functionalities over the web.v9start. CPU. CRM/ SOLMAN/ XI.3.Why the Database is not started?1. dev_w0. SAPROUTE. strbs. 1. ora-600 etc. Start_DVEBMGS00_Hostname Startup2.Strdbs. stop the database. buffers.Startup profile will be available for all the instances and it contains database.Oracle Instance started. ICMStartup. dev_rfc. Analyze Alert <SID>.2. Database. Queuemechanism based on FIFO etc.sillsys. Central4.System ProfilesThere are three profiles1. It provides value globally toall the instance when more than one instance is configured.(Work directory can be deleted and recreated)Each work process goes to the db and db will listen the workprocess OracleSOL01TNSListner . Instance provides memory.. 4.Installation of SAPGUIUse the presentation server DVD to install SAPGUI. Changes in SAP Parameters 6.Log. Certain scripts need to run after upgrade else the db many not start Export Shared Drive Import Oracle/ HP DB2 Unix LinuxKernel takes care of MigrationExports OS/ DB Independent CreateDB5..Start It reaches from the Startup Profile Start Database --.log.. Dialogue3. open it and try to add some items. Installation Guide Www. stderr*. There is no sufficient space to start database2.Similarly Netweaver also include Mobile Infrastructure to provide mobile interface.work process. SAPLogon.. Installation Inputs3.ini copy on the desktop.the profiles will be = 20 * 2 + 1 20 Instances * 2 (Startup and Instance) + DefaultInstance is a set of services with a dispatcher and work process.6d. : Eg: Senior .slideshare.look for all the instances. Notify all the users using email. there are three types SAPGUI for windows.to access servers over router 4.log ] From this we can find when the system is up or down.DVEBMGS00Work [ Available.pfl Default Profile2. CD with Lable. 27/Jun/09Note: Solution Manager Connects all 3 Sys .info http://www. Maintenance Activities 4.sql Listner control -> Lsnrctl Lsnrctl start Look for services Oracleservice <SID> and Oracle Listner. Sizing H/w (If user increases) 4. Installation Check/ Test6. Dev_disp {started .need to started on Linux ManuallyRefer.sapdocs. 28-Jun-09 Architecture of R/3R/3 Multilayer PS AS DSPS .It is a GUI from where the user submits the request. Offline BackupSchedule Downtime 1. Unix) 329. Default. Junior depending on the resourcesThere will be only one default profile.connected}If the logs could not be analyzed to debug on error situations then Rt click on the process -> Select Developer Trace.asc 8. <SID>_DVEBMGS00_Hostname InstanceResides inusrsap<SID>sysprofileDefault profile is used to provide default parameters to start the system.Internet service SystemUnder object name folder "System" rt click -> publish complete service. File permissions on the profile/ file or Dir does not exist... BI.5.logStarting Message server Started by using msg-server.ini .we cannot startup the databaseDatabase terminated or Aborted which may requires restore & recovery. We need to set this value to Zero immediately afterdebug. During OS/ Database updates 3. 640.cmd .SE80 Select . ICM startup. Hardware 2. Netweaver & CRM 2007)Netweaver components (EP. 330 50000: JAVAICM/ Hostname_full = willsys28.4It will write enormous log file into work directory. During H/w Migration 2.sap. DISP+WORKInstance profiles governs the instance such as work process/ memory/ logon parameters/ ICMparameters 328.SAPLOGON. buffer tuning parameters are not configured properly then instance could notbe started. msg server. Pre-requisites2.Shutdown: 1. 327Dialogue instance is something like extending reservation counters when users increase. Dispatcher is started by using parameters from <SID>_DVEBMSGS00_hostname. Dialogue Instance Database Central Instance Dialogue Instance Dialogue InstanceDefault Profile: Eg: Common Dress Code applicable to allStart_Dev : Eg: Started Individually<SID>_dev...ini . stop the central instance 4. 326. Dev_ms should be logged with customer key 5.ERP (ECC6.for RFC these files govern SAPGUI and requires on each end user desktop based on the need.. Port number 3600 is not available 3. CPIC_MAX_CONV = 500 CPIC Protocal (Common Programming Interface for Comm)In Linux# setem CPIC_MAX_CONV 500 and press enterInputs: Master Pwd.

6. BRTOOLS Take offline backup16.Client Oracle DBDI .14. RZ10 Define work process. ECC.SAP Netweaver. It provides Messageserver and Enque server along with other services.provide type of system like (SAPERP.BI7.SAP SOLMAN)TCODE . Notes These are small corrections to the programs which are applied through transaction SNOTE 334.from System-component information We need to apply patches (Kernel Info) Database Kernel R/3 Kernel22.4 weeks will be applied on PRD.16 BASIS .0.SOLMAN. Upgrade Kernel and SPAM version Kernel software and SPAM . DEV .5000 Bajaj .sapdocs.Password never expires (Service Userid)SAP Solution ManagerNote: Patches should be applied on Test/ Cust first after 3 .getIt checks for 1.. screens.066 Early Watch Client .work directory ..0 but from MAY. SM36 Schedule standard batch jobs7.sap.Post-Installation Activities1. SE06 Post installation Activity2. Hardware Key (Installed by SAP .Key and Requests . Create Super Users6.2. 332.000 4% VAT 48. SCCL Client copy13.000 17% Maintenance /Year 2.3 MonthsEach user license cost . Dev will be the Domain Controller Some times whenever the system is always available say for eg: PRD will be considered to be DC. 000 10.4.16 PI-BASIS .)/rmmain (ASAP Implementation Roadmap (V3. SCC4 Define client12. Road map is step by step guide along with the required documents (. 33424. In the post installation only STMS is configured7. EP7.Dialogue Instance: It is required to handle additional load on the SAP System. buffer parameters11.0 like ABAP 7. CTS is ran before STMS (SAP Transport Management System)8. Dialogue work processes only communicate with the user. 00022% Maintenance cost across the globe except INDIA5 1 222% 24% 26%Eg: Telco .QTY -PRD 340.40000 USD Developers are charged differently .35 ABAP . Instance is represented by its dispatcher & work processes (Disp + Work)Central Instance: There will be only one central instance in the sap system..13 Add-onSystem-status: .D:USRSAPSOLSYSEXEUCNTI386Note: In Linux SAPDB/ MAXDB will be the cheapestSAPDB/ MAXDB is a DB that comes along with the SAPUSMM System Measurement for the usersSUSER .PRD 1. 04. url.com From the tab called . we need to import into database level Utilities -> Import ProfilesSM21 step by step process of startup Static parameters . Enhancements and additional functionality. Hostname 3. bug fixes. Install Dialogue Instances if required DB Client software18.ppt.25. 000 + Customs -----. Client . SMLT or I18N Additional Languages configuration8. SID 2. 68. 3324. It provides Road map for Implementation. SICF/ SE80 Enable WebGUI17. PI7.--14.slideshare.) 338. programs owned by the user. 339 --.info http://www. RZ10 Import profiles from OS Level to DB5.16 SAP-BW . Suport.SLICENSE System ..Its an executable)Note: All the executables resides in .000 ------------------------. Required for generating upgrade/ Installation keys whereas Netweaver doesnt Requires a key. 00. 3383. PI.requires a restart Dynamic parameters .doesnt require a restart.TP Used to transport Mass data @ single shotSGEN is a tcode to wake up all the programs availabilitySMLG for load balancing incase of two instancesHalfPeak Hours 2 Background process Dialogue is converted to BackgroundSR13 Help (Before this we need to run an executableRZ04 Maintain operation modes Operation mode .0 (Process Integration). SE03 System settings(Modifiable and Non-Modifiable) In most cases PRD/ QAS are set to not Modifiable DEV/ SAND/ TEST are set to modifiable. EP.04. PFCG Define custom roles and assign to users.Solmon click on mirror icon 335.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.Request Permanent license key . Support Stacks It is a group of support packages that includes ABAP.Connection Test (Online SAP Service)Note:ARAMCO is having the following system landscapeSANDTESTCUST (DEV)QTSTTRNGPPRDPRDMIGR/ PRLLICENSING 336.04.0 (Enterprise Portal)2.CI . Done from the Domain Controller 2. Support Package Group of notes. Every Implementation should be started with SOLMAN4.5 Users Each work processes (15 . Current version is 4. Basis PI Basis.1. 337From cmd promptSoladm> saplicense . 341 ADD And provide AR ARABIC Click on simulateRZ11 Parameter setting Display profile parameter 52 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 . SPAM Applying support packages21. Kernel. Post Installation activities should be done on 003 or other and not on 0015.1.pdf. 339.till 9999(YYYY)Maintenance License . Upgrade.BASIS 7. SR13 Library configuration9. SMLG Configure logon loadbalancing19. Apply license through transaction SLicense (Access Market Place to apply License)20.3.150MB)3. 336Standard License . BI.doc.20 BI-Cont .270 ARAMCO -50000One License .Component Version .dev_ms log fileNetwork works for Message server and Message server searches for the least loaded dispatcherfor load balancingSU53 Contains what all the notes. It is a free tool for only the customers provided by SAP.0 to ensure the consistency and bring all the components to version 7.Night Dia to Bck SM63 DbClk on Starting Interval and Ending IntervalSMLT or I18N Language Installation Languages -> Classify Just provide the language ARABIC Then save it GOTO I18N System configuration 341. next enqueue and then the dispatcher(Or)Goto . 2008 it is referred/ Renamed as Solman7.000 Master Client Wont be used in PRD CLient. MILicense is user basedOnce the license key is received then goto SLICENSE Tcode -> INSTALL And click Install new licenses button 337. 335TCODE . 000 20.001 Production Client6. program corrections. 331We need to have a client to communicate with the Native SQLEach instance is monitored by its own DPMON (Dispatcher Monitor)For Net weaver JCMONICMON [SMICM] ICM Monitor.e. Dialogue writes the entry of the background job in the following tables TBTCP and TBTCS Each dialogue . 33315. SAPM et.Database Layer/ Database Server/ Database Instance: There will be only one database instance inthe SAP System.4000 USDIn India tag is 2000 USD for min number of users Eg: 10 + 1 is minimum . . ABAP Instance comes with 0 Java instance comes with 1. SRM. 30-Jun-09SM36 Default Scheduling Totally 14 JobsRZ10 Will be OS level i.0.status .3% Service Tax 2. It is used to store the Data.Client 331..8000 USD 10 + 1Users Developer 48000 * 50 = 12. Hotpacks Patches that are applied online without restarting the SystemIn UNIX# mount IP: / oracle/dump /oracle/share 29/Jun/0923.c..0.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book instance number and it is possible to install multipleinstances on single application server based on available resources. memory. SM63 Assign Timings 333. STMS Used to configure transport management system. Licensing8 Licenses for SOLMAN8 Licenses for NetweaverValid till 31-12-1999service.Notes --Note: First Message Server comes up. RZ04 Define Operation modes to effectively utilize resources14. .10. 340 3 system landscape DEV PRD QTY 2 system landscape SCC1 instead of STMS in case of 2 system landscapeSTMS QTY .OSS1 or SM59Go through: SAPOSS .

Administration.PFCG .Create New System with assistance. 346Additional RFC Connection DataContinue -->>System Monitoring Connection Check Mark . Under relevant Continue --> 345. Business Blue Print phase (Solar01) 3. These are required to Monitor.SAP* and DDIC doesnt have this authorizationsGoto .ppt.sap.Oraarch(SOLMAN 4..BASIS 7. 343(Hanging systems in the landscape are called satellite systems)7.Select the system --> Assign Logical Component --> Specify client --> Specify role etcSM59 . 1.. Hostname. These exe are required to be at OS level to startupthe engine.Select Interval and Assign 342. Configure the satellite systems (SMSY) 343.Tcode .Other Objects a pop up box is prompted to provide the inputsProvide SID. . Assign logical components5. servers.Goto SMSY Goto . sizing.Click on generate profile.0.jar files 01-July-09SM63Select the intervalOperation Mode .. Click on Maintain Global data Type under the url as : service. Administer the systems from a central location called SolutionManager.)3.Select main Instance (RT Click) . Once the satellite system is configured there will be a trusted connection b/w the systems. Instance Number and Click on generate Installation or upgradekey. 348. users are not existingDelete the user by ensuring that they are not pointed to any RFC and similarly RFC Connections aswell. 1.Trusted system RFC Connection Continue -->Note: SOLMAN will connect to the back end system either trusted/ Logon screenOutgoing RFCs RFC Connection for Read Access Option : Generate Username and password User : SOLMANSOL001Continue -->> RFC Connection for Change Management Option : Generate Username and password User : SOLTMWSOL001Continue -->> RFC Connection for Trusted Connection Option : Generate Username and password User : SOLMANSEWD 346.. databases for the satellite system3.Note: Except exes everything will be stored in DB. and Suport. Satellite systems are the backend systems which are defined in the SAP Landscape.4.0 to Ensure the consistency and bring all the components to version 7. Early Watch Reports (EWA)6. . License Keys or / Installation Keys/ or Upgrade Keys 2. Click on create to create a solution2.RFC ConfigurationsEven we can delete RFC connection from SM59Note: Ensure that RFC Connections are created earlier..Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.info http://www.car. Define a Solution and include systems for the following 1. software components. Support pack levels. 344. Upgrade. specific role in the backend system. 345Provide System Number 00 Message Server wilerpdev (Satellite system host name) Continue --> Establishes Generate RFC Destinations put a check mark the connections Assign Logical components put a check mark b/w R/3 and Solman Clients .4.slideshare. 342Note: Ports for Oracle Listener (1527 to 1521) Oraclesolsapbackup . Road map is step by step guide along with the required documents (. SAP Router12. 349Goto T-Code DSWP/or Solution_Manager1.Put a check mark under SAPECC Server. Configured the service Desk to raise the issues as tickets and forward them to SAP if required. Satellite systems 3.doc. Required for generating upgrade/ Installation keys whereas Netweaver doesnt Requires a key.SMSY is used for the following1. Created from V$DATABASE.0 Development 800Assign Logical components to the system that is created.0 but from MAY. It is a landscape information provider and specifies the following.0 like ABAP 7. url.The user should have the authorization objects S_RFC. Instance Number and Installation No.Provide the description and Click on Menu Tab 347. refresh data.Under landscape components .SMSY and it is used to define the following. System Administration 3. databases manually but. It provides Road map for Implementation.Just save it.com It is used to communicate with SAP Market place using SAP Router.place the dump here . Provide solution (Any name eg: ECC Solution) Lang .Assign System Monitoring Continue -->> Complete -->>It brings up the password screen 3 times . Create products. Create systems. Project Management for implementation1. 2. Realization Phase (Solar02) 4. Click under or on 53 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 ..2. 348Main Instance Logical Component Role ClientSAP ECC Server SAP ECC 6.Solution Landscape which is used to include logical components (<SID>Client) so that all the aboveactivities are carried out based on Solution. 344Goto .800 Continue -->Select use scenarios: Select . all of those are createdautomatically when a satellite system is defined.0.. License Keys . InstanceNumber).6. Configure satellite systems Eg: DESC V$DATABASE Select DBID. Create solutions (Early Watch Alerts) Solutions are required for Monitoring. System Monitoring 2.0 (Process Integration). servers. EP7. NAME.need to provide the password for the back end system. Business process monitoring (BPMON)11. This key is called as Solution manager key and it is system specific (SID. It is a free tool for only the customers provided by SAP. 2008 it is referred/ Renamed as Solman7. Project Preparation (Solar_proj_admin) 2. 02-Jul-09Configuring SOLUTION MANAGER SMSYGoto SMSY . S_RFCACL in the role to create andcommunicate with the back end systems. 3. 349. Current version is 4. Maintenance Optimizer (MUPZ) 5. Every Implementation should be started with SOLMAN4.EnglishSMSY is called as system landscape where we try to include a landscape.. 347Assign the transaction by clicking Transaction Button and assign SU53 TcodeAnd click on assign transactionsClick on Authorizations Tab and click on changeHit on manually and Include Authorization ObjectsSelect S_RFC and S_RFCACL and save.interface to upload the documents without any virus.pdf.BI7. PI7. H/w manufacturer and service Level agreements.It is mandatory to provide the installation key for all the Netweaver system withoutwhich the installation cannot be continued.Subsequently we can define systems. Logical components specify the client number and the client role. Client information etc.0.0 (Enterprise Portal)2. Service Level Reporting (SLR) 4. System Landscape Directory (SLD) Eg: Logon to Solman and administrate everything on the landscapeCreating Satellite systems1. backClick on User tab and assign the user the perform User comparisonSMSY Continuation --Creating the Logical SystemLogical components are more important to communicate with specific client.Role MaintenanceProvide the role name ZRFC and click on Single RolePrompts to Save this . MsgServer Hostname..5. Installation Key/ Upgrade Key2.)/rmmain (ASAP Implementation Roadmap (V3. We can also document the hardware info. Solution Manager Diagnostics (SMD)10.0 SR3) CD RMMAINSolution Manager1. Define the logical components1.Solution manager will be in a separate system. .sapdocs..Maintenance optimizer etc. Reporting.3. It is required only for Central Instance as it is tied up with the Message Server. and regenerate RFCs and Delete RFCs1.S_SMC_47000017/ CRM_DNO_Monitor Tcodes System should be registered with Solman to get the support8. Hostname. Change Management. Documentation (Final preparation/ Go Live are not captured)9.To create users and RFC connections in the Satellite system (it 3 times knocks the door of the backend system) and the 4th time need to provide the username and password for the solution manager.VSCAN Tcode .net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book attributes Zcsainstalled languages (Parameter) System Language usrsaptrans .

exe.6. RFC Destinations SM_WISCLNT001_READ SM_WISCLNT001_ONLINE 353.Solution Settings TAB CCMS MONITORING OF EWA. 354.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www.1. 350Note: Group users can only be modified by that owner of the group i. Select solution landscape/ Maintenance (Search for SAP Router) 03/Jul/09STMS . Sql Statements etc.S_SMC_47000017 (To Check the messages in the SOLMAN 54 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .).exeTypesSupported (REG_DWORD): 0x7OrIn usrsap directory create a sub folder called SAPRouter..2. Define standard service properties in Control Panel ® Services.info http://www. Download the latest version of the SAProuter from SAP Service Marketplace. Create the subdirectory saprouter in the directory <drive>:usrsap.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book Solution5. 353This requires the satellite systems required patch up (ABAP.The major advantage of this tool is It picks up the complete information of the usersscreen so that the processing is simplified.Task not assignedRed Color .Database is filled 80% and need to send me an email.exe to the directory you have justcreated.Once we save the solution under> Solution Structure | The SAP System with all the details are displayed> Copy Customizing | It is an option to copy the customizing of alerts From another solution.sapdocs. 350.. This is toensure the compatibility between Solution Manager and the Satellite systems Eg: Back end 4. For latest version we need to download from the Market place. SAProuter should not run under the SystemAccount. ST-PI.5. if this RFC doesnt work we cant establish connectivity with SAP.service.The entries in OSS1 (It is a transaction) reflected in RFC Connection SAP-OSSCopy SAP OSS RFC to SAP-OSS.SAP Router are meant to login to our SAP System (remote) by the SAP to resolve any issue that mayoccur.SM59 to verify this system is monitored by SOLMAN or not. 355Checking the Routing connectivity with SAPTrans-OSS1 is used to configure the connectivity with SAP.Transport Management SystemFrom Menu Help -> Create Support Message and this message will land up in Solution Manager.6 c is a Basis | P A T C H E S | Front End Netweaver7ADP ..Locale -a will tells us what language the system will support 355.Keep the files in TRANS Directory and usrsaptrans..Note: process will be slow down because of some expensive reports (select * from .. To avoid the error message “The description for Event ID (0)” in Windows NT event log. Memory Bottle Neck .save and activate Go back and save -goback comeback .Check Mark Create .Save It. If SAProuter has already been entered as a service with srvany.Expensive reports bottle neck Critical Business Process . 04/Jul/09SAP RouterIt is an executable file downloaded from service market place.Service DeskIt is a tool used to create messages from the satellite systems and monitor from the solution manager.com/patches)The SAProuter version must not be under 23. Client 001.slideshare.. you haveto enter the following in the registry: UnderHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services Event Log Application enterthe key saprouter and define the following values for it:EventMessageFile (REG_SZ): . Synergy ticketing tools.Confirm 352.. set the startup type to“automatic” and enter a user.3.exe -p “service -r <parameter>“Please note:The points stand for <drive>:usrsap<parameter> can be replaced by other parameters with which SAProuter is to be started. We have to maintain maintenanceoptimizer in Solution Manager and should get an approval to download SAP Router with our hostname and IP Address (This info need to send to SAP)We have to download Cryptographic file so that it will connect to SAP System by converting thepassword related information.TAB Provide . Copy the executables saprouter.exe and niping.. If not Gowith SMSY and create the logical systemSystems > Rt Click SU53 SU56 What user is having user buffersYellow Color . you can get a version (may be obsolete) from your directory<drive>:usrsap<SID>SYSexerun.Technical Infrastructure Display TopologyIt displays all the systems that are subjected for monitoring through this system.Spool bottle neckNote: We can also integrate ticketing tools like Remedy. Solmanhas its own Service Desk (Ticketing Tool)Continuation from 02/Jul/09T-Code: DSWP Click on Solution Landscape Solution Landscape Maintenance 351.com is recommended for connectivity.saproutersaprouter.Task assigned but activities are missingGreen ..Earlier OSS1 is used to serve as a Market place to the customers but due to the network congestionbetween the customer and say systems SAP discontinued the usage of OSS1 and service market placewww. Users.sap.Provide Source| DestinationIf CCMS(Computing center Monitoring system) connectivity is in red or CCMS destination isblank thenGoto RZ21 Monitoring Properties and MethodsFrom Menu .Time interval 5 Mins under Monitor graph refresh periodAnd click on CCMS MONITORING OF EWA (Early Watch Alerts) Select the system . SAPSNOTE and provide the logon security details that is languageEN..Check Mark Service .Printing bottle neckHP .Prerequisites (Till 6th point is from SAP Website not from Willsys Notes)You have the latest version of SAProuter (available from the SAP Service Marketplace(http://service.Status (From here we need to apply patches) in Solution ManagerNote: Maintenance Optimizer is used to find the next level of patches available.This tool is similar to Remedy..Service Level Reporting means Eg: Consider the domestic cylinder. 351 Specify the Logical Component names and select the SID:Client Number (Put inSolution) Under logical component Select SAP ECC save it and click on Solution Settings .) might berunning even the processor is good enough to handle. BASIS.Note: Any changes in the route tab require the router to be restarted..sap. Clarity. 354If there is no SAProuter there. remove the definition of theservice from the Registry and restart the host. It will be in the run directory (Olderversions)..Background jobs bottle neckARAMCO Dialogue process bottle neckGo through other options underSetup system monitoring |.User defined Alerts Select all the alerts and their threshold values .System MonitoringGoto: Solution Manager Select the solution Click on operation setup Select system monitoring Select setup system monitoringSelect the SID and Installation number and it should be in Active. 352The early watch alert service runs the transaction SDCC (Service Data Control Center) in thespecified systems and brings the alerts based on SAPS threshold values Eg: Expensive transactions.saproutersaprouter. Read the READMEfile in this package. Synergy with the Solution Manager.Setting up OperationsGoto: DSWP/ Solution Manager Maintenance Sap Specified Alerts Select the solution Click on operations setup Select solution monitoring Click on early watch alerts Create SAP Early watch alert . Reports.Procedure.SID | INSTALLATION NUMBER | ACTIVESMD 0020311138 Check MarkSave it. PI-BASIS etc.Successful* Note: Through SMSY we can find whether the logical systems are assigned or not.4.e. Define the service with the following command:ntscmgr install SAProuter -b . user is SUSERID.Click on create Target SID . It isimportant that the parameters are within the character string enclosed in double quotation marks.NOTE: Interface Scenarios is for Project Management Save the solution and we should able to see the system/ solution in EWA and the system andserver information should be fetched into solution directory. group_admin and SID AdminNote: System ..

filters and SAP Router etc. Administration6. Maintenance optimizer is only an authorized solution. applying thepatches manually.info http://www. template or support. 357Creating Business PartnerUse transaction BP to create Business Partner.0D Basis 3003.SOLMAN_DIRECTORYGoto solution manager and use above tcode to find the solution.71 Basis 6.Goto TCODE AISUSER 358.1242931. business owners. Scenario is nothing but a group oftransactions that are related to a specific module like SD. customer.sapdocs. SLR .00 Basis 6.0E Basis 3003.Activating BCSET . maintenance optimizer. firewalls.Goto the Satellite systemTcode: SM30 Table BC_BCOS_CUST this table maintains the RFC connections for the service desk andCHAMS i.https://websmp203-sap-ag.actually in RampUpSAP GUI FOR WINDOWS 6.de/swdcSupport packages and patches entry by application groupMaintain the table AISuserIn order to maintain this table SAP_MAINT_OPT_ADMIN role should present. Project Preparation2.SAP Download manager Download Manger.4.Key process indicators.slideshare. GO-LIVEDuring this phase the system is subjected for parallel run i.6.We need to activate business sets for service desk. Allow the solution manager to choose the support packages or choose download manager toselect the support packages.. Maintenance Optimizer. if a service desk message is raised it uses the above RFC to land the ticket. 356.0 .1I Basis 3104. RealizationIs a place where the actual configuration takes place SOLAR02Note: Solution Manager is also called as frontend platform to configure all the back end systems.5. Milestones are defined.Tcode: SOLAR01 is used to define the business blue printThis is a phase where the required scenarios are selected.Goto DSWP Select the solution Goto edit Create business partner Select the users .Click on continue to confirm the files in the download basket. MOPZWhen ever we need Read permissions for CCMS monitoring we have to define topology.00 (ECC 6.4. EP etc.0F Basis 3003.Installation BaseWe can use this to identify the installation base of the satellite system. Select Led by (Customer or SAP) Provide plan days say 2000 PD 5. HR.0) . EWA (Early Watch Alerts)4..Maintain Optimizer Setup Provide SUSERID: without zeros With this user only the maintenance optimizer will work.Create Installation Base Initial data transfer for IBase 357. BI etcThe scenarios are provided through SAP BPR (Business Process Repository) 360.Internal security is obtained by defining roles and assigning those to the users. Unit testing: Used to test the customizing in its test client within the same system.. proxy. Satellite Systems2.Project ManagementSAP Solution manager provides project implementation tools through ASAP methodology(Accelerated SAP)ASAP Methodologies : It contains 5 steps1.205. both Legacy and SAP runs together 55 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .Installation BAK . Create Maintenance Transaction2.Includes SOLMANNetweaver 2007 . change requestmanagement etc.1H Basis 3103. Project Preparation: During this phase the business requirements are gathered and documented. persons (Responsible persons).00 Basis 7. End user acceptance.. support.The configuration takes place and change requests are generated in the target system subsequently asupport message is raised to release or import the transport request before testing.SAP Project Reference ObjectOSS ./SCPR20 is a transaction which is used to activate the business sets that are provided in the system. 356 5-Jul-09TASKS1. Provide project name 2.Activating EWA (Early Watch Alerts)3..SOLMAN40_MOPZ_TTYP_SLMO_000SOLMAN40_CHARM_PROXYFACT_001Note: BCSET should be activated only once because it over writes the existing dataTcode: /$tab /$sync deletes the buffer on the application server. 358 User Contact Person Sapuser 5013295The user with which we login or the user in the user master record.e.Ensure that your solution manager is having support package ST[Solution Tools] minimum 10 level. 3614. Goto download manager and download the files and perform the maintenance i. FI.SAP uses tcode:SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN Click on create 1. Business Blue Print phase 359.Service Level reporting7.72 Basis 6.e.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. 1296589 (notes)Start ..create That user will be a partner in our solution manager..Goto Backend system Create an RFC pointing to Solman S_SMC_47000017 to check whether the tickets from varioussystems are landed in Solution manager.Entry in Table8.204.e. But when we install thesystem with lower package levels {Solution Manager 4.The core team is defined from SAP.Includes SOLMAN.Enterprise Core components)6. upgrade etc. Final Preparation:It is used to prepare the quality and as well as production system. SAP Early watch report. MM. implementing partner.6C Basis 4604.ERPNetweaver 2004s . Tcode:SCC1 is used to copy the requests between clients before change requests are released..IB52 . BI.(Solar_testplan)We can maintain the project documentation and the general documentation using the respectivetabs. System Monitoring5.40 (ECC 5. Final Preparation5. 360 07-Jul-093.SPRO stands for . integration client and test cases are built during theconfiguration only.Project type can be implementation. Realization Phase4.AIS user is used to maintain service market place userid to communicate with SAP and the RFCConnection will be SAP-OSS 06-Jul-09Configuring Maintenance OptimizerIt is a tool provided by SAP to ensure that all the support packages that are released after April 2007related to Netweaver will be approved and downloaded through MOPZ we can add support packagesto the download basket in the Market place.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book System)OrCRM_DNO_MONITORAlso refer BCOS_CUST tableEnd user can create a message by using the T-Code: NOTIF_CREATENote: SPRO1 is used to perform post installation activities for the Solution Manager. Business BlueprintIn this phase the project is documented and the blue print gets signed off from the customer.. Select the component and system3. internal andexternal security.5B Basis 450 361.In the current version of netweaver most of the components are activated.3. 2.40Test Case documents . etc alsoreferred as Steering Committee (With some management skills)These committees assemble from time to time & review the progress of the project. The integration testing signoff fromthe users. Select the solution: EWD solution for eg Hit okie 4. Service Desk . External securityobtained by deploying routers. MTP (Mote to Production) and readiness of production system communicating with SAP toconduct GO-Live sessions.Companies such as IBM may create a template project so that all the projects follows the same. 3. End user training.5..Online SAP ServiceAISUSER .Goto IB52 or DSWP Select solution Goto the menu .Assign SAP service Market place userid without "S000"SAP-OSS (RFC connection should also use the same userid to communicate with the market place)Activate BCSET or MOPZ is upgraded through Solution ManagerGoto SPRO or SCPR20 activate. 1. Integration testing: It is performed in a separate system QAS Non _ ModifiableNote:Netweaver 2004 . Type of project Implementation. Solutions . Golive / Support1. 3593. (Need to use carefully in the production system)1. Define the scope of the work under SCOPE tabNote: Include the logical component that is going to be involved in the projectFrom system landscape tab define the logical system2. upgrade. TestingTesting takes place either in the testing client.0B Basis 4004.0} with base level 6 then we need to activateupon upgrading the patch levels.

ROAD MAP (Tcode .Management approves location change.Change Request Management System .Select the ASAP Methodology .Modify a storage location) 362. Service Market Place. pdfs. Administration 4.slideshare.Issue/message closed LEARN ABOUT US About Careers Our Blog Press Contact us Help & Support USING SLIDESHARE SlideShare 101 Terms of Use Privacy Policy Copyright & DMCA Community Guidelines SLIDESHARE OUTSIDE SlideShare Mobile Facebook App LinkedIn App Widgets for your blog PRO & MORE Go PRO new Business Solutions Advertise on SlideShare DEVELOPERS & API Developers Section Developers Group Engineering Blog Follow @SlideShare © 2010 SlideShare Inc. BCSET 5.Now it is also be treated as an Issue (Issue Management). MOMs(Minutes of Meeting) Etc. All rights reserved..GOTO .RMMAIN)It provides the complete implementation steps which are discussed above along with accelerators. 362 -. urls.Exclusive SAP Basis Training Book | www. Post Installation Activities 3.Management declared that there is no change in location (Issue Closed).Goto Project Prep and Db click .Mssg lands in SOLMAN.RMMAIN .sapdocs.net/eddai/exclusive-sap-basis-training-book forcertain period of time. 56 sur 56 12/01/2012 00:29 .User request a change (Say for Eg .CHARMS ..Data Transfer to SAP system is performed periodically fro legacy systems and the legacy systems arediscontinued in due course of time upon final acceptance from the business process owners. PowerPoints.info http://www.SOLAR01. Installation 2.Select AcceleratorNote: Need to focus on these points considering Solution Manager1.to apply patches..From Menu GOTO .Service desk message..Accelerators are nothing but predefined templates. Integration test. word docs.Based on the Priority approval for changing the location.. a change request to change location.change request submitted for unit test.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful